Draft Contract - Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority

Transcription

CONCESSION MANAGEMENT CONTRACT NO. MWAA-5-15-C001
BETWEEN
METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY
AND
____________________________________
FOR
MANAGEMENT AND OPERATION OF THE
PARKING AND SHUTTLE BUS CONCESSION
AT
RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT
July 1, 2015
Table of Contents
Page
ARTICLE 1.
CONTRACT TERM ................................................................................... 1
Section 1.01
Section 1.02
Section 1.03
Contract Term
Contract Year
Option Period
ARTICLE 2.
DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................ 2
ARTICLE 3.
PREMISES AND OPERATING EQUIPMENT ........................................ 3
Section 3.01
Section 3.02
Section 3.03
ARTICLE 4.
Premises
Vehicles and Operating Equipment
Use of the Authority’s Premises and
Operating Equipment
RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR ...................... 7
Section 4.01
Section 4.02
Section 4.03
Section 4.04
Section 4.05
Section 4.06
Section 4.07
Section 4.08
Section 4.09
Section 4.10
Section 4.11
Section 4.12
Section 4.13
Contract Obligations
Public Parking Operational Requirements
Parking Rates & Waivers
Shuttle Bus Services and Management
Maintenance Responsibilities of the
Contractor
Employees and Staffing
Operations and Procedures Manual
(“Manual”)
Contracting Activities
Advertising, Public Relations, and
Information Distribution
Procedures for Reporting Accidents and
Notification of Injury, Theft, Fraud or
Damage
Coordination with the Contractor’s
Executive Office
Transition: Contract Commencement and
Contract Close-out
Payment Card Industry Data Security
Standard
Page
ARTICLE 5.
RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE AUTHORITY ....................... 24
Section 5.01
Section 5.02
Section 5.03
Section 5.04
Section 5.05
ARTICLE 6.
Authority’s Maintenance Obligation
Administration of the Contract
Authority’s Shopping Service
Loss of Business and Right to Maintain
Airport
Right of Inspection by the Authority
FINANCIAL CONSIDERATION ............................................................ 25
Section 6.01
Section 6.02
Section 6.03
Section 6.04
Section 6.05
Section 6.06
Section 6.07
Section 6.08
Section 6.09
Authority Funding: Operating and Change
Funds
Operating Budget
Books and Records Maintained by the
Contractor
Audit and Inspection of Records
Revenue Collection and Deposit of
Operating Receipts
Reimbursable Expenses
Accounting and Operating Reports
Management Fee
Semi-Annual Performance Reviews; Annual
Performance Incentive Fee Award
ARTICLE 7.
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE ............................................................ 45
ARTICLE 8.
INDEMNIFICATION AND INSURANCE ............................................. 46
Section 8.01
Section 8.02
ARTICLE 9.
Indemnification
Insurance
ENVIRONMENTAL PROVISIONS ....................................................... 49
Section 9.01
Section 9.02
Section 9.03
Section 9.04
Section 9.05
Section 9.06
Section 9.07
Section 9.08
Environmental Definitions
Compliance with Laws and Use of
Hazardous Materials
Disposal of Oils, Batteries, Solvents and
Hazardous Materials
Release of Hazardous Materials
The Contractor's Responsibility for
Environmental Costs and Damages
The Contractor’s Indemnification of the
Authority
Scope of Responsibilities
Underground Storage Tanks
Section 9.09
Section 9.10
Section 9.11
Effect of Other Terms and Conditions of the
Contract
Air Quality
Water Management Requirements
ARTICLE 10.
AIRPORT CONCESSIONS DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS
ENTERPRISE (ACDBE) PARTICIPATION .......................................... 54
ARTICLE 11.
DEFAULT AND TERMINATION .......................................................... 56
ARTICLE 12.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ..................................................................... 59
ARTICLE 13.
GENERAL PROVISIONS ....................................................................... 61
EXHIBITS
A.
Premises, Facilities and Operating Equipment (and related operational documents)
A-1 Parking Lot Maps
A-2 Facility Maps
A-3 Operating Equipment Assigned For the Use of the Contractor
A-4 Shuttle Buses leased to the Contractor
A-5 Service Vehicles Assigned For the Use of the Contractor
A-6 Shuttle Bus Routes
A-7 Shuttle Bus Lease
B.
Operations & Maintenance Responsibilities (Matrix)
B-1
Maintenance Matrix of the Facilities
B-2
Maintenance Matrix of the Surface Lots
B-3
Maintenance Matrix of the Parking Access Revenue Control System
B-4
Maintenance Schedule Vehicles
C.
Contractor’s Approved Operating Budget
D.
ACDBE Concession Program Forms
D-1 Monthly Report on Participation (Goods and Services Expenditures)
D-2 Monthly Report on Participation (Management Fee and Operations Costs)
E.
Statement of Net Operating Receipts and Net Due
F.
Standard Provisions
G.
Authority Directives
G-1 Property Assets Management, Directive BA-001A
G-2 Motor Fleet Management, Directive BA-002
G-3 Travel Policy, Directive FI-004, Change 1
H.
Contractor’s Proposal (to be added following Contract award)
I.
Collective Bargaining Agreement
J.
Draft “Manual” (to be added following Contract award)
K.
Authority Designated Banking Account
CONTRACT FOR THE MANAGEMENT AND OPERATION OF THE
PARKING AND SHUTTLE BUS CONCESSION
AT
RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT
CONTRACT NO. MWAA-5-15-C001
This Contract is made by and between the Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority
(“Authority”), 1 Aviation Circle, Washington, DC 20001-6000, for Ronald Reagan Washington
National Airport, and Contractor, whose address is ___________, (hereinafter referred to as
“Contractor”);
WITNESSETH:
WHEREAS, the Authority is a body corporate and politic created by interstate compact
between Virginia and the District of Columbia, with the consent of the U.S. Congress, and has
been given the responsibility for the operation, maintenance, protection, promotion, and
development of Ronald Reagan Washington National and Washington Dulles International
Airports; and,
WHEREAS, the Authority has determined that the management and operation of the
parking and shuttle bus concession at Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport (“Airport”) is
best accomplished under a management contract; and,
WHEREAS, the Authority’s Board of Directors has concurred with Authority’s
Management recommendation to award Contract No. MWAA-5-10-C001 (“Contract”) to the
Contractor and has authorized the Authority’s President and Chief Executive Officer, or his
designee, to enter into this Contract on the terms and conditions set forth herein; and,
NOW, THEREFORE, the Parties hereto, for and in consideration of the terms,
conditions, and covenants contained herein, hereby agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1. CONTRACT TERM
Section 1.01 Contract Term
The Contract Term shall commence on July 1, 2015, and continue through June 30, 2018, subject
to earlier termination as provided herein.
Section 1.02 Contract Year
For the purpose of this Contract, “Contract Year” shall mean the period beginning from July 1
each year and ending June 30 of the next year.
Public Parking and Shuttle Bus Concession at Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport
Contract No. MWAA-5-15-C001
Page 1 of 63
Section 1.03 Option Period
The Authority, at its sole discretion, may extend the Contract Term for up to two (2) option
periods of one (1) year each (each an “Option Period”). The Authority shall notify the Contractor
in writing whether it intends to exercise an Option Period by no later than sixty (60) days prior to
the expiration of the Contract Term. If both of the Option Periods are exercised by the
Authority, this Contract shall expire June 30, 2020.
ARTICLE 2. DEFINITIONS
In addition to terms defined elsewhere in this Contract, the following terms, for the purpose of
this Contract, shall have the meanings set forth below:
(a)
“Contractor’s Corporate or Executive Office Representative” means senior
management personnel who are familiar with the terms and conditions of this Contract
and who are authorized to negotiate on the Contractor’s behalf and execute agreements in
connection with the parking and shuttle bus concession.
(b)
“Change Funds” means the amount of cash on hand provided by the Authority for
cashiers and Pay-on-Foot machines to be able to provide change to customers.
(c)
“Operating Receipts” or “Revenue” is the total for all parking sales and other sales of
goods and services, whether paid for by cash, credit, or otherwise, except amounts
authorized by the Authority for credit and refund to customers.
(d)
“Monthly Certified Statement” means the monthly financial report prepared by the
Contractor in accordance with Section 6.07(a) and submitted to the Authority, which
details the Operating Receipts, Operating Funds, and the Contractor’s Reimbursable
Expenses.
(e)
“Non-Allowed Expenses” include any other Contractor expenses that do not fall within
the scope of Reimbursable Expenses. The Contractor shall pay for all Non-Allowed
Expenses out of its own funds.
(f)
“On-Site Management or Personnel” means staff located at the Airport who are
employed solely in connection with the Contractor’s performance of the Parking and
Shuttle Bus concession at the Airport.
(g)
“Operating Budget” means the total of the Contractor’s Reimbursable Expenses
anticipated to occur for each Contract Year.
(h)
“Operating Equipment” means the Parking Access Revenue Control System, the fleet
of shuttle buses, support vehicles, and other equipment lease or purchased by or assigned
for the use of the Contractor by the Authority as specified in Exhibit A attached hereto.
(i)
“Operating Funds” means the money advanced by the Authority to the Contractor’s
bank account established pursuant to Section 6.02(a) for anticipated reimbursable
expenses used to support the operation of the parking and shuttle bus concession.
Page 2 of 63
(j)
“Operations and Procedures Manual (Manual)” means the Contractor’s policies,
practices, and procedures governing all aspects of the management and operation of the
parking and shuttle bus concession reflected in the Manual as specified in Section 4.07
and Exhibit J attached hereto.
(k)
“Premises” means collectively the space on the Airport consisting of public and
employee parking and shuttle bus facilities and offices assigned for use by the Contractor
for the management and operation of the parking and shuttle bus concession as specified
in Section 3.01 and Exhibit A attached hereto.
(l)
“Reimbursable Expenses” include: expenses actually paid by the Contractor in
connection with its operation of the parking and shuttle bus concession, as defined in
Section 6.06, including
(m)
(1)
Expenses paid pursuant to the approved Operating Budget; and
(2)
Expenses not included in the Operating Budget that are approved separately by
the Authority in writing and further defined in Section 6.02(a).
"Parking Access Revenue Control Systems (PARCS)" includes equipment
encompassing all revenue control equipment now in use, and/or introduced in the future
during the Contract Term including, but not limited to, all cashier booths, ticket issuing
machines, cashier terminals, patron fee displays, automatic gates, pay-on-foot machines,
Automatic Vehicle Identification (AVI) equipment, safes, signs, computers, printers,
computer software, and related Operational equipment.
(1)
The "Parking Access Revenue Control System (PARCS)" in use at the Airport
is a software and hardware system for managing parking lot operations. The
system, which may be modified and/or replaced during the Contract term, is
currently comprised of seventy (70) entry and exit terminals, thirty-one (31) payon-foot machines, AVI lanes, a license plate recognition subsystem, and license
plate inventory equipment.
ARTICLE 3. PREMISES AND OPERATING EQUIPMENT
Section 3.01 Premises:
(a)
Public Parking Premises: The Contractor is hereby assigned, without charge, and in an
"as is" condition, the following premises for its use during the Contract Term:
(1)
Garage A. Garage A consists of approximately 1,397 public parking spaces. The
Contractor is assigned the public parking portion of Level A1, Level A4, Level
A5, and the administrative office space of the building known as Garage A. The
administrative office space consists of approximately 3,000 square feet of offices
for public parking and general maintenance operations. The rental car agencies’
Page 3 of 63
ticket counters on Level A1 and the ready car spaces on Level A2 and level A3
are not assigned to the contractor.
Entrance Lanes
4
(2)
Exit Lanes
8 express
3 cashier
Pay Stations
6
Economy Lot. The Contractor is assigned one Economy Parking surface lot with
approximately 2,653 public parking spaces
Entrance Lanes
2
(4)
Pay Stations
3
Garage B/C. Garage B/C consists of approximately 5,306 public parking spaces.
The Contractor is assigned all levels of Garage B/C. The administrative office
space, also assigned to the Contractor, consists of approximately 1,000 square feet
of offices for public parking operations.
Entrance Lanes
8
(3)
Exit Lanes
2 express
2 cashier
Exit Lanes
1 express
1 cashier
Pay Stations
2
Short-Term. The Contractor is assigned the short-term lot, with approximately
99 public parking spaces. This lot is credit card in and out only.
Entrance Lanes
1
Exit Lanes
1 express
(5) Impound Lot. The Contractor is assigned the use of the impound lot Premises for
the storage of towed and impounded vehicles. The Contractor shall be responsible for
maintaining the security of the impound lot Premises. One or more portions of the
impound lot Premises may be fenced and secured by a locked gate by the Authority
for exclusive use by the Authority’s Police for law enforcement purposes.
(b)
Shuttle Bus and Employee Parking Premises: The Contractor is hereby assigned,
without charge, and in an "as is" condition, the following premises for its use during the
Contract Term to manage the shuttle bus operations between the public and employee
parking lots and the Main Terminal. A description of the routes are provided below
which may be changed at any time upon written direction from the Authority. Additional
details of the bus routes are provided in Exhibit A.
(1)
Bus Maintenance Facility (BMF). The Contractor is assigned the building and
fuel island structure known as the Bus Maintenance Facility, located on the
Airport at 51 West Post Office Road. This facility consists of an 8,000 square
foot building (approximately) equipped with two maintenance bays, a wash bay,
two fuel islands, and office space for shuttle bus maintenance and shuttle bus
dispatching operations. A shuttle bus parking area is also provided to the
Contractor immediately south of the Bus Maintenance Facility. The address for
Page 4 of 63
the BMF is 51 West Post Office Road, Washington, DC 20001. Additional details
of the BMF are provided in Exhibit A-2.
(c)
Changes to Premises, Facilities, Operating Equipment, and Scope of Services
(1)
The Authority hereby reserves the right to add, delete, or alter the Premises,
facilities, Operating Equipment, and public parking and shuttle bus services,
including, but not limited to adding or deleting garage parking structures, surface
parking lots, valet parking, temporary parking facilities, building facilities, shuttle
buses, fleet vehicles, other operating equipment, and shuttle bus routes. The
Contractor hereby acknowledges that the Authority shall have such right, and
further agrees that the exercise of such right by the Authority shall not result in
any change in the Management Fee unless the Authority determines such changes
are major changes to the scope of this Contract that warrant adjustment of the
Management Fee. Reimbursable expenses shall be adjusted by the Authority as a
result of such changes. In addition, the Operating Budget may be adjusted
accordingly as the result of any changes described above. Exhibit A shall be
amended from time to time to reflect additions, deletions, or modifications to the
Premises and Operating Equipment. The amendment of the Exhibits may be
accomplished in writing to the Contractor without an amendment to this Contract.
The Contractor shall also maintain a current list of Premises and Operating
Equipment in the Manual.
(2)
The Authority hereby reserves the right to have the Contractor initiate new
services that are not provided for under this Contract such as management of the
commercial vehicle curbs, staging areas, and dispatch services at the Airport, the
maintenance of the buses within that operation or any combination of the above.
The Authority may authorize an increase in the Management Fee if such services
are added.
Section 3.02 Vehicles and Operating Equipment:
(a)
Vehicles. The Contractor is granted use of certain service vehicles, as listed in the
inventory attached hereto as Exhibit A-5. The use of these service vehicles is granted by
the Authority to the Contractor under the conditions of the Supplemental Lease, and is in
“as is” condition, to the Contractor for use for the duration of the Contract Term. The
Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the current version of Directive (BA002) entitled Motor Fleet Management as provided in Exhibit G-2.
(b)
Operating Equipment. The Contractor is granted the use of certain Operating
Equipment as listed in the inventory attached hereto as Exhibit A. The use of such
Operating Equipment is granted by the Authority to the Contractor without charge, and in
an "as is" condition, to the Contractor for its use for the duration of the Contract Term.
(c)
Parking Access and Revenue Control System (PARCS). The Contractor shall operate
the PARCS at the Airport. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance
activities associated with the PARCS as defined by the Authority in Exhibit B-3. The
Contractor will train its employees in the proper use of the Authority’s PARCS. The
Page 5 of 63
PARCS includes software developed at the Authority’s expense for use in Contractor’s
operations that is proprietary to the Authority. The Contractor shall not copy, assign, sell,
or use the software for purposes not authorized by this Contract, except with the written
approval of the Authority. At any time during the Contract Term, the Authority reserves
the right to modify, and/or replace all or any part of the PARCS system at the Airport.
Any such modification or replacement of the PARCS by the Authority shall not remove
the responsibility of the Contractor’s operation and/or maintenance of the PARCS
provided herein unless otherwise provided in writing by the Authority.
(d)
Future Operating Equipment, whether purchased by the Contractor for the Authority or
directly by the Authority, shall be considered property of the Authority and shall be
provided to the Contractor without charge for its use under the Contract. In addition, the
Authority may authorize the Contractor to purchase additional replacement equipment for
the Authority.
(e)
Variable Message Signs and Lot Availability Signs. The Contractor shall operate,
maintain, and ensure the accuracy of the variable message signs assigned for use by the
Contractor and the lot availability signs located throughout the Airport.
(f)
All Operating Equipment is subject to the Authority’s inventory control system. The
Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the current version of Authority
Directive (BA-001A) entitled Property Assets Management as provided in Exhibit G-1.
An inventory check will be conducted on the effective date of the Contract, when such
assets are turned over to the control of the Contractor, and throughout the Contract
Contract Term as directed by the Authority. Contractor shall participate in inventory
control system training as required by the Authority. In addition, the Authority may
authorize the Contractor to purchase additional replacement equipment for the Authority.
(g)
The Contractor shall keep all Operating Equipment in good working order at all times
during the Term of this Contract and shall return said equipment to the Authority in the
condition it was received (normal wear and tear excepted). In the event that equipment is
unaccounted for or is damaged due to negligence, improper use or abuse, the Contractor
shall replace the equipment at no expense to the Authority.
Section 3.03 Use of the Authority’s Premises and Operating Equipment
(a)
Unless otherwise provided herein, the Contractor’s use of the Premises and Operating
Equipment shall in no way be deemed to be a lease from the Authority.
(b)
The Contractor shall not, at any time during the Contract Term, abandon any or all of the
Premises or facilities or dispose of any or all of the Operating Equipment without the
prior written approval of the Authority.
(c)
The Contractor shall use the Premises, facilities, and Operating Equipment only for the
purposes specified under this Contract and for no other purpose whatsoever, unless
otherwise directed by the Authority. The Contractor may not use the Premises or
Page 6 of 63
facilities for vehicle parking, maintenance services, or other commercial services not
authorized by this Contract. The Contractor shall not install any coin or credit card
operated devices such as pay telephones, vending or amusement machines or devices, nor
install or permit commercial advertising signs or any other type of concession activity to
be conducted from the Premises, facilities or Operating Equipment without prior written
permission of the Authority.
(d)
Title to vehicles and Operating Equipment: Unless otherwise provided herein, the
Authority shall retain title to all vehicles and Operating Equipment initially assigned for
the use of the Contractor under this Contract. If vehicles and/or Operating Equipment are
acquired or leased by the Contractor during the Contract Term, the Contractor shall either
immediately assign title or assign the lease to the Authority upon acquisition of the
vehicles or Operating Equipment, or, if deemed appropriate by the Authority, shall assign
title or assign the lease to the Authority at the termination or expiration of the Contract.
All vehicles shall be licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, and shall be subject to
the inspection requirements of the Commonwealth of Virginia.
ARTICLE 4. RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR
Section 4.01 Contract Obligations
(a)
Services. The Contractor shall provide comprehensive management services for the
public parking and shuttle bus concession at the Airport in accordance with the
requirements of this Contract, the Manual (described in Section 4.07 herein), and as may
be directed in writing from time to time by the Authority. The Contractor shall ensure
that safe, efficient, prompt, courteous, and high-quality services shall be provided to
Airport patrons at all times.
(b)
Non-Exclusive Contract. This Contract is non-exclusive and the Authority reserves the
right to contract with other parties to manage and operate public parking and shuttle bus
services on the Airport.
Section 4.02 Public Parking Operational Requirements
The Contractor shall manage and operate the Public Parking Concession twenty-four (24) hours
per day, seven (7) days per week, performing the following functions in accordance with this
Contract:
(a)
Revenue and Control Functions. The Contractor shall collect and hold in trust for the
Authority, until deposited in the Authority’s designated bank account, all Operating
Receipts generated from operations under this Contract, as provided for in Section 6.05
herein (Exhibit K). The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, accounting for,
and depositing parking, towing, auction, and other revenue, if any, to the Authority’s
designated account. The Contractor shall monitor and operate all entries and exits to the
Premises and shall perform the cashier functions in accordance with the Manual and
direction from the Authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for procuring,
Page 7 of 63
securing, and accounting for the ticket stock, both issued and unissued. The Contractor
shall maintain and account for Change Funds provided by the Authority. The Contractor
shall ensure that patrons will be able to enter and exit the Premises parking lots at all
times, except as may be otherwise approved by the Authority in writing.
(b)
Space Availability Signage. The Contractor shall monitor the space availability signage
located at the entrances to the garages to ensure accuracy of the information being
displayed. In the event that the space counts are deemed inaccurate, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Authority.
(d)
Traffic Management/Signage. The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling
vehicular traffic on the Premises and for providing clear, visible signage showing parking
lot names and rates, and the availability of parking spaces in the lots. The Contractor
shall advise the Authority of the availability of parking spaces on a daily basis. All new
or amended signage requires the Authority’s approval prior to installation.
(e)
Web Site. The contractor shall monitor, on a regular basis, the content of the Authority’s
web site to ensure that all parking specific information is complete and accurate. The
contractor is encouraged to provide suggestions for improvement. The contractor shall
specifically monitor the parking availability as displayed on the Authority’s web site, and
notify the appropriate Authority personnel when an issue is noted.
(f)
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Compliance. The Contractor shall ensure that
all Premises, vehicles and Operating Equipment used by the public (e.g. buses and bus
shelters) assigned for the use of the Contractor are in compliance with the ADA
requirements at all times. The Contractor shall take appropriate actions to ensure that
parking spaces which are designated for use by persons with disabilities are, in fact, being
used only by persons with disabilities and shall ensure all patrons with disabilities can be
accommodated. The Contractor shall notify the Authority of any apparent violations.
(g)
Customer Service and Assistance. The Contractor shall maintain a twenty-four (24)
hour emergency service at “no charge” to parking patrons to: (i) help parking patrons
find vehicles, (ii) “jump start” vehicles with dead batteries, (iii) provide air to inflate flat
tires, and (iv) open/unlock doors of cars with keys locked inside. The Contractor shall
assist patrons with locating their parked vehicles on the Premises by maintaining a
license plate inventory. This assistance may include, without limitation, ticket devices
with location specific/coded tickets, visual and audio reminders, and other way-finding
measures as approved by the Authority. The Contractor shall respond to customer
service requests accepted by the callbox communications system in the bus shelters and
parking Premises so that patrons can obtain assistance and/or information on shuttle bus
schedules twenty-four (24) hours per day. The Contractor shall train its employees in
customer service with the objective of providing high quality and responsive service to
the public. Additionally, the Contractor shall respond to any parking and shuttle bus
specific email inquiries received through the Authority’s web site.
(h)
Towing and Impounding of Vehicles. The Contractor shall operate a vehicle towing
service to move vehicles in the event of an emergency and to move parked vehicles that
Page 8 of 63
impede traffic or that have been abandoned. The Contractor shall operate a vehicle
impound facility at the Airport as detailed in the Manual and herein. The Contractor shall
also, if so directed by the Authority, manage the public auction and sale of abandoned
and impounded vehicles. The Contractor, in addition to collecting any parking fees that
may be due with respect to any vehicle towed from the Authority’s controlled property,
shall charge each vehicle owner the towing and impound rates as established by the
Authority in accordance with their Manual and any applicable recovery, third party fees
and storage fees.
(1)
Towing, Impoundment, and Related Services. The Contractor shall manage,
operate, and maintain the vehicle impound lot Premises. Upon notice by the
Authority Police, or the Airport Operations Office, the Contractor shall tow
vehicles that are illegally parked, wrecked, or abandoned on the Airport. The
Contractor shall provide on-demand towing services twenty-four (24) hours per
day, seven (7) days per week.
(2)
Towing Services and Procedures. The Contractor shall follow the towing and
impoundment procedures established by the Authority and incorporated into the
Manual. The Contractor shall not deviate from these procedures without prior
written approval of the Authority.
(3)
Towing and Impound Records. The Contractor shall keep records of all
vehicles towed and maintain an accurate inventory of vehicles stored in the
impound lot. Such records shall include the date of impoundment, tag number
and VIN number of the vehicle, description of the vehicle, and the date of release
or, if determined to be abandoned, date of sale of the vehicle.
(4)
Towing, Impoundment, and Vehicle Sales. The towing and impoundment fees
collected from owners of impounded vehicles, and the revenue derived from sales
of unclaimed and/or abandoned vehicles, shall be included as Operating Receipts
as defined in Section 6.05 of this Contract.
(5)
Scrapping or Sales of Abandoned and Unclaimed Motor Vehicles. The
Contractor, may, at the direction of the Authority, scrap abandoned and unclaimed
motor vehicles, and/or hold periodic public auctions of impounded vehicles that
have not been reclaimed or which have been determined to be abandoned. Such
auctions and disposals shall be conducted, in accordance with Title 46.1 of the
Virginia Code and any other applicable Federal or state laws, and Federal, state,
or Authority regulations.
(6)
Special Conditions. Contractor shall coordinate the provision of one (1) tow
truck capable of towing a passenger vehicle (typically provided by Operating
Equipment owned by the Authority and assigned for the Contractor’s use) and one
(1) tow truck capable of towing a tractor trailer within a four (4) hours notice.
Placement and direction of these tow trucks will be coordinated by Airport
Operations or Airport Police. Contractor must have a documented contingency
Page 9 of 63
plan in place in the event that the operating equipment provided under the
Contract is unavailable to provide the required service.
(i)
Patron Claims and Complaints. The Contractor shall promptly investigate and resolve
all claims made for losses or damages to vehicles and complaints about service. Upon
the Authority’s request, the Contractor shall furnish the Authority with a copy of the
complaint or claim, the Contractor’s documentation of its investigation, and its written
response resolving or not resolving the complaint or claim. The Contractor shall
maintain a computer database of compliments, complaints and claims that shall be made
available to the Authority upon request.
(j)
Lost and Found Articles. All lost or abandoned personal property found on the
Premises by the Contractor, its agents or employees, or which are found by patrons and
given to the Contractor, shall be turned over to the Authority’s central Lost and Found
Office within 24 hours. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to take said property to
the Authority Lost and Found Office within one business day. The Contractor, its agents
and employees shall have no right to claim said abandoned or lost personal property.
Section 4.03 Parking Rates and Waivers
(a)
Parking rates shall be established by the Authority and are subject to change by the
Authority upon advanced written notice.
(b)
The Contractor shall be responsible for updating and replacing all parking rate signs to
reflect any change in rates.
(c)
The Contractor shall ensure that all patrons are accurately charged for parking consistent
with the parking rates established by the Authority. All overrings shall be refunded to the
patrons and all undercharges (with the exception of those approved by the Authority and
detailed in the Manual.
(d)
Procedures for complimentary parking, handling of lost tickets, refunds, handling of
exception transactions and expedited vehicle exit procedures shall be approved by the
Authority and maintained in the Manual. Upon Contract commencement the Contractor
shall follow the current procedures in use pending approval of a revised Manual.
Section 4.04 Shuttle Bus Services and Management
The Contractor shall manage and operate public and employee parking shuttle services twentyfour (24) hours per day, seven (7) days per week, performing the following functions in
accordance with this Contract:
(a)
Scheduled Shuttle Bus Service. The Contractor shall operate a scheduled shuttle bus
service on the Airport, using fixed routes, at a headway frequency or at fixed times as
determined by the Authority. “Headway” is defined as the time that separates two shuttle
buses traveling the same shuttle bus route in the same direction. The Contractor shall
monitor and assess the shuttle bus usage and recommend to the Authority when the
Page 10 of 63
number of buses for required route operations should be increased or decreased. The
Contractor shall not change the routes, service, or schedules without prior written
approval of the Authority. The Contractor shall ensure that any and all approved changes
are maintained in the Manual. Additional details regarding the airport shuttle bus routes
are described in Exhibit A-6.
(b)
The Authority reserves the right to adjust the headway requirements solely at its discretion
upon sending the Contractor written notice seven (7) days before the adjustment is to take
effect.
(c)
Shuttle Bus Routes. A description of the routes are provided below which may be changed
at any time upon written direction from the Authority.
(1)
Rental Car/Garage Route. The buses assigned to this route stop at bus shelters
in front of each garage, and then proceed to Terminal A and upper (departures)
level of Terminal B and C. Then the bus will loop back to terminal A and the
lower (arrivals) level of terminal BC and then back to the garages. The total
distance of this route is approximately 3.8 miles, and takes approximately 13
minutes to complete, without dwell time. The headways requirements for this
route are as follows:
Time Period
0000 – 0100
0100 – 0400
0400 – 2200
2200 – 0000
(2)
(3)
Headways Requirement
10 to 12 minutes
15 minutes (as necessary)
8 to 10 minutes
10 to 12 minutes
Economy Lot Route. The buses assigned to this route travel through the
Economy lot to Terminal A and upper (departures) level of Terminals B and C.
The buses will then travel to the shelter at the East West building, and then to
Terminal A and the lower (arrivals) level of Terminals B and C, and back to the
Economy lot. The total distance of this route is approximately 4.5 miles, and takes
approximately 19 minutes to complete, without dwell time. The headways
requirements for this route are as follows:
Time Period
Headways Requirement
0000 – 0100
0100 – 04:00
0400 – 2200
2200 – 0000
10 to 12 minutes
19 minutes (as necessary)
8 to 10 minutes
10 to 12 minutes
Employee Route. The Employee route serves a variety of employee parking lots
and begins in the crew lot. The total distance of this route is approximately 4
miles, and takes approximately 14 minutes to complete, without dwell time. The
headways requirements for this route are as follows:
Time Period
0000 – 0330
0330 – 0600
Headway Requirement
12 to 14 minutes
4 to 6 minutes
Page 11 of 63
0600 – 1200
1200 – 1330
1330 – 1830
1830 – 2000
2000 – 2200
2200 – 0000
8 to 10 minutes
4 to 6 minutes
8 to 10 minutes
6 to 8 minutes
4 to 6 minutes
6 to 8 minutes
(d)
Radio Dispatch. The Contractor shall manage, operate, and maintain the shuttle bus
dispatching radio system. The dispatch radio system shall be used by the Contractor to
meet the Authority’s headway requirements and to maintain contact with each vehicle on
the road.
(e)
Bus Markings and Tracking. The Contractor shall provide clear, visible signage on the
exterior of the shuttle buses indicating shuttle bus routes, and legible signage on the
interior of the shuttle buses indicating the driver’s name, Contractor’s name and
telephone number and current time. If so initiated by the Authority, the Contractor shall
cooperate with the Authority’s implementation of new AVI/GPS system or changes to the
current system for monitoring shuttle bus operations of which the Contractor shall be
responsible for operating and maintaining.
(f)
Bus Shelters. The contractor shall be responsible for structural maintenance of the bus
shelters at the Airport as well as cleaning of the bus shelters. The Contractor shall
operate and test (on a regular weekly basis) the emergency callbox communications
system in the bus shelters and intercom systems in the parking facilities so that patrons
can obtain assistance and/or information on shuttle bus schedules 24 hours per day.
(g)
Shuttle Buses. Unless otherwise directed in writing by the Authority, the Contractor
shall use the shuttle buses identified in Exhibit A-5 only to transport public and
employee passengers between the parking lots and the Airport Terminal.
(h)
Fueling. The Authority shall provide fuel and fuel dispensing facilities for the
Contractor's use in fueling the buses and service vehicles. The Contractor and its agents,
subcontractors, employees, and representatives are expressly prohibited from fueling
their personal vehicles with the fuel supply designated for shuttle buses and service
vehicles. The Contractor shall manage the fuel inventory and reconcile discrepancies
using the Fuelmaster or a successor system provided by the Authority, maintain fuel
tanks and the leak detection system and address any remediation or correction. The fuel
management system shall be maintained as defined in Exhibit B.
(i)
Special On-Airport Tours and Charters. Upon request of the Airports Authority, the
Contractor shall provide shuttle bus services for special tours and charter routes as
directed by the Airports Authority.
Section 4.05 Maintenance Responsibilities of the Contractor
(a)
Maintenance of Premises. Except as provided in Section 5.01, the Contractor shall
maintain and keep in a state of good repair, acceptable to the Authority, the Premises
Page 12 of 63
assigned for the Contractor’s use under this Contract. The Contractor shall follow the
maintenance procedures, guidelines, schedules, and standards in accordance with
attached Exhibit B and the Manual. Maintenance procedures, guidelines, schedules and
standards shall be updated by the Authority and the Contractor as necessary.
(1)
The Contractor shall make general improvements, alterations, and renovations to
the Premises as required by the Authority from time to time. The scope of such
work shall not include major construction of fixed improvements. The Contractor
shall not make any improvements, alterations, or renovations to the Premises
without the express advanced written approval of the Authority.
i.
The Contractor shall be required to perform improvements such as:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Spot pavement repair of parking lot Premises;
Premises lighting installation and replacement;
Bus shelter installation and maintenance;
Fencing, curb, and gutter installation on the Premises;
Repaint crosswalks and re-stripe parking lot Premises;
Purchase and installation of identification and directional signs for
the Premises;
Perform such other improvements and work within the scope of
this Contract as directed by the Authority.
ii.
All improvements, alterations, and/or renovations shall comply with
applicable laws, regulations, and codes including the Virginia Uniform
Statewide Building Code, the Authority’s Design Manual, and the
Authority’s Construction Safety Manual and Insurance requirements.
iii.
General improvements, alterations, and/or renovations approved by the
Authority shall be Reimbursable Expenses.
(2)
Inspections and Inspection Report. The Contractor shall inspect the Premises at
least weekly, or on a schedule otherwise determined by the Authority, and report
in writing to the Authority on the condition of the Premises and any repairs that
are needed within ten (10) days after completing each inspection. The Contractor
shall permit Authority representatives to accompany the Contractor during such
inspections, if requested by the Authority. For those repairs deemed the
responsibility of the Authority per “Operations & Maintenance Responsibilities”
identified in Exhibit B, the Contractor shall notify the Authority’s work order
desk within twenty-four (24) hours of conditions on the Premises that are in need
of correction.
(3)
Rodent and Insect Control. The Contractor shall be responsible for rodent and
insect control within the Premises.
(4)
Compliance and Warranties. The maintenance, servicing, and repair of the
Premises covered by warranties shall be performed in accordance with the
Page 13 of 63
warranties unless otherwise directed by the Authority. The Contractor shall seek
promptly to enforce all applicable warranties.
(b)
(5)
Maintenance Records. The Contractor shall keep detailed records of preventive
maintenance and/or repairs to the Premises and submit a monthly maintenance
report to the Authority summarizing maintenance during the previous month. The
maintenance record shall include, as a minimum, the date of repair and/or
maintenance, the nature of the repair and/or maintenance, the cost and parts
involved, and the number of labor hours expended for the repair and/or
maintenance.
(6)
Locks: The Contractor agrees to use the Authority’s “Best Lock” keying system
for all doors and entrances to the Premises.
(7)
Utilities. Reasonable amounts of electricity, water, gas and other utilities, except
telephone and television cable, shall be provided by the Authority to the Premises
at no cost to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of
any excessive use of utilities and such charges shall not be subject to
reimbursement by the Authority.
(8)
Changes to Maintenance Responsibilities. The Authority may, at its own
discretion, change the “Operations & Maintenance Responsibilities” identified in
Exhibit B.
Maintenance of Vehicle and Operating Equipment. The Contractor shall, throughout
the entire period of this Contract, maintain in good repair and safe working order all
vehicles and other Operating Equipment assigned and/or leased for the Contractor’s use
under this Contract. The Contractor shall provide a vehicle Maintenance and Repair Plan
for the Authority's approval within 15 (fifteen) days of contract commencement. The
vehicle maintenance and repair plan shall include preventive maintenance schedules, and
vehicle maintenance procedures, for use by the Contractor in the maintenance of all
shuttle buses, service vehicles and Operating Equipment. The Contractor shall provide
preventive maintenance for all shuttle buses, service vehicles, and other Operating
Equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations as provided in
Exhibit B. Further, the contractor shall comply with the following:
(1)
Safe and Clean Condition. All Operating Equipment shall be kept in safe, clean,
and good operating condition during the Contract Term.
(2)
Compliance with Warranties. Maintenance, servicing and repairs of Operating
Equipment covered by warranties shall be performed according to the terms and
conditions of such warranties unless otherwise approved by the Authority. The
Contractor shall promptly seek to enforce all applicable warranties.
(3)
Daily Inspection for Damage. The Contractor shall institute a daily inspection
program of the shuttle buses and service vehicles and promptly repair or have
repaired any damage within ten (10) calendar days following detection unless
Page 14 of 63
otherwise approved by the Authority. The Contractor shall immediately remove
any service vehicle from operation and repair or have repaired any damage or
defect that may affect the safety and comfort of drivers and/or passengers.
(4)
Maintenance and Repair Records. During the Contract Term, the Contractor
shall provide monthly summaries of maintenance and repairs performed on the
Authority’s vehicles and will provide the Authority immediate and unrestricted
access to all maintenance and repair records during announced or unannounced
visits or inspections, including total access to any electronic program or system(s)
which maintain any records (present or historical) for Authority assets supplied
under this Contract. The Authority reserves the right to require that all
maintenance activities be recorded in an Authority-owned electronic maintenance
tracking system.
(5)
Any and all maintenance and repair records developed during the Contract Term
are the property of the Airports Authority.
(6)
The Airports Authority reserves the right to inspect the fleet at any time to ensure
that proper maintenance and repairs are being performed, either by a qualified
third-party subcontractor or using its own staff.
Section 4.06 Employees and Staffing
The Contractor shall employ professional, qualified, and well-trained staff, supervisors,
attendants, cashiers, tow truck personnel, maintenance personnel, clerks, and others to ensure a
high standard of service in performing the Contractor’s obligations under this Contract. The
Contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a salary/wage structure by job category.
(a)
Staffing. The Contractor shall provide staffing in sufficient numbers to fulfill the terms
and conditions of this Contract, and to perform the procedures in the Manual. The
Contractor shall obtain the Authority’s prior written approval for initial staffing levels
and all changes thereto. The Contractor shall provide the Authority with prior written
notification of any changes in positions described in Section 4.06(b) and 4.06(c). The
Contractor shall make best efforts to attract, hire, and retain high-quality personnel, and
to minimize employee turnover. The Contractor shall operate the Premises and facilities
in accordance with its approved staffing and salary schedules. Staffing levels, salaries,
and wage schedules shall be described in the Manual.
(b)
General and On Site Managers. The Contractor shall select and appoint one General
Manager and additional on-site managers, as delineated in its proposal for the operation
of the Public parking and shuttle bus concession at the Airport. The Authority reserves
the right to approve the selection of the General Manager and on-site managers prior to
Contract commencement and in filling vacancies during the Contract Term. If the
Authority finds any candidate unacceptable, the Contractor shall propose other candidates
until an acceptable candidate is agreed upon. The General Manager shall be a qualified
and experienced manager vested with full power and authority over the public parking
and shuttle bus concession. The General Manager shall ordinarily be available and on-
Page 15 of 63
site during regular business hours and, during his or her absence, another Authorityapproved manager shall be on-site and available and shall be vested with the General
Manager’s full power and authority.
(c)
Qualifications for Operations Managers, Bus Drivers, Maintenance Managers and
Mechanics. All operations managers, bus drivers, maintenance managers and mechanics
providing services under this Contract shall meet the following minimum qualifications:
(1)
Must have a valid Class "B" Commercial Driver's License with a P-Passenger
endorsement, as required by the state of Virginia vehicle codes, or such license as
may be required by any governmental agency with jurisdiction at National Airport
at some future date, or any other law or regulation concerning the licensing of
motor vehicle operators.
(2)
Must comply with all state and federal Commercial Driver's License
requirements.
(3)
Must pass a five (5) year state motor vehicle department check. Contractor must
review a certified five (5) year record issued within the past forty-five (45) days
from any state where the applicant has held a driver's license in the past five (5)
years.
(4)
Must pass a biennial United States Department of Transportation physical exam
and a comprehensive drug screen as required by the Federal Transportation
Administration regulations.
(d)
The Contractor shall ensure compliance with all local, state and federal laws and statutes
regarding licensing of motor vehicle operators and shall, at a minimum, conduct biennial
review of driving records and background checks to ensure the preceding qualifications
are still met by all operations managers and bus drivers. Operations managers and/or bus
drivers failing to meet these qualifications may not perform services under this Contract.
(e)
Employee Uniforms. Employees and field supervisors shall wear uniforms with name
tags while on duty. The General Manager, management, and administrative office
personnel shall not be required to wear a uniform or name tag. Uniform standards are
subject to the Authority’s approval and shall be contained in the Manual.
(f)
Personnel Records. The Contractor shall maintain accurate records on personnel and
staffing and shall make these records available for examination by the Authority upon
two (2) days notice. The records shall include, but not be limited to, name and address,
date of hire, salary and benefits paid, training received, time and attendance records and
performance reviews. In addition, the Contractor shall also forward to the Authority a
copy of any collective bargaining agreement and amendments thereto (Exhibit I).
(g)
Safe and Clean Working Conditions. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable
safety and health laws, rules, regulations, directive, and standards.
Page 16 of 63
(h)
PARCS Training. The Contractor shall fully train all personnel operating the PARCS in
the proper operation and procedures for the use of the equipment prior to the start of their
assignments. All training shall conform to the standards and requirements set forth in the
Manual.
(i)
English Communication. Every employee of the Contractor who is expected to
regularly communicate with members of the public or with Authority staff shall be able
to communicate verbally and in writing in clearly understandable English.
(j)
Labor Laws. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of all applicable
Federal and State laws and regulations regarding employment and withholding taxes, and
shall maintain records demonstrating compliance with such laws. All records shall be
available for inspection by the Authority for a period of no less than three (3) years
following the expiration of this Contract.
(k)
Secured Area Access. The Contractor’s personnel requiring access to the Air
Operations Area and/or the secured area shall obtain and display a National Airport
Identification Badge, with appropriate access authority, when in the Secured Area. The
identification badges are issued by the Authority.
(l)
Drug Testing. The Contractor shall conduct all employee drug and alcohol testing in
accordance with its proposal and all applicable local, state and federal requirements.
(m)
Salary Guidelines. The Contractor shall not exceed Authority approved Salary
Guidelines for any employees or positions (as provided in the Contractor’s Annual
Budget Submission), and shall not add positions, change titles or exceed Authorized
Headcounts without prior, written approval by the Authority.
Section 4.07 Operations and Procedures Manual
(a)
The Contractor shall provide the Manual (with any suggested modifications) to the
Authority, within sixty (60) days following the commencement of Contract Term. The
failure of the Contractor to submit the Manual to the Authority within this time period
shall be considered an event of default as defined in Article 11 of the Contract. The
Manual and all revisions thereto, shall be incorporated into and made a part of this
Contract upon approval by the Authority. The Manual shall not be disclosed by the
Contractor, or the Contractor’s staff without the expressed written consent of the
Authority. The Manual shall be provided to the Authority in hard copy and in electronic
format compatible with Microsoft Word or such other format as requested by the
Authority.
(b)
Upon Contract commencement, the Contractor will be provided with a draft Manual
which includes the current policies, practices and procedures which have been approved
for use by the Authority. The draft Manual shall be used until a revised Manual prepared
by the Contractor is submitted to and approved by the Authority.
Page 17 of 63
(c)
(d)
The Manual shall provide basic guidance on policies, practices, and procedures for all
aspects of the management and operation of the parking and shuttle bus concession. The
Contractor shall confer with the Authority in preparation of the Manual and incorporate
the information requested by the Authority to be placed into the Manual. The Manual
shall provide information required for employee understanding of their duties and
responsibilities, including, but not limited to the following:
(1)
Company mission statement;
(2)
Operational overview;
(3)
Organizational chart;
(4)
Staffing chart;
(5)
Position descriptions;
(6)
Personnel training and policies (i.e. timekeeping procedures and paid leave
policies);
(7)
Primary operating procedures;
(i)
Revenue collection and control procedures including complimentary
parking, handling of lost tickets, refunds, handling of exception
transactions and expedited vehicle exit procedures.
(ii)
Proper operation of the PARCS;
(iii) Parking rate schedule;
(iv)
Shuttle bus operations guidelines;
(v)
Shuttle bus route schedules and dispatching procedures;
(vi)
Supplies and inventories;
(vii) Towing and impound operations;
(8)
Staffing levels, salaries and wage schedules;
(9)
Uniform standards;
(10)
Administrative reports;
(11)
Financial, auditing and accounting procedures;
(12)
Corporate office representatives;
(13)
Premises security;
(14)
Premises and Operating Equipment Maintenance;
(15)
Emergency and safety procedures;
(16)
Accident and Incident Reporting Procedures; and,
(17)
Other operating procedures.
The Contractor shall implement and enforce all procedures and requirements contained in
the Manual. Failure to operate in accordance with the Manual may be determined to be
an event of default as defined in Article 11 of this Contract.
Page 18 of 63
(e)
A redacted SAMPLE of the current (at Contract commencement) is available as Article J
of this Contract.
(f)
Revisions to the Manual. The Manual shall be kept current by the Contractor
throughout the Contract Term as follows:
(1)
Either Party may propose a revision to the Manual, and shall initiate the proposed
revision by sending it to the other Party. All Manual revisions proposed by the
Contractor shall be subject to the approval of the Authority before incorporation
into the Manual. Each revision to the Manual shall have a revision number and
date.
(2)
The Manual and all revisions made thereto shall be consistent with the terms and
conditions of the Contract. At no time shall the Manual supersede the terms,
conditions, and requirements, set forth in the Contract.
Section 4.08 Contracting Activities
(a)
The Contractor may enter into agreements with qualified third-party vendors and
suppliers to provide goods and services authorized by this Contract. The Contractor shall
be solely responsible for ensuring that the performance of third-party contractors
complies with the provisions of this Contract (including required Authority approval as
applicable). The Contractor shall pay all invoices when due.
(1)
Contracting Procedures. The Contractor shall be responsible for developing the
specifications for any agreement with a third-party subcontractor. The Contractor
shall make best efforts to obtain a minimum of three (3) bids or alternative
providers for each subcontract with an annual value of $5,000 or greater, or as
otherwise approved in writing by the Authority. The Contractor shall document
its efforts to obtain alternative providers and competitive bidding, and shall
submit said agreements to the Authority for approval prior to the start of services.
(2)
Costs. Contracting costs shall be included in the Contractor’s Operating Budget
and subject to Authority approval.
(3)
Subcontracting Activities. The following activities are examples of Contract
activities that may be subcontracted to third parties. The Authority may, in its
sole discretion, add to the activities on this list or remove activities from the list.
All changes to the list shall be provided in writing to the Contractor, and changes
shall have only prospective impact on the Contractor’s subcontracting activities.
The subcontracting of activities not included on the list currently in effect must
first be approved by the Authority.
(i)
Maintenance of Premises and Operating Equipment;
(ii)
Armored car cash collection and transport of locked money bags to an
Authority approved bank;
(iii)
Snow/ice removal and treatment;
Page 19 of 63
(iv)
Towing, impound, and auction services;
(v)
Janitorial services;
(vi)
Consulting services;
(vii)
Printing and signage;
(viii) Security services;
(ix)
Photography services;
(x)
Customer service training; and
(xi)
Temporary staffing.
(xii)
Patron amenities (i.e. cars wash, detailing, dry cleaning, etc.).
(b)
Unless otherwise approved by the Authority, the term of any agreement entered into by
the Contractor with a third-party to provide goods or services in connection with this
Contract shall not extend beyond the Contract Term. The Contractor shall bear the sole
responsibility for any third-party obligations that extend beyond the Contract Term
including payment obligations. The Authority shall have no liability or obligation to any
such third-party subcontractors under this Contract.
(c)
The Contractor shall provide the Authority with a copy of all fully-executed subcontracts
with third parties with an anticipated annual value greater than $100,000, within thirty
(30) days after execution. The Authority has the right to approve or reject any
subcontracts. The Contractor shall also submit any proposed modifications to said
subcontracts for the Authority’s approval prior to their execution.
Section 4.09 Advertising, Public Relations, and Information Distribution
The Authority desires to have the Public Parking Concession operated in a professional, high
quality manner for the traveling public. Toward this end, the Contractor shall fully cooperate
with the Authority in any effort to develop and institute an advertising and public relations
campaign designed to inform and serve Airport patrons.
(a)
Authority Approval. All signs, advertising media, messages, and devices used in the
operation or promotion of the concession shall be subject to the continuing approval of
the Authority.
(b)
Telephone Messages. The Contractor shall develop a prerecorded telephone message
that provides information to the public concerning the parking lot locations, services,
rates, and shuttle bus services.
(c)
Corporate Identity. The Contractor shall not affix or display its corporate logo, name or
otherwise advertise its corporate identity on the Premises, facilities, or Operating
Equipment, without the prior written approval of the Authority.
Section 4.10 Procedures for Reporting Accidents and Notification of Injury, Theft, Fraud or
Damage
Page 20 of 63
(a)
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Authority and Airport Police by telephone,
followed by a written report within twenty-four (24) hours, of any report, discovery, or
investigation of any personal injury, or any theft or fraud, or any fire, or significant
damage to Authority or private property. The detailed procedures for handling these
matters shall be included in the Manual.
(b)
Within twenty-four (24) hours after the telephonic notice, the Contractor shall submit to
the Authority a report that describes the injury, theft, fraud or damage, the amount of
theft, fraud or damage as best can be determined, the action the Contractor has taken or
intends to take, and in the case of theft, fraud or deliberate damage by an employee of the
Contractor, the name and job title of the employee who committed the theft, fraud or
damage, action taken in addition to the information required above, and any other
information relevant to the interests of the Authority. For the purposes of this Contract,
theft shall include, but not be limited to, fraudulently removing parking tickets from a
ticket issuing machine, intentionally failing to turn in all tickets at the end of shift, filing a
false lost ticket claim, taking of cash receipts, intentional mischarging of customers,
taking a patron’s vehicle or any part of it, or taking any article left in or on a patron’s
vehicle. If not all information is available at the time of the initial report, the Contractor
shall update the report as necessary until it is complete.
(c)
The Contractor shall file an Authority police report for any accident involving shuttle bus
or service vehicles provided by the Authority. The Contractor must provide the
Contracting Officer or his/her designee as well as the Authority's Risk Management
department with accident reports of any major or minor damage to any vehicle within
twenty-four (24) hours.
(d)
All accidents must be reported, in writing, to Contracting Officer or his/her designee
within three (3) calendar days from the date of the accident.
(e)
All Hazardous Materials spills and incidents shall be reported to the Airport's
Engineering and Maintenance department immediately by contacting the Work Order
Desk (via telephone or email) and in writing to the Contracting Officer or his/her
designee within three (3) calendar days from the date of the incident.
(f)
The Contractor shall establish a “Safety Committee” comprised of an interdisciplinary
group of its staff, which evaluates the effectiveness of parking and safety related
measures and devises proactive management steps for the benefit of employees, tenants,
and the public. The Authority will appoint a representative(s) to the Safety Committee.
Section 4.11 Coordination With The Contractor’s Corporate Office
The Contractor’s Corporate Officer Representative shall be identified in writing with annual
submission of the Operating Budget for each Contract Year. The Contractor’s Corporate Officer
Representative shall be familiar with the terms and conditions of the contract and be available to
talk with or meet with the Contracting Officer or his/her designee. The travel cost of the
Page 21 of 63
Contractor’s Corporate Officer Representative to attend meetings at the Airport shall not be a
Reimbursable Expense under Section 6.06 herein.
Examples of Corporate Office involvement:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Modifications to the Contract
Disputes relating to accounting and operating reports
Support during Authority Audit efforts (production of records, etc.)
Contractor’s response to the results of the annual audit of financial results
of this Contract and issues relating to the Contractor’s conduct of
operations and compliance audits
Performance evaluation
Section 4.12 Transition: Contract Commencement and Contract Close-out
(a)
Transition/Contract Commencement.
(1)
Transition Plan and Cost Estimates. No later than thirty (30) days prior to the
Contract commencement date, the Contractor will provide a transition plan
and an estimate of transition costs for Authority approval. Transition costs
shall include but not be limited to personnel, equipment, supplies, travel,
lodging, recruitment efforts, and office space. Corporate travel costs
related to contract transition shall not exceed the Authority’s current travel
per diem policy (of which will be provided by the Authority upon request
by the Contractor)
(2)
Reimbursement for Transition Costs. Transition costs must be submitted with
receipts within ninety (90) days following the Contract commencement
date. Transition costs not submitted within the ninety (90) days and not
pre-approved by the Authority will not be reimbursed. Transition costs
are separately reported from the Monthly Certified Statement.
(3)
Contract Commencement. The Contractor shall provide supervisory personnel,
training staff, and other employees on-site beginning no later than thirty
(30) days prior to the Contract commencement date in order to plan and
implement a smooth transition.
(4)
Transition information requirements subject to review by the Authority:
(i)
Amount of Change Funds as defined in Section 6.01
(ii)
Amount of Operating Funds for the first month of the Contract term (to
coincide with the Operating Budget)
(iii)
Commercial bank account information as defined in Section 6.02 for
Operating Funds wire transfer
(iv)
Copies of all sub-contract agreements for Authority approval as defined in
Section 4.08
(v)
Performance Guarantee as defined in Article 7
Page 22 of 63
(vi)
Certificates of Insurance as defined in Section 8.2
(vii)
Documentation of unused vacation leaves accruals for any employees
transferring from previous parking and shuttle bus services contract.
(viii) Schedule of deposit days for all Operating Receipts collected by the
Contractor.
(b)
(c)
(ix)
Copy of any outstanding/existing collective bargaining agreement
(x)
Authorized representative of the Contractor for :
1.
Receipt of correspondence from the Authority
2.
Approval of invoices for reimbursement
3.
Certification of Accounting and Operating Reports as defined in
Section 6.07
Contract Close-out. The Contractor is responsible for the following items to close-out
the Contract expiration or termination.
(1)
Monthly Certified Statements and Operations Reports for the last month of the
last contract year due to the Authority as defined in Section 6.07
(2)
Documentation of unused vacation leave accruals as of last day of the last
contract year due to the Authority no later than the twentieth (20th) day of the
succeeding month as defined in Section 6.02(a)(2)(v)
(3)
Performance evaluation report to the Authority due as defined in Section 6.09
(4)
Annual Statement of Operating Results for the last contract year due as defined in
Section 6.07
(5)
Return of Change funds as defined in Section 6.01
(6)
Inventory of premises and operating equipment as defined in Section 3 and
Exhibit A.
(8)
Retention of books of records of the Contract for three (3) years as defined in
Section 6.03(e)
(9)
Performance Guarantee shall be in effect for one (1) year after the termination or
expiration of the Contract, unless a different period is established in writing by the
Authority.
Any expenses incurred for contract commencement or close-out which were not
previously included in estimates will not be reimbursed by the Authority.
Page 23 of 63
Section 4.13 Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard.
The Authority utilizes systems and networks that store, process, and/or transmit cardholder data
as defined by the Payment Card Industry (PCI) Security Standards Council (Cardholder Data).
As such, these systems, networks, and procedures are required to comply with the PCI Data
Security Standard (DSS). The Contractor shall comply with the PCI DSS requirements for such
systems and acknowledges that the Contractor is responsible for the security of cardholder data
handled by the Contractor. The Authority and the Contractor shall meet to identify the specific
systems and networks that store, process and/or transmit cardholder data to determine the desired
actions and identify responsibilities as applicable to the PCI DSS requirement areas.
ARTICLE 5. RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE AUTHORITY
Section 5.01 Authority's Maintenance Obligation
The Authority agrees to perform the maintenance tasks listed in Exhibit B that are identified as
the Authority’s responsibility.
Section 5.02 Administration of the Contract
In order to assure the effective administration and enforcement of the terms and conditions of the
Contract, the Authority's Airport Manager and his authorized staff shall be the party responsible
for the administration and enforcement of the terms and conditions of this Contract in all areas
unless the Contract specifically provides that other Authority offices are responsible.
Section 5.03 Authority's Shopping Service
The Authority shall have the right at any time without limitation to monitor and test the quality
and effectiveness of the Contractor's services and procedures through the use of a professional
shopping service employed by the Authority. In the event said shopping service reveals that the
level of the Contractor's service is below that required by this Contract, the Contractor shall take
such corrective action acceptable to the Authority to comply with the terms and conditions of the
Contract.
Section 5.04 Loss of Business and Right to Maintain Airport
(a)
The Authority shall not be liable to the Contractor for any loss of business or for payment
of additional Management Fees or Incentive Fees to the Contractor as a result of any
change in the operation or configuration of the parking or facilities, or any change in
procedures, laws, rules, or regulations governing the operation of the Airport.
(b)
The Authority reserves the right to further develop, improve, repair, and alter the Airport
an all roadways, parking areas, terminals, landing areas, and taxiways as it may
reasonably see fit, and the Authority shall be free from any and all liability to the
Contractor for loss of business or damages of any nature whatsoever occasioned by
making any such improvements, repairs, alterations, and additions.
Page 24 of 63
Section 5.05 Right of Inspection by the Authority
(a)
The Contractor shall permit the Authority, its agents, and employees to enter and view
the Premises, facilities, and Operating Equipment as may be necessary or desirable to
ensure that the proper care and maintenance of the Premises, facilities, and Operating
Equipment is being conducted by the Contractor.
ARTICLE 6. FINANCIAL CONSIDERATION
Section 6.01 Authority Funding: Operating and Change Funds
(a)
Operating Funds Account. Contractor shall establish a commercial account, with wire
transfer capability, at a banking institution approved by the Authority. This bank account
shall receive Operating Funds transfers from the Authority to pay authorized expenses.
The Contractor shall provide bank routing information and updates as necessary.
(b)
Amount of Operating Funds. The amount of Operating Funds transferred by the
Authority to the Contractor's commercial bank account shall be based upon the approved
cash requirements submitted by the Contractor and approved Wire Transfer Schedule,
unless otherwise determined by the Authority in writing.
(c)
Funds Due to the Authority. If the Monthly Certified Statement (Section 6.07(b))
shows that the amount of the Contractor's Reimbursable Expenses is less than the
Operating Funds deposited with the Contractor for that month, the Contractor shall
transfer the excess Operating Funds to the Authority’s designated bank account (see
Exhibit K) within three (3) business days of the Monthly Certified Statement's submittal.
(d)
Funds due to the Contractor. Payment by the Authority for Reimbursable Expenses
authorized under Section 6.06(a) in excess of Operating Funds shall be made within
approximately forty-five (45) days of receiving the Contractor's Monthly Certified
Statement provided that the Statement is complete and includes all required certifications
and supporting documents.
(e)
Changes in the Amount of Operating Funds. If the anticipated Reimbursable
Expenses approved in the Operating Budget decrease, the Authority may decrease the
Operating Funds transfer amount with five (5) business days' written notice to the
Contractor. The Authority may increase the Operating Funds transfer amount to the
Contractor for major, irregular anticipated Reimbursable Expenses, upon sufficient
written notification from the Contractor, for a given month or specific period are
expected to exceed the Operating Funds to be transferred to the Contractor's account.
(f)
Change Funds Amount. The Contractor shall notify the Authority prior to Contract
commencement of the amount of Change Funds required for cashiers and pay-on-foot
machines. Change Funds will be provided by the Authority upon approval of the
Contractor's written request. Change Funds shall be repaid in full at contract close-out.
Page 25 of 63
The Contractor is required to reconcile Change Funds daily to ensure the approved
Change Funds amount is maintained.
(g)
Adjustments in the amount of Change Funds. If the Contractor determines the initial
amount of Change Funds is insufficient, the contractor may request additional Change
Funds from the Authority. If the contractor determines the amount of Change Funds is in
excess of daily requirements, the contractor may submit a request to reduce the Change
Funds amount. Within five (5) business days of approval by the Authority, the excess
Change Funds shall be returned to the Authority’s bank account.
Section 6.02 Operating Budget
(a)
Operating Budget. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Authority for its
review and approval an Operating Budget for each Contract Year of the Contract Term.
The Operating Budget shall be submitted in hard copy and an electronic format
acceptable to the Authority. Notwithstanding the actual commencement date of this
Contract, and unless otherwise directed by the Authority, the Operating Budget for each
Contract Year shall cover the twelve (12) calendar months ended June 30. The Operating
Budget shall be reviewed quarterly by the Parties and may be reviewed more frequently
at the request of either of the Parties.
(1)
The approval for the Operating Budget including revisions thereto, shall be made
in writing by the Authority. The approved Operating Budget shall be binding
upon the Contractor.
(2)
The Operating Budget shall be comprised of the following sections. These
sections together shall constitute the entire Operating Budget.
(i)
Operating Budget with recurring and non-recurring anticipated
Reimbursable Expenses in total
(ii)
Detail of non-recurring expenses. Detail shall include: account, item
description, amount, month anticipated, and justification
(iii)
Expense report by department. Parking (including employee parking),
shuttle bus operations and fleet maintenance.
(iv)
Employee Report with number of positions by department, wages forecast
by position for the contract year
(v)
Miscellaneous Reports:
(1)
Vacation and Sick Leave Reports Vacation and Sick Leave
Accrual Report with employee leave balances by hours and dollar
amount.
(2)
Must include Contractor policy for accrued personal, vacation and
sick time.
(3)
Capital Projects and Operating Equipment. Cost Savings
proposals.
Page 26 of 63
(4)
Identification of Executive Office representative and their areas of
responsibility related to this Contract.
(5)
Wire Transfer Schedule.
(6)
Contractor Award and Performance Program. The Contractor shall
submit for approval how it intends to measure performance (in the
case of bonuses included in the Operating Budget), and how the
allocation of bonuses, if any, will occur to employees and
management.
(7)
The recurring anticipated Reimbursable Expenses, as defined in
Section 6.06(a), shall include the following subsections or such
other subsections as the Authority directs, presented in line-item
detail:
i. Payroll
ii. Payroll Taxes and Employee Benefits
iii. Employee Development
iv. Communication and Utility
v.
Human Resource Services
vi. Maintenance (including Maintenance of Operating
Equipment)
vii. Other Services
viii. Supplies and Tools
ix. Insurance
x.
Non-capital equipment
xi. Management Fee
(b)
First Contract Year Operating Budget. The Authority and the Contractor shall review
the Contractor's first Contract Year Operating Budget submitted with the Contractor's
proposal and revise it as necessary no later than thirty (30) days prior to the
commencement of the Contract Term.
(c)
Budget Schedule. For subsequent Contract Years, the Contractor shall develop and
submit its Operating Budget to the Authority for approval by April 1.
(d)
Quarterly Budget Review. The Contractor shall prepare a Quarterly Budget Review
which includes a schedule of year-to-date actual expenses versus the approved Operating
Budget and a revised Operating Budget (including anticipated expenses for the remainder
of the Contract Year), according to the following dates:
Action
(1)
(2)
(3)
(e)
Completion Date
First quarterly review
Second quarterly review
Third quarterly review
October 31
January 31
April 30
Shifting of Budgeted Funds. The Contractor shall, subject to advance written approval
by the Authority, have the flexibility to shift funds within the Operating Budget from one
Page 27 of 63
line item to another as necessary to fulfill the service and operations requirements
specified in the Contract and the Manual; provided, however, that the Contractor shall not
exceed the Operating Budget by subsection without the prior written approval of the
Authority.
Section 6.03 Books and Records Maintained by the Contractor
(a)
Required Record Keeping Practices. The Contractor shall maintain in a true and
accurate manner and in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
(GAAP), such accounts, books, records and data as necessary for an independent certified
public accountant to perform an audit or examination of the Contractor’s financial
statements in accordance with GAAP and with generally accepted auditing standards.
This includes, but is not limited to: ledgers and account records, revenue journals, daily
or periodic summary reports, inventory and purchasing records, cash disbursement
register, point of sale records, bank deposit slips, bank statements, tax reports filed with
federal, state, county, city, or other agencies, discount or rebate agreements, records of
refunds, or third parties relating to this Contract.
(b)
Required Records. Such books and records shall contain records of all of the
Contractor’s pertinent activity under this Contract in a form consistent with good
accounting practice and may include, without limitation, electronic media compatible
with the computers available to the Authority, or computer generated hard copies.
(c)
Computer Generated Records. If the Contractor’s books and records have been
generated from computerized data, the Contractor agrees to provide the Authority or its
representative with extracts of the data files in a computer readable format on data disks,
e-mail with attached files or suitable alternative computer data exchange formats. The
Contractor shall not charge the Authority for retrieving, downloading to diskette, and/or
printing any records or transactions stored in magnetic, optical, microform or other
media.
(d)
Subcontractor and Joint Venture Agreements. Sections 6.03 and 6.04 of this Contract
shall also apply to all joint venture partners and subcontractors. The Contractor shall
include the revised language in all subcontractor and joint venture or other business
agreements issued in conjunction with this Contract.
(e)
Records Retention. The Contractor shall retain and keep available all books and records
relating to this Contract for not less than three (3) years after the expiration or termination
of the Contract, or in the event of litigation or claims arising out of or relating to this
Contract until such litigation or claims are completely disposed of and all time limits for
appeal have expired.
Section 6.04 Audit and Inspection of Records
(a)
Availability of Records for Inspection. The Authority shall have the right, upon
reasonable notice to Contractor, to audit the Contractor’s books and records relating to its
operations under this Contract. The Contractor's books and records relating to its
Page 28 of 63
operations under this Contract shall be available for inspection and audit by the Authority
or its duly authorized representative upon seven (7) days advance notice and shall include
without limitation, the books and records required to be maintained under Article 6 of
this Contract. The Contractor agrees to keep such records on the Premises or at another
location within the Washington metropolitan area. If the Contractor maintains the books,
accounts, and records in another location outside the Washington Metropolitan Area, the
Contractor shall make these documents available at the Contactor’s local office or at an
agreed-upon site in the Washington Metropolitan Area upon seven (7) days notice from
the Authority.
(b)
Examination of Records not Available in the Washington Metropolitan Area. If the
necessary books, records and original source documents are not in the Washington
Metropolitan Area or cannot be provided for examination at the Contractor’s local office
in the Washington Metropolitan Area, and if agreed to in advance by the Authority’s
Vice President for Audit, the audit can be conducted outside the Washington
Metropolitan Area at the Contractor’s headquarters or other appropriate location. For
such audits, the Contractor shall reimburse the Authority for air and ground
transportation, mileage, food, lodging and other miscellaneous costs associated with the
audit.
These reimbursements shall conform to the requirements of the current version of
Authority Directive (F1-004, Change 1) entitled “Travel Policy” as provided in Exhibit
G-3. The Authority will invoice the Contractor for these expenses at the completion of
the audit. Failure by the Contractor to pay the invoice with its own funds within thirty
(30) days of the date of the invoice may result, at the Authority’s sole discretion, in
deduction of such expenses from payments to be made by the Authority to Contractor or
in a finding that the Contractor is in default under Article 11 of the Contract.
(c)
Access to Contractor Personnel and facilities. The Authority or its authorized
representatives shall have full access to the Contractor’s personnel for inquiry/interview,
walk-through, and observation as deemed necessary to audit or inspect the books and
records.
(d)
Cost and Pricing Data. The Authority or its authorized representatives shall have the
right to examine the accuracy and completeness of cost and pricing data including
computations and projections.
(e)
Right to Inspect Subcontractor Records. The Authority’s right to inspect and audit
includes the books and records of all subcontractors under this Contract as they relate to
this Contract.
(f)
Accommodations for Authority Representatives. The Contractor agrees to reasonably
accommodate the Authority’s representatives by providing adequate workspace, allowing
photocopying of any records and documents, and allowing the interviewing of such
employees and subcontractors as the representatives deem necessary to conduct and
support their audit.
Page 29 of 63
(g)
Reimbursement of Non-Allowable or Unsupported Costs. If, as a result of the audit, it
is established that the Contractor has been reimbursed for expenses that are either not
allowable or not supported by the Contractor’s records including but not limited to
invoices, payroll registers, time sheets, electronic funds transfers, or cancelled checks, the
Contractor shall reimburse the Authority from its own funds. Such payment shall be
made within thirty (30) days from the date of the written notice from the Authority and
shall include interest in accordance with the Authority’s rates established for late
payments to the Authority’s vendor. If the Contractor fails to reimburse the Authority
within thirty (30) days from the date of the written notice, the Authority, in its sole
discretion, may withhold the amount due from reimbursable expenses owed to the
Contractor, or the Authority may determine that the Contractor is in default under Article
11 of the Contract.
(h)
Incomplete Audits. Furthermore, if the audit reveals that the records of the Contractor
are in such a state that the revenue or the operating expenses cannot be audited, the entire
expense of the Authority’s efforts to conduct the audit shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Authority will invoice the Contractor for these expenses. Payment shall be made
within thirty (30) days from the date of the invoice. If the Contractor fails to pay the
invoice from its own funds, the Authority may, in its sole discretion, deduct the amount
due from payments owed by the Authority to the Contractor or determine that the
Contractor is in default under Article 11 of the Contract.
Section 6.05 Revenue Collection and Deposit of Operating Receipts
(a)
The Contractor shall completely and accurately account for all Operating Receipts
generated under this Contract. The Contractor shall collect, count, record, and hold all
Operating Receipts in trust for the Authority, until deposited to an Authority bank
account.
(b)
Collection and Deposit of Operating Receipts. The Authority shall establish a
commercial account at a banking institution of the Authority's choice. This account shall
only receive operating receipt deposits.
(1)
Deposits. The Contractor shall submit to the Authority for approval a schedule of
deposit days for all Operating Receipts collected by the Contractor. Operating
Receipts received by the Contractor under this Contract that are cash and personal
checks shall be deposited to the Authority's bank account in accordance with
approved schedule submitted prior to contract commencement. The Contractor
shall use an armored car service to pick up sealed deposits from designated
locations and deliver deposits to the Authority's banking facility. The armored car
service must be bonded. Failure to deposit Operating Receipts within the required
period may be subject to liquidated damages, and if it occurs on more than three
(3) occasions during the Contract Term the failure may be an Event of Default as
defined in Article 11.
Page 30 of 63
(2)
Credit Card Sales. The Authority maintains separate agreements with credit
card processing services for the handling of credit card payments by Airport
public parking customers. These credit card receipts are deposited periodically by
the credit card processors directly to an Authority account designated for this
purpose. The credit card processors will make periodic withdrawals from this
account to compensate for charge-backs, discount fees, and transaction fees. The
Contractor shall be responsible for accurately recording all public parking patrons'
credit card transactions; researching credit card payment disputes; reviewing
credit card summary statement reports provided by the credit card processors; and
reconciling the Contractor's credit card sales records with the credit card
processors' deposits of credit card receipts and the charge-backs, discount fees,
and transaction fees paid to the credit card processors. The Contractor will be
given access to the credit card processors' reports and statements needed to
accomplish these tasks. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring there is
constant communication between the Authority credit card processing equipment
and the credit card processors equipment and shall immediately notify the
Authority in the event of a communication loss resulting in lost revenue.
(3)
Vehicle Towing, Impoundment, and Storage Receipts. The Contractor shall
deposit the towing, impoundment and storage fees collected with the following
business day's deposit of Operating Receipts.
(4)
Lost, Stolen, Unaccounted-For Operating Receipts. Should any Operating
Receipts in the possession of the Contractor be lost, stolen, or unaccounted-for,
including but not limited to cashier shortages, they shall be replaced by the
Contractor using its own funds within twenty-four (24) hours of when such loss,
theft, or failure to account is discovered or should have been discovered. The
Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer or his/her designee and the Airport
Police by telephone immediately of any lost, stolen, or unaccounted-for Operating
Receipts, followed by a written report prepared in accordance with Section
4.10(b) herein within twenty-four (24) hours after the telephonic notice.
(5)
Checks. The Contractor shall accommodate patrons wishing to pay parking fees
by check. Acceptance of checks shall be limited to those occasions when the
patron does not possess sufficient cash or appropriate debit and/or credit card(s) to
pay the parking charge.
(c)
New or Revised Collection and Deposit Procedures. The Contractor shall immediately
implement any new collection and deposit procedures, or revise existing procedures as
the Authority may, at its sole discretion, require from time to time and shall revise the
Manual accordingly with thirty (30) days of the implementation of the revised
procedures.
(d)
Interest, Penalties, and Late Charges.
(1)
Without waiving any other right of action available to the Authority, in the event
the Contractor fails to make deposits of Operating Receipts when due to the
Authority and said failure continues for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days or
Page 31 of 63
more, late charges will be assessed. Late charges may consist of interest and
penalties.
(2)
The interest rate shall be at the rate per annum which is four percent (4%) higher
than the prime rate as published in The Wall Street Journal on the date such
payment was due.
(3)
In addition to interest, monthly late penalty charges at the rate of six percent (6%)
per annum (or as established periodically) of the amount due will be assessed on
the unpaid portion of accounts more than thirty (30) days past due.
Section 6.06 Reimbursable Expenses
(a)
Reimbursable Expenses. To be reimbursed, Reimbursable Expenses claimed by the
Contractor must be accompanied by an invoice approved by an authorized representative,
proof of payment and other documentation as defined in Section 6.06(a)(3). Said
documentation shall be submitted with the Monthly Certified Statement. Reimbursable
expenses submitted may be recurring or non-recurring.
(1)
The Authority shall reimburse the Contractor for actual costs without markup
including, but not limited to, labor, goods, and services. Compensation to or
between any of the parties within the business association in the form of a
management fee, mark-up on goods and/or services, or some other arrangement
shall not be included in the Allowable Costs for reimbursement by the Authority
and shall be paid from the Contract Management Fee and/or Incentive Fee.
(2)
As previously stated in Section 4.08 of the Contract, the Contractor shall make
best efforts to obtain a minimum of three (3) bids or alternative providers for each
expense item with an annual value of $5,000 or greater, or as otherwise approved
in writing by the Authority. The Contractor shall document its efforts to obtain
alternative providers and competitive bidding, and shall submit the expense to the
Authority for approval prior to the start of services or purchases of supplies and
services.
(3)
Recurring Reimbursable Expenses. The Recurring Reimbursable Expenses shall
include budgeted expenses anticipated to occur on a regular basis (i.e. monthly,
bi-monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, etc.) and may include, but are not limited to,
the following:
(i)
Personnel Compensation (payroll costs, including regular salaries and
wages, sick days, vacation and holiday pay, bonus, cell phone allowance
for designated employees (as approved by the Authority) and overtime per
Contractors personnel policies)
(ii)
Payroll Taxes and Employee Benefits (i.e. medical, dental and life
insurances, employer retirement match, etc., applicable only to employees
employed by the Contractor at the Airport);
Page 32 of 63
(iii)
Communication Services (radio and telephone services);
(iv)
Human Resources Services (pre-employment testing; random drug testing;
criminal history checks; personnel recruiting expenses to include
employment advertising; and locksmiths);
(v)
Maintenance and Services (general repairs and maintenance to building,
facilities or Operating Equipment, trash removal, armored car service,
monthly software, administrative services);
(vi)
Supplies and Materials (postage, office supplies, uniform cleaning,
janitorial and shop supplies, small tools); and
(vii)
Cost of purchasing ticket stock or parking locator supplies for the
Premises operations
(viii) The Cost of materials, maintenance and repair services for the shuttle bus
fleet operating at the airport.
(ix)
(4)
The cost of insurance as required by Section 8.02 herein, and only from a
third-party vendor. Self-insurance will not be reimbursable. If the
Contractor insures more than one of its operations under the same
insurance policy, it shall be reimbursed by the Authority for only the
portion of the cost of such insurance that is reasonably allocated to the
Contractor’s operations hereunder. The Contractor shall not be entitled to
reimbursement in an amount greater than the cost of separately insuring its
operations hereunder.
Non-recurring Reimbursable Expenses. The Non-recurring Reimbursable
Expenses shall include expenses anticipated to occur on a one-time or irregular
basis during the Contract Year.
(i)
All Non-recurring Reimbursable Expenses (valued at a total annual
expense of $2,500 or over) must be submitted in writing and require
Authority approval prior to the start of services or purchases of supplies
and services.
(ii)
Non-recurring Reimbursable Expenses include, but are not limited to, the
following:
(1)
Base payroll costs, including regular salaries and wages, sick days,
vacations and holiday pay, employee incentives, employee training
(local) and overtime, and all associated employee benefits as
described in Section 6.06(a)(2) herein above incurred by the
Contractor as a result of providing personnel to perform this
Contract in excess of that approved in the Operating Budget and
approved in writing by the Authority. When seeking the
Authority’s approval, the Contractor must demonstrate that there
Page 33 of 63
has been either 1) a material increase in the number of public
parking transactions, or 2) additional staffing needs resulting from
unforeseen special circumstances;
(b)
(2)
Travel and Training (Cost of training for employees, employee
seminars, and employee mileage claims in connection with
training).
(3)
Marketing and promotion costs.
(4)
Cost for temporary employee services.
(5)
Cost of materials, maintenance and repair services for snow
removal, pavement repairs, sweeping/power washing, signage, fire
and safety expenses for the Premises.
(6)
Costs resulting from the addition of temporary or permanent
parking Premises.
(7)
Non-Capital Equipment (Costs of additional office equipment,
computers, etc. as directed by the Authority for amounts between
$1,000 and $10,000).
(8)
Costs incurred with any other activities for which the Authority
provides written direction to the Contractor to undertake;
(9)
Costs of capital asset acquisitions/projects the Authority directs the
Contractor to undertake.
(10)
Costs of regular, recurring expense items/projects exceeding
amounts approved in the budget by 10% or more.
Non-Reimbursable Expenses. Unless specifically approved otherwise in writing by the
Authority, the following Contractor expenses shall not be Reimbursable Expenses and
shall be paid for by the Contractor using its own funds.
(1)
Salary, costs and expenses of all off-site, nonresident, legal, audit, risk
management, administrative, bookkeeping and/or executive personnel of the
Contractor.
(2)
Expenses such as home office travel, home office, or local entertainment and
accommodations and off-site general office expenses.
(3)
The expenses of legal representation or of union negotiations and administration
of union agreements.
(4)
The expense of any penalties, fines, or late payment fees incurred by the
Contractor.
(5)
Expenses of the Proposal Guarantee, which is submitted with the Contractor’s
Proposal, and the Contractor’s Performance Bond.
(6)
The expense of taxes and similar fees incurred by the Contractor in its business
operations, provided, however, that sales or use taxes incurred on goods and
Page 34 of 63
services purchased under the Contract shall be considered Reimbursable
Expenses.
(c)
(7)
Missing or unreturned employee badges, uniforms, laundry, and linens.
(8)
Any cost incurred due to negligence by employees, agents, or third-party goods
and services contractors, or subcontractors of the Contractor.
(9)
The cost of repair of damage to vehicles or Operating Equipment resulting from
abuse or neglect (including any associated deductibles).
(10)
Any cashier shortages from cashier terminals.
(11)
The financing costs associated with the Contractor’s working capital.
(12)
The cost of any expenses incurred by the Contractor in connection with the
indemnification provisions of this Contract.
(13)
The cost of meetings between executive level representatives of the Contractor
and the Authority staff.
(14)
Any employee compensation benefits, e.g., a car allowance, that are not
specifically approved by the Authority.
(15)
The Contractor is responsible for all “personal” long-distance phone calls made
by its employees under the Contract; business calls and any monthly maintenance
fees or installation costs for telecommunication services are reimbursable subject
to review and written approval by the Authority.
(16)
The costs of any excessive use of utilities by the Contractor, provided that the
Authority provides written notice to the Contractor that its utilities usage is
excessive and provides the Contractor with thirty (30) days to reduce the usage.
(17)
Personal, vacation and sick leave accumulated in excess of eighty (80) hours per
Contractor employee may not be carried or transferred from any Contract Year
into the succeeding Contract Year. The Authority shall not reimburse any
Contractor employee for any personal, vacation or sick leave balance with a
cumulative total that exceeds eighty (80) hours at the time of Contract expiration
or termination for any reason. Contractor shall provide policy on accrued
personal, vacation and sick leave in the budget for the first Contract Year.
Additionally, the Contractor will not be reimbursed for any instance where it is
determined that leave was paid in error (i.e. prior to being accrued, not in
accordance with the approved benefit policy).
(18)
Any fees above actual costs for good or services provided by the Contractor
and/or associated business entities under the Contract.
(19)
Allocated cost of self-insurance.
Monthly Certified Statements. Each month of the Contract Term the Contractor shall
detail its Reimbursable Expenses for the previous month in the Monthly Certified
Statement prepared in accordance with Section 6.07(b). The Statement shall include a
certification that the Authority has not previously reimbursed the Contractor for any of
the Reimbursable Expenses claimed on the Monthly Certified Statement.
Page 35 of 63
(e) Disputed Reimbursable Expenses. The Authority’s Contracting Officer shall give the
Contractor written notice of any Reimbursable Expenses claimed in the Monthly
Certified Statement that the Authority disputes and the reasons therefore. The
Contractor, within thirty (30) days from receipt of such notice, may appeal this decision
to the Airport Manager. If the Airport Manager determines that the item in dispute is a
Non-Allowed Expense, the Contractor shall pay the amount due with its own funds
within thirty (30) days from the date of the Airport Manager’s determination. If the
Contractor fails to make timely payment of the amount due, the Authority may deduct the
amount owed from amounts due to the Contractor from the Authority.
Section 6.07 Accounting and Operating Reports
(a)
Preliminary Monthly Statement. The Contractor shall furnish to the Authority no later
than the second (2nd) day of each Contract Month, a Preliminary Monthly Statement of
Net Operating Receipts and Net Due for the previous Contract Month. The Preliminary
Monthly Statement shall be submitted electronically in a format acceptable to the
Authority. If the second day of the month is a non-business day, then the Preliminary
Monthly Statement shall be due on the next business day.
(b)
Monthly Certified Statement. The Contractor shall furnish to the Authority no later
than the twentieth (20th) day of each Calendar Month, a Monthly Certified Statement of
Operating Receipts and Reimbursable Expenses (Statement) for the previous Calendar
Month. If the twentieth day of the month is a non-business day, then the Monthly
Certified Statement shall be due on the next business day. The Statement must be
delivered to the Authority prior to the end of normal business hours (8:00 a.m. to 5:00
p.m.) on the day due.
(1)
The Statement shall be in the format specified by the Authority and submitted in
hard copy and electronic copy acceptable to the Authority.
(2)
The Statement shall be dated and certified as complete and correct by the
Contractor's financial representative.
(3)
The Statement shall include a certification that the Authority has not previously
reimbursed the Contractor for any of the Reimbursable Expenses claimed on the
Monthly Certified Statement.
(4)
The Monthly Certified Statement shall, at a minimum, include the following
information:
i.
Statement of Net Operating Receipts and Net Due (must include
certification)
ii.
Schedule of Reimbursable Expenses (must be submitted by month and
year-to-date, reconciled to Operating Funds transfers and amounts due to
the Authority or Contractor)
iii.
Certification of ACDBE Participation Activity (Exhibit D)
Page 36 of 63
iv.
Reconciliations
a.
Revenue Reconciliation. Reconciliation by lot, by payment type,
starting from the PARCS system revenue and reconciled to
revenues reported.
b.
Deposit Reconciliation. Reconciliation by lot, by payment type,
starting from revenues to audited deposits per bank reconciliations.
Include list of deposits by lot.
Revenue Adjustments. Submit any adjustments, in excess of
$500, which include, but are not limited to, the following
categories:
(i)
Virtual Midnight: Variances resulting from shifts being
closed after actual midnight.
(ii)
Pay-on-foot Deposit: Variances resulting from a patron
paying for the parking fees at a pay-on-foot machine before
midnight, and subsequently exiting the facility after
midnight, or patrons who lose their ticket before they exit
and have to exit by remote ticket processing.
(iii) Operational Phasing: Variances resulting from uncollected
revenue in the event an emergency during which the
Authority Police Department directs vehicles that do not
wish to park through a parking facility or excessive demand
as defined in the Manual.
(iv)
AR Paid: Revenue collected as a result of promissory notes.
(v)
Returned Checks: Debits from Revenue.
(vi)
NSF Checks Paid: Credits to Revenue.
(vii) Over/Under Ring.
(viii) Rental Company reimbursements.
(ix)
Manual receipts.
c.
v.
d.
Payroll Listing and Reconciliation by types of wages and hours,
gross payroll to net and employer payroll taxes.
e.
Headcount Report by position and department as compared to
budget
f.
Bank Reconciliation of Authority revenue bank account.
Source Documents
a.
Ledger of expenses or equivalent schedule
b.
Parking Access Revenue Control System Reports used in
reconciliation.
c.
Bank Statements
Page 37 of 63
d.
e.
(vi)
Payroll registers
(i)
Must include: summary of Gross wages by department and
type; year-to-date summary data for all employees who
were paid during the calendar year.
Check Disbursements Register
(i)
Must include: Vendor; invoice amount; invoice date; check
number; check date; account description; brief description
of the disbursement.
(ii)
Copies of all checks are not required, however, the
Contractor must be able to provide a copy upon request.
f.
Copies of invoices for all purchases made by the Contractor under
this Contract
g.
Credit Card Processing Report
Analysis
a.
Expenses. Budget Variance Report showing the actual expenses
versus the budget for the current period and year-to-date.
Variances for the current period and year-to-date over or under
either 10% or $5,000 must be explained in detail. Budget variances
should be analyzed for the month and year-to-date. Variances must
be explained in detail as to why actual expenses vary from the
budget.
b.
Vehicle Accountability and Analysis. The following formula, as
may be amended by the Authority in writing, will determine the
Contractor's overall vehicle accountability, by parking lot, on a
monthly basis:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Number of vehicles in the license plate inventory on the
last day of the preceding month; plus,
Number of vehicles entering the parking lot during the
month (per the Daily Lane Activity report as adjusted for
manual and other entries); less
Number of vehicles exiting the parking lot during the
month (per the Daily Lane Activity report and adjusted for
AVI and manual exits); equals,
Projected number of vehicles remaining in the parking lot
on the last day of the month (i.e. Computed ending
inventory); less,
The number of vehicles actually in the parking lot on the
last day of the month, by the license plate inventory; equals
the total unaccounted (or excess) vehicles,
Divide the difference by the number of vehicle entrances
during the month (per PRCS Monthly Lane Activity
Report); equals the unaccounted vehicle percentage,
Page 38 of 63
c.
(vii)
Vehicle Maintenance Expense.
a.
(vii)
Maintenance tasks and costs by vehicle and in total per labor,
materials, etc. including a summary of all repair orders performed
on each Unit during the month.
Towing and Vehicle Sales Activity. Operating receipts from towing and
impoundment. This information shall include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
(c)
If the unaccounted vehicle percentage exceeds 0.5%, the
Contractor shall explain in writing, the reason(s) for the variance
and the corrective measures to be taken.
Total number of vehicles towed and/or impounded;
Total number of vehicles released by collection of fees by
customer or lien
Total number of vehicles released to MWAA Property
Total amount of storage and towing fees collected;
Current vehicle inventory.
Monthly Operational Report. The Contractor shall furnish to the Authority no later
than the twentieth (20th) day of each Calendar Month, a Monthly Operational Report for
the previous Contract Month. If the twentieth day of the month is a non-business day,
then the Monthly Operational Report shall be due on the next business day. The
statement shall be in the format specified by the Authority.
The Statement shall, at a minimum, include the following information:
(1)
Shuttle Bus Operations
a.
Ridership data including, but not limited to: Total daily customer counts
by route, including hourly, weekly, monthly and year-to-date activity
counts and Total number of customers carried with a breakdown of
customers per lot.
b.
Number of trips made each day by each bus.
c.
Bus miles driven on each route.
d.
Bus service hours operated (by day, route and aggregate).
e.
Data demonstrating headway compliance (by route and aggregate).
f.
Summaries of customer complaints, comments and responses.
g.
Vehicle mileage, fuel usage and maintenance cost summaries.
h.
Fleet Maintenance Reports including, but not limited to: To include at a
minimum:
(i)
Preventive Maintenance Report. This report should demonstrate
compliance with the Contractor’s vehicle maintenance plan and
should compare planned preventive maintenance versus actual
maintenance performed for each bus (including each type of
preventive maintenance required).
Page 39 of 63
(ii)
Pre-Trip and Post-Trip Inspection Report. This report should
demonstrate compliance with pre- and post-trip inspection
requirements as specified in the Contractor’s vehicle maintenance
plan.
(iii)
i.
j.
k.
(2)
(d)
Critical Defect Report. This report should include a listing of all
defects classified critical and their resolution.
Mechanical reports, breakdowns resulting in over a five (5) minute delay
in service (noting date, bus number, type of problem, length of delay,
follow-up inspection results.)
Accidents/incidents reports (include any major safety and security
incidents as well as any non-major safety and security incidents).
Other reports requested by the Airports Authority.
Public and Employee Parking
a.
Summary of Events and Activities (includes summary of significant
events and activities and overtime by department)
b.
Department Reports (parking operations, facilities, human resources,
training, valet and loss prevention)
(3)
Ticket Accountability Analysis Summary Report (system count) and Exception
Transactions Reports (includes unreadable tickets, lost tickets and disputes)
(4)
Vehicle Accountability and Analysis Reports
(5)
Summary of Customer Service Comments
(6)
Customer Service Reports:
a.
Incidents and Insurance Claims
b.
Customer Assistance Summary (by type i.e. lockouts, jumpstarts, car
location)
c.
Customer Service Comments
(7)
Towing Service Report (includes towing services provided by day, time, location,
depart and arrive time as well as documentation of all associated Accounts
Receivable notes)
(8)
Reports of Theft, Fraud, Fire and Significant Damage
(9)
Ground Maintenance Activities (includes documentation of the monthly
inspection of each lot and facility and maintenance activities completed by lot and
facility)
(10)
Safety Meeting Minutes
(11)
Refund Log (includes patron name, date issued reason for refund, current status,
etc.)
Annual Reporting
(1)
Payroll Tax Filings
(2)
Employee Benefit Package
Page 40 of 63
(3)
Audited Financial Statements. The Contractor shall produce annual audited
financial statements, certified by an independent Certified Public Accountant, for
the Contractor and all business entities associated with the operation of the
Contract. The Contractor shall provide a copy of each annual audited financial
statement to the Authority within one-hundred eighty (180) days of the end each
entity’s fiscal year. If annual audited financial statements for each entity are not
available, the Authority may permit the Contractor to submit other documents that
are satisfactory to the Authority.
(4)
Certification of Annual Statement of Operating Results. Within ninety (90)
days following the end of each Contract Year, and within ninety (90) days
following termination or expiration of the Contract, if such date does not coincide
with a Contract Year, the Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Authority an
Annual Statement of Operating Results to include the items below:
(5)
a.
The total Operating Receipts for parking, towing, storage fees, and any
other revenue receipts collected by the contractor by month and contract
year less revenue adjustments reconciling to net revenue. These shall be
shown as follows:
b.
Operating Receipts shall include parking insufficient funds notes less
payments received
c.
Reconcile source documents to operating receipts reported in Monthly
Certified Statement as referenced in Section 6.07(b)(4)(iv).
d.
Operating Receipts collected in total and per parking area, and,
e.
Operating Receipts collected from credit cards, cash, and personal checks
including a breakdown of sales by each type of credit card.
f.
A schedule of Reimbursable Expenses by month and Contract Year
reconciled to Operating Funds transfers, amounts due to the Authority or
Contractor and to Reimbursable Expenses reported in the Monthly
Certified Statement;
g.
A schedule of reimbursable expenses by department; parking, shuttle bus
and fleet maintenance.
h.
A comparison of the original and the revised (reallocated) budget with
actual expenses; and
i.
Losses from checks, the amount of canceled credit card sales ("chargebacks"), credit card accounts not paid and phasing activities
j.
A summary of credit card charges reconciled to charges reported in the
Monthly Certified Statement.
k.
A summary of exits by lot and type by month and year.
Annual Statement of Operating Results - underpayment and overpayment of
Reimbursable Expenses. If the Annual Statement of Operating Results
described in Section 6.06 above indicates that the Reimbursable Expenses for the
Contract Year have been underpaid then, subject to Authority acceptance and
Page 41 of 63
approval of such certification, the amount of such underpayment shall be refunded
by the Authority to the contractor. If the certification indicates that the
Reimbursable Expenses for the Contract Year have been overpaid, then subject to
Authority acceptance and approval of such certification the Contractor shall
promptly pay such amounts to the Authority.
(6)
Annual Statement of Operating Results - Under-Collection of Receipts. If the
certification described in Section 6.05 above indicates that any of the Operating
Receipts required to be collected by the Contractor hereunder have not been
collected, the Contractor shall immediately pay to the Authority a sum equal to
the difference between the amount of such Operating Receipts that should have
been collected and/or deposited with interest thereon as specified under Section
6.05 hereof.
(e)
Report Changes. As may be required from time to time during the Contract Term, the
Authority may direct, in writing, the Contractor to add, change or delete certain reports.
The Contractor shall comply with the written requests within a reasonable time period as
specified by the Authority.
(f)
Parking Costs Paid by the Authority. The financial records shall not include nor
should the Contractor report other parking-related costs paid directly by the Authority,
such as:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(g)
Maintenance of parking control system
Premises utilities
Major repairs of the parking Premises
Depreciation of Authority owned Operating Equipment and Premises
Wages for Authority employees who manage the parking contract
Management or Incentive Fees
Fuel Costs
Employee Parking
PARCS. If the PARCS in a particular parking lot prevents or inhibits the accurate
accumulation of the requested data for the Operating Reports listed in Section 6.07, the
Contractor shall take immediate action to inform the Authority of the PARCS deficiency.
The Contractor shall also institute manual revenue control procedures acceptable to the
Authority to accurately document public parking activity until the PARCS is restored or
improved to meet the requirements of this Contract.
Section 6.08 Management Fee
As compensation to the Contractor for its services during the Contract Term, the Authority shall
pay to the Contractor a Management Fee, as follows:
(a)
Management Fee Amount. The Authority shall pay to the Contractor the annual
Management Fee amounts listed below, prorated monthly in arrears and subject to
adjustment as described in Section 6.08(b) below. The fee shall be paid to the Contractor
Page 42 of 63
by or before the last calendar day of each month thereafter. The final Management Fee
payment due under the Contract shall be paid on or before the last day of the month after
the month in which this contract expires or is terminated.
Contract Term
Amount In Words
Figures
Amount In
Year One (1)
Year Two (2)
Year Three (3)
Option Period
Year One (1)
Year Two (2)
(b)
Deductions from the Management Fee. Notwithstanding Section 6.08(b) above, the
Authority shall have the right to deduct from the Management Fee any amounts due to
the Authority from the Contractor, including, but not limited to, Non-Allowed Expenses
and Liquidated Damages as described in Article 8, herein. Further, if the Authority pays
any sum or incurs any obligations or expense because of the failure, inability, neglect or
refusal of the Contractor to perform or fulfill any of the terms or conditions of this
Contract, then the Authority shall also have the right to deduct said expenses from the
Management Fee. The Authority shall provide the Contractor with written notice of the
deduction and the reasons therefore within five (5) business days after taking the
deduction. The Authority’s remedies for collection amounts due to the Authority by
Contractor are not limited to Management Fee deductions.
(c)
Adjustments to Management Fee. Except as provided in Section 4.01the Authority is
not obligated to adjust the Management Fee for any change, alteration of or addition to
the Contractor’s responsibilities under this Contract.
(d)
Expiration or Termination Other Than at End of Month. If the Contract Term shall
begin or end on a day other than the last day of a calendar month, the payment of the
Management Fee shall be prorated based upon the actual number of days the Contractor
provides services during the month.
Section 6.09 Semi-Annual Performance Reviews/Annual Performance Incentive Fee Award
The Contractor shall submit its written semi-annual performance evaluation report to the
Authority by January 31 (for the period of July 1 – December 31) and July 31 (for the period of
January 1 – June 30), describing its accomplishments in each of the areas outlined in Section
6.09(a) through (f) herein. The Authority shall evaluate the Contractor’s quarterly performance
within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Contractor’s report based upon the factors listed in
Section 6.09(a) through (f) and notify the Contractor in writing of the Contractor’s point score
for the quarter.
Page 43 of 63
The two (2) Performance Review point scores shall be averaged by the Authority immediately
after the second semi-annual performance review is completed by the Authority. This average
point score for the Contract Year shall determine the amount, if any, of an Incentive Fee award
to be paid to the Contractor. The Authority shall promptly notify the Contractor in writing of the
Incentive Fee award amount, if any. The Authority retains complete discretion with regard to the
performance evaluation and amount of the award, if any is made. The maximum amount of the
Incentive Fee for any Contract Year shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the management fee
for that Contract Year. The Incentive Fee, if any is due, shall be paid to the Contractor within
thirty (30) days following the written notice to the Contractor of the Incentive Fee award amount.
Annual performance review will be based upon the following:
(a)
Revenue Control. Revenue control and loss prevention procedures enforced to ensure
maximum control of and accountability for Operating Receipts, with minimal loses due
to theft, fraud, switched or lost tickets, check and credit card revenue loses, and
unauthorized patron exits from the Premises. Provide sufficient reporting of ticket and
vehicle accountability, exception transactions and cashier shortages; [up to 15 points]
(b)
Operating Budget. Significant results in controlling or reducing Reimbursable
Expenses while maintaining an exceptional level of service to the public. Executing
Operating Budget (or approved revision) while maintaining Reimbursable Expenses
equal to or less than stated in the Operating Budget and consistently providing detailed
explanations when budget variances occur; [up to 20 points]
(c)
Operations, Condition, and Appearance of the Premises and Operating Equipment.
Significant results in maintaining on a continuous basis the Premises and Operating
Equipment (including shuttle buses and service vehicles) at a high level of operation,
safety, condition, and appearance. Performance of all preventive maintenance,
inspections and repairs in accordance with the approved vehicle maintenance plan; [up
to 20 points]
(d)
Customer Service. Includes both internal and external customer service and training
initiatives. Measured by feedback received from Authority “Mystery Shopper” and via emails, letters and complaint forms from patrons on the contractor’s employee customer
service. Also measured by headway performance, service hour compliance, etc.; [up to
20 points]
(e)
Reporting. Significant results in submitting timely and accurate Operating Reports,
Office of Audit requests and other requests as needed by the Authority with a minimum
of errors, omissions or repeat occurrences of previously noted issues. Consistency in
following established reporting procedures (towing, phasing, etc.). [up to 15 points]
(f)
Airport Goals and General Management. Significant results in assisting the
Authority, by both on-site and corporate staff, to achieve Airport goals, including but not
limited to, performing special event parking, community initiatives, changes in
operations (i.e. shuttle routes due to construction, and assisting with employee parking;
[up to 10 points]
Page 44 of 63
The Incentive Fee shall be based upon the following schedule. The average total point score
shall be determined by averaging the point scores for the two (2) review periods of the Contract
Year, to determine the average total point score for that Contract Year.
Average Total
Point Score
Annual Incentive Fee Award
75 - 85 points
86 - 90 points
91 - 95 points
96 - 100 points
up to 42.5 percent of Annual Management Fee
up to 45 percent of Annual Management Fee
up to 47.5 percent of Annual Management Fee
up to 50 percent of Annual Management Fee
Note: No Incentive Fee Award shall be provided if the average total point score for the Contract
Year is 75 points or less.
ARTICLE 7. PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
(a)
Within fifteen (15) days after the execution of this Contract, the Contractor shall deliver
to the Authority a Performance Guarantee equal to one-hundred percent (100%) of the
sum of the Annual Management Fee and the maximum achievable Annual Incentive Fee
for the first contract year. This amount shall increase on an annual basis to reflect any
applicable increase to the Annual Management Fee and the Annual Incentive Fee. This
Performance Guarantee is required in order to guarantee the full performance of this
Contract by the Contractor. The Performance Guarantee shall be subject to forfeiture in
whole or in part in the event of default by the Contractor or failure of the Contractor to
fully perform the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that the Performance Guarantee
is maintained at all times in the proper amount throughout the Contract Term.
(b)
The Performance Guarantee, at the option of the Contractor, may be in the form of an
irrevocable letter of credit issued by a bank (with a rating of “B” or better by LACE
Financial Corporation), a certified check, cashier’s check, or money order acceptable to
the Authority and made payable to the Authority. The Performance Guarantee may also
be in the form of a Performance Bond issued by an insurance company that is acceptable
to the Authority.
(c)
The Contractor’s failure to maintain a Performance Guarantee shall be a default as
defined in Article 11 of the Contract.
(d)
The Contractor shall maintain the performance guarantee in effect for one (1) year after
the expiration or earlier termination of the Contract Term.
(e)
Any amounts expended by the Contractor to obtain such Performance Guarantee shall not
be a Reimbursable Expense.
Page 45 of 63
ARTICLE 8. INDEMNIFICATION AND INSURANCE
Section 8.01 Indemnification
(a)
The Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold the Authority and its agents, officers,
and employees completely harmless from and against any and all claims, suits, demands,
actions, liabilities, losses, damages, judgments, or fines of any nature whatsoever,
including all reasonable costs for investigation and defense thereof (including, but not
limited to, attorney fees, court costs, and expert fees), arising out of the Contractor’s
activities on the Airport under this Contract, or in its use or occupancy of the Premises
and Airport, except to the extent such injury, death, or damage is caused by the grossly
negligent act or omission or willful misconduct of the Authority. The Authority shall
give to the Contractor reasonable notice of, and opportunity to defend against, any such
claims or actions, and the Authority shall take reasonable actions to mitigate its damages.
(b)
The Contractor shall notify the Authority in writing within three (3) business days after
the Contractor’s receipt of notice of litigation against the Contractor, or any of its
subcontractors that may have a material effect on the performance of this Contract. A
copy of the complaint shall be included with the notification to the Authority. If a copy
of the complaint is not available, the Contractor shall provide as much information as
possible about the complaint, including, but not limited to, the identity of the plaintiffs
and defendants, allegations made by the plaintiffs, relief sought by the plaintiffs, and the
date the complaint was served on the Contractor or subcontractor.
(c)
If the Authority is deemed to be in noncompliance with laws or regulations governing
access to secure areas of the Airport and to the areas of the airfield and said
noncompliance is the result of or due to the omission of the Contractor or of any of the
Contractor’s employees, agents, or subcontractors, and the act or omission results in
action by the Transportation Security Administration against the Authority, the
Contractor agrees to reimburse the Authority for all expenses, including reasonable
attorney fees incurred by the Authority in investigating and defending against the action
and for any penalty, fine, or settlement amount paid by the Authority as a result of the
action. The Authority shall give the Contractor reasonable notice of any allegation or
investigation made or undertaken by the Transportation Security Administration that
relates to acts or omissions of the Contractor.
(d)
The Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold the Authority, and its agents, officers,
and employees, completely harmless from and against any claim, suit, demand, action,
liability, loss, damage, judgment, fine, or civil penalty and all reasonable costs and
expenses of whatever kind or nature (including, but not limited to, attorney fees, court
costs, and expert fees) associated therewith in any way arising from or based upon the
violation of any Federal, state, or municipal laws, statutes, resolutions, or regulations by
the Contractor, its agents, employees, or subcontractors in conjunction with the
Contractor’s use and/or occupancy of the Premises and the Airport. The Authority shall
give the Contractor reasonable notice of, and opportunity to defend against, any such
claims or actions, and the Authority shall take reasonable actions to mitigate its damages.
Page 46 of 63
(e)
The provisions of this Section 8.01 shall survive the expiration, termination, or early
cancellation of this Contract.
Section 8.02 Insurance
(a)
The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the Contract Period the following
insurance coverage from an insurance company or companies possessing a rating of AVII or higher from the A.M. Best Company, or an equivalent rating service.
(1)
Commercial General Liability Insurance shall be a limit of not less than Ten
Million Dollars ($10,000,000) per occurrence. Coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, Bodily Injury and Property Damage to Third Parties, Contractual
Liability, Garage Keepers, Products-Completed Operations, Personal Injury and
Advertising Injury Liability, Premises-Operations, Independent Contractors and
Subcontractors, and Fire Legal Liability. The Products-Completed Operations
coverage shall be provided for a minimum of one year following final acceptance
of the work. Such policy or policies shall be issued on an occurrence basis, and
shall cover the Premises, and all activities of the Contractor on the Premises and
on the Airport and all indemnifications made in the Contract.
(2)
Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance shall be a limit of not less than
Five Million Dollars ($5,000,000) for each accident. This shall include bus
operations, towing operations, and operations of other vehicles and equipment for
each accident arising out of usage of vehicles and equipment owned, operated,
leased, or hired, by the Contractor. Coverage shall include loading and unloading
of passengers and property. Coverage shall also include uninsured and
underinsured motorist clauses in accordance with Virginia statutory minimums.
(3)
Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability shall be at Virginia
Statutory Limits. Contractor shall satisfy all compulsory requirements relating to
workers compensation in any jurisdiction in which benefits may be claimed.
Employers Liability shall be a limit of not be less than $1,000,000 for bodily
injury by accident and $1,000,000 each employee for bodily injury by disease.
(4)
Property Insurance with “All Risk” coverage to include the full replacement
cost under an “All Risk” policy for the Contractor’s real or personal property used
or situated on Authority property and for the Operating Equipment owned by the
Authority and provided to the Contractor for the conduct of operations hereunder.
(5)
Fidelity Bond or Crime Insurance of One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) per
occurrence coverage for loss of, and loss from damage to, covered property such
as money and security. The bond or insurance policy shall include
comprehensive dishonesty, negligence, disappearance and destruction; money
orders and counterfeit currency; depositors’ forgery; computer fraud and all losses
of funds belonging to the Authority while in the custody and control of the
Contractor. The Authority shall be listed as the Loss Payee.
Page 47 of 63
(6)
Environmental Impairment Liability coverage at Three Million dollars
($3,000,000) limit per occurrence for bodily injury, property damage and
environmental cleanup costs caused by pollution conditions, both sudden and
non-sudden.
(7)
Other Insurance as the Authority may from time to time, in its reasonable
discretion, request the Contractor to provide, in such form, and with such limits,
terms and conditions, and from such companies as the Authority shall approve.
(b)
All of the policies required of the Contractor shall be primary and the Contractor agrees
that any insurance maintained by the Airports Authority shall be non-contributing with
respect to the Contractor’s insurance.
(c)
THE METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY SHALL BE
NAMED AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED on Commercial General Liability
(including completed operations) and Commercial Auto Liability.
(d)
All of the policies required of the Contractor shall contain a waiver of subrogation
provision to waive all rights of recovery under subrogation or otherwise against the
Airports Authority.
(e)
Contractor shall advise the Airports Authority of any cancellation, non-renewal, or
material change in any policy within five business days of notification of such action.
(f)
The cost of deductible for insurance claims, the administrative costs of administering
claims, and the legal and other costs incurred by the Contractor in connection with
insurance claims shall be borne by the Contractor from its own funds and shall not be a
Reimbursable Expense.
(g)
By requiring insurance herein, the Airports Authority does not represent that coverage
and limits will necessarily be adequate to protect Contractor, and such coverage and
limits shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability under the indemnities
granted to the Airports Authority in this Contract.
(h)
The Contractor may use commercial umbrella/excess liability insurance so that
Contractor has the flexibility to select the best combination of primary and excess limits
to meet the total insurance limits required by this Contract. Any umbrella or excess
liability coverage must be at least as broad as the primary coverage and contain all
coverage provisions that are required of the primary coverage.
(i)
If, in the Authority’s opinion, the minimum limits of the insurance herein required have
become inadequate during the period of the Contract, the Contractor agrees that it will
increase such minimum limits by reasonable amounts on request of the Authority
provided that said coverage is available at commercially reasonable rates.
(j)
The failure of the Airports Authority at any time to enforce the insurance provisions, to
demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with the insurance
Page 48 of 63
requirements, or to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not
constitute a waiver of those provisions nor in any respect reduce the obligations of the
Contractor to maintain such insurance or to defend and hold the Airports Authority
harmless with respect to any items of injury or damage covered by this Contract.
(k)
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that all Subcontractors independently carry
insurance appropriate to cover the Subcontractors’ exposures, or are covered under the
Contractor’s policies.
(l)
The Contractor and its joint venture partners shall deliver each certificate of
required coverage to the Authority for approval. Certificates shall be provided on the
most current industry Standard Form (ACORD 25 (2014/01) or other form acceptable to
the Authority and issued to:
Airport Administration Department, MA-130
Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority
Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport
Washington, DC 20001-4901
(m)
In the event that the Contractor shall at any time fail to provide the insurance required
under this Section 8.02, it shall be an event of default as defined in Section 8.02(a).(6) of
this Contract.
(n)
The Authority will lease to the Contractor certain vehicles and buses described elsewhere
in this Contract and under a separate lease agreement. The Contractor shall be
responsible for insuring the Authority provided equipment, vehicles, and buses for
liability and property damage. The Authority shall not be responsible for providing
liability or property coverage for the Authority provided equipment, vehicles, and buses
assigned to the Contractor hereunder. The Contractor is responsible for all physical
damage to Authority provided premises, equipment, vehicles, and buses.
ARTICLE 9. ENVIRONMENTAL PROVISIONS
Section 9.01 Environmental Definitions
(a)
"Corrective Action" means, with respect to hazardous materials, investigation, passive
remediation, active remediation, removal, cleanup, containment, sampling analysis or
monitoring, or any of them, as may be required by law.
(b)
“Hazardous Materials” means any wastes, substances, radiation, or materials (whether
solids, liquids or gases) (i) which are hazardous, toxic, infectious, explosive, or
radioactive; (ii) which are or become defined as a “pollutants,” “contaminants,”
“hazardous materials,” “hazardous wastes,” “hazardous substances,” “toxic substance,”
“radioactive materials,” “solid wastes,” or other similar designations in, or otherwise
subject to regulation under, any Laws; (iii) which contain polychlorinated biphenyls
(PCBs), asbestos, lead-based paints, urea-formaldehyde foam insulation, and petroleum
Page 49 of 63
or petroleum products (including, without limitation, gasoline or oil); or (iv) which pose a
hazard to human health, safety, natural resources, industrial hygiene, or the environment,
or an impediment to working conditions, under applicable law.
(c)
"The Contractor’s hazardous materials" means any hazardous materials arising out of the
Contractor’s past, present, or future use or occupancy of the Premises and operating
Equipment or the Contractor’s acts or omissions. "The Contractor’s hazardous materials"
includes, but is not limited to any hazardous materials generated, used, stored, released,
discharged, treated, disposed of, managed, or transported by the Contractor or transported
to the Premises under an agreement with the Contractor. As used herein, the Contractor
includes employees, agents, sub lessees, franchisees, contractors, subcontractors,
suppliers, or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor.
(d)
"Law" or "laws" include, but are not limited to, local, state, Federal, or regional statutes,
regulations, ordinances, rules, policies, directives, orders, demands, or other laws of
whatever nature, as they now exist or may hereinafter be adopted or amended including
but not limited to the Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and
Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. ''9604, et seq.
(e)
"Waters" includes but is not limited to groundwater, surface water, or storm water.
Section 9.02 Compliance with Laws and Use of Hazardous Materials
The Contractor shall comply with all laws relating to hazardous materials on the Premises or
related to the Contractor's activities at the Premises and on the Airport. The Contractor shall not
manage, use, or store hazardous materials at the Premises, or on the Airport, except as
reasonably necessary for the permitted use of the Premises and the Operating Equipment. The
Contractor shall not dispose of or treat any hazardous materials on the Premises or surrounding
lands or waters. The Contractor shall provide a written list of hazardous materials used or stored,
or intended to be used or stored, at the Premises (except for petroleum products held for the
Contractor’s use), and the approximate quantities to be used or stored, prior to entering into the
Contract. After the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall immediately notify the
Authority of the intent to bring onto the Premises any additional hazardous materials before
those materials are brought onsite.
Section 9.03 Disposal of Oils, Batteries, Solvents, and Hazardous Materials.
The Contractor shall develop and institute waste management plans for the disposal of oils,
batteries, solvents and such other hazardous materials. Such plans must be approved by the
Authority. The plans shall be included in the Manual.
(a)
The Contractor shall ensure that any solvent or other material provided as part of a
recycling or disposal service is not removed for recycling unless the recycling/disposal
agency provides a hazardous waste manifest or bill of lading, as appropriate, for the
material that is picked up. A landfill restriction notice/certification will accompany the
manifest of any material that is shipped offsite as a hazardous waste.
Page 50 of 63
(b)
Upon request, the Contractor shall provide the Authority with documentation on
hazardous materials or waste stored, handled, generated, or disposed of by the Contractor
in its use of the Premises. The Authority shall be copied on all correspondence with
regulatory agencies concerning Contractor compliance with environmental regulations.
(c)
The Contractor shall be a co-permittee in the Airport’s Virginia Pollution Elimination
Discharge System (VPEDS) permit. In this regard, the Contractor shall be responsible
for participating in the development and implementation of a storm water pollution
prevention plan and associated training programs.
(d)
In case of a spill of oil or hazardous materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for
immediately verbally notifying the Authority and completing a Spill Notification
Checklist and submitting it to the Authority within twenty-four (24) hours of the spill.
The Contractor is also responsible for notifying all pertinent regulatory agencies within
the time frame prescribed under the respective statutes and regulations. The Contractor
shall be responsible for cleanup of oil, grease, petroleum-based fluids, antifreeze, and
other hazardous materials from the Premises and shall be responsible for complying with
the Authority’s environmental and recycling requirements for these materials.
(e)
The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting and disposing of discarded batteries
found on the Premises. Batteries shall be disposed of as hazardous waste or recycled as
Universal Waste.
Section 9.04 Releases of Hazardous Materials
The Contractor shall promptly respond to and clean up any released or threatened release of any
hazardous material into the stormwater or sanitary sewer drainage systems, soils, groundwater,
waters or atmosphere, in accordance with applicable Federal, state and local statutes, ordinances,
and regulations, and as authorized or approved by all Federal, state, or local agencies having
authority to regulate the permitting, handling, and cleanup of hazardous Materials.
Section 9.05 The Contractor's Responsibility for Environmental Costs and Damages
The Contractor's hazardous materials shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall be solely liable for and responsible for, including without limitation, at the
Contractor's sole cost and expense:
(a)
Corrective Action of the Contractor’s hazardous materials as directed by any
governmental agency, as required by any law, or as determined by a court of law to be
necessary to prevent or eliminate any nuisance, trespass, waste or diminution in the value
of the Premises or as necessary to avoid any impairment of the Authority's ability to use
the Premises for Airport purposes upon expiration or termination of this Contract.
(b)
Damages for injury or death to persons, or injury to property, the Premises and
surrounding lands and waters arising out of the Contractor hazardous materials.
Page 51 of 63
(c)
Claims resulting there from.
(d)
Fines, costs, fees, assessments, taxes, penalties, demands, orders, directives, or any other
requirements imposed in any manner by any governmental agency asserting jurisdiction,
or under any law with respect to the Contractor’s hazardous materials.
(e)
Damages, costs, and expenditures for injury to natural resources resulting from the
Contractor’s hazardous materials, as required by applicable law.
(f)
Failure to comply with laws regarding the generation, use, storage, transportation,
treatment, management, or disposal of the Contractor’s hazardous materials.
(g)
Any other liability related to the Contractor’s hazardous materials. While the Authority
is not required to incur any costs, fees (including attorney, consultant and expert witness
fees), or expenses for environmental compliance, or Corrective Action relating to the
Contractor's hazardous materials, should the Authority incur any such costs, expenses, or
fees due to the Contractor non-performance of its obligations under this Contract, the
Contractor shall within thirty (30) days of demand reimburse the Authority for said costs,
expenses or fees.
Section 9.06 Contractor's Indemnification of the Authority
In addition to any other indemnities in this Contract, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify,
release, and hold harmless the Authority, its officers, agents and employees, successors and
assigns from any and all responsibilities, damages, claims, penalties, orders, decrees, fines,
liabilities, costs, expenditures, attorney's fees, litigation expenses, and court costs relating to the
Contractor liabilities and responsibilities referred to this Article 9. It is expressly agreed that the
foregoing indemnity (1) shall be subject to the Contractor being given notice of and a reasonable
opportunity to respond, to negotiate or defend any matter covered by indemnity; (2) shall not be
applicable to any loss, claim, damage, or liability arising out of any contractual obligations to
any third party which the Authority may assume; (3) shall not be applicable to any damages or
losses arising from loss of profits or business opportunity, or any other special or consequential
damages, nor shall it be applicable to any attorney’s fees or any fines or penalties levied upon the
Authority; (4) shall be applicable only to leaks, spills, or discharges which result in a level of
contamination exceeding the standards required by the applicable authorities as of the date of the
Contractor’s final date of occupancy of the Premises; and (5) shall inure only to the benefit of the
Authority, and not to any subsequent purchasers, assigns or successors of either, or to any person
or entity. In the event the indemnity set forth in Article 8 conflicts with the foregoing
indemnity, the foregoing indemnity shall govern the Contractor’s indemnification obligations for
matters arising under Article 9 of the Contract.
Section 9.07 Scope of Responsibilities
The promises, conditions, covenants, and indemnities by the Contractor in this provision shall
apply without limitation to the Contractor’s employees, agents, franchisees, subcontractors and
third-party suppliers of goods and services, and guarantors of the Contract. Further, with respect
to each of the promises, conditions, covenants, and indemnities in this section, the Contractor
Page 52 of 63
assumes responsibility to the Authority for the acts or omissions of the Contractor’s employees,
agents, franchisees, subcontractors and third-party suppliers of goods and services, shareholders,
or subsidiaries (whether or not such acts or omissions are negligent, intentional, willful, or
unlawful) in any way relating to the Contractor hazardous materials, or environmental
compliance with respect to the Contractor’s hazardous materials. Each of the promises and
indemnities in this provision apply to any discharges of hazardous materials at the Premises (or
emanating from the Premises) by the Contractor, and to any assessment, testing, investigation,
remediation and/or cleanup with respect to the Contractor hazardous materials, whether
occurring before or after the Contractor vacates the Premises. The promises and indemnities by
the Contractor are continuing and survive termination of the Contract.
Section 9.08 Underground Storage Tanks (USTs) and Aboveground Storage Tanks
In addition to the Contractor’s other responsibilities, if underground or aboveground storage
tanks storing hazardous materials are used by the Contractor, the Contractor shall monitor such
underground and aboveground storage tanks, obtain all required permits therefore, maintain
appropriate records therefore, implement reporting procedures therefore, properly close such
underground and aboveground storage tanks, pay all fees, taxes, and assessments applicable
thereto, comply with all financial responsibility requirements applicable thereto, and perform all
other requirements including but not limited to upgrade and other technical requirements under
local, state and Federal statutes, ordinances, and regulations relating to underground and
aboveground storage of hazardous materials and cleanup, as they now exist or may hereinafter be
adopted or amended. For purposes of compliance with these laws, the Contractor is deemed the
operator of all tanks, piping and related equipment used by the Contractor on the Premises. The
cost of these responsibilities shall be considered a Reimbursable Expense.
Section 9.09 Effect of Other Terms and Conditions of the Contract
Any greater obligations on the Contractor, or further protections provided to the Authority, under
this provision shall prevail over any terms or conditions in this Contract which are less stringent
upon the Contractor, create less protection for the Authority, or are contradictory or inconsistent
with this Section. The Contractor's obligations under this provision survive destruction of the
Premises, condemnation and force majeure and continue until its obligation to perform
Corrective Action ceases. In determining whether to consent to any transfer or assignment or
subcontracting, the Authority may consider the proposed transferee’s or assignee's or
subcontractor’s use of hazardous materials. The Contractor shall provide to the Authority any
additional information related to hazardous materials requested by the Authority.
Section 9.10 Air Quality
All USTs and ASTs used for gasoline storage shall comply with Stage I vapor recovery in
accordance with the requirements of Virginia's regulations for the control and abatement of air
pollution. All gasoline dispensing nozzles shall be equipped with Stage II vapor recovery
equipment which complies with the Virginia regulations.
Page 53 of 63
Section 9.11 Water Management Requirements.
The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
The Contractor shall designate a pollution prevention coordinator and participate in the
Authority's pollution prevention seminars during the Contract Term.
(b)
The Contractor shall implement good management practices including good
housekeeping practices such as vacuum cleaning any or all spots of oil, grease, and/or
gasoline/other fuels on the ground of the Premises that may contribute hazardous
materials to the storm water flows that run off from the Premises.
(c)
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all compliance monitoring and inspections
performed by the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality (VDEQ) -Water
Division. All compliance mandates, consent orders, and/or fines levied by the VDEQWater Division shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
ARTICLE 10. AIRPORT CONCESSIONS DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS
ENTERPRISE (ACDBE) PARTICIPATION
(a)
ACDBE Participation. The Contractor has proposed to meet the Airport Concessions
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (ACDBE) goal of twenty-five percent (25%)
participation through its joint venture with an Authority-certified ACDBE. The
Contractor has promised that the ACDBE participation in the contract shall be not less
than twenty-five percent (25%) during the operation period of the contract and that the
ACDBEs will receive not less than a twenty-five percent (25%) share of the Management
Fee commensurate with the ACDBEs’ contributions and responsibilities as specified in
the joint venture agreement and subcontracts. The type, quantity and nature of the
participation shall be as described in the Contractor's proposal attached as Exhibit H.
The Contractor shall ensure that every reasonable opportunity is offered to expand their
roles in the Contract in those operational areas deemed appropriate.
(1)
The ACDBE goal is applicable to this Contract at all times during the Contract
Term, including the Option Period, if the Option Period is exercised. In unusual
situations, consistent with the principles stated in the Authority’s Contracting
Manual, the Authority may permit the Contractor to replace an ACDBE with
another ACDBE. In the event of disapproval, the Contractor shall continue to
maintain the current ACDBE until the Authority approves a substitution. If the
substitution is approved, the Contractor shall replace the current ACDBE with
another ACDBE that has been reviewed, certified and approved by the
Authority’s Equal Opportunity Programs Office. The substitute ACDBE firm(s)
shall participate at least to the same extent as the previous ACDBE participant.
The Contractor shall monitor the certification status of any and all ACDBE firms
included in this Contract, and shall ensure that their status as certified ACDBEs
remains current.
Page 54 of 63
(2)
(b)
The Joint Venture Partners shall comply with the terms of the Joint Venture
Agreement.
Qualification as an ACDBE. To qualify as a ACDBE under 49 CFR Part 23 and 26 as
amended, a business concern must meet the applicable size standard and must be a small
business (as defined by the Small Business Administration), which is: a) at least fifty-one
percent (51%) owned and controlled by one or more socially and economically
disadvantaged individuals, or in the case of any publicly owned business, at least fiftyone percent (51%) of the stock is owned by one or more socially and economically
disadvantaged individuals; and (b) whose management and daily business operations are
controlled by one or more of the socially and economically disadvantaged individuals
who own it. "Socially and economically disadvantaged individuals" include:
(1)
Women;
(2)
Black Americans, which includes a person having origins in any of the Black
racial groups of Africa;
(3)
Hispanic Americans, which includes persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban,,
Dominican, Central, or South American, or other Spanish or Portuguese culture or
origin, regardless of race;
(4)
Native Americans, which includes persons who are American Indians, Eskimos,
Aleuts, and Native Hawaiians;
(5)
Asian-Pacific Americans, which includes persons whose origins are from Burma
(Myanmar), Thailand, Malaysia, Indonesia, Singapore, Brunei, Japan, China,
Taiwan, Korea, Vietnam, Laos, Cambodia (Kampuchea), the Philippines, Samoa,
Guam, the U.S. Trust Territories of the Pacific Islands (Republic of Palau),
Republic of the Marshall Islands, Federated States of Micronesia, or the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Macao, Hong Kong, Fiji,
Tonga, Kiribati, Tuvalu, or Nauru; and
(6)
Subcontinent Asian-Indian Americans, which includes persons whose origins are
from India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, Bhutan, the Maldives Islands, or
Nepal.
The Authority will generally presume that business owners who fall into one of these
groups are socially and economically disadvantaged. Their disadvantaged status will not
generally be investigated, unless a third-party challenge is made. Other individuals may
be found to be socially and economically disadvantaged on a case-by-case basis. For
example, a disabled Vietnam veteran, an Appalachian white male, or another person may
claim to be disadvantaged. If such individual requests that his or her firm be certified as
ACDBE, the Authority, as part of the certification process, will determine whether the
individual is socially and economically disadvantaged under the criteria in 49 CFR Part
23 and 26. These owners must demonstrate that their disadvantaged status arose from
individual circumstances, rather than by virtue of membership in a group.
Page 55 of 63
In order to be considered an ACDBE, a business concern must first be certified by the
Authority or by the Virginia Department of Minority Business Enterprise. ACDBE
certifications by other certifying agencies may be granted reciprocity in some cases.
(c)
(d)
ACDBE Compliance.
(1)
The Authority will conduct post-award compliance reviews to ensure that the
ACDBE participation is occurring in accordance with the proposal and any
agreements between the ACDBE and the Contractor approved by the Authority.
(2)
The Contractor shall provide true and accurate monthly reports of the ACDBE
participation under this Contract using the “Monthly Report Form- ACDBE
Concessions Program” as shown on Exhibit D-1. This report will include (as
attachments to the report) minutes from joint venture management meetings. This
report is to be submitted each month with the Contractor’s Monthly Certified
Statement.
(3)
Failure to provide ACDBE participation in accordance with this Contract may be
considered a material breach of the Contract and the Authority may utilize all
remedies authorized by the Contract, including, but not limited to, termination of
the Contract for default.
ACDBE Goods and Services Expenditure Report. The Airports Authority encourages
the Contractor to use minority and woman-owned firms when purchasing and
subcontracting for goods and services (i.e. goods and services referred to in Section
4.06). The Contractor shall submit a report of Goods and Services expenditures each
month with its Monthly Certified Statement as shown on Exhibit D-2.
ARTICLE 11 - DEFAULT AND TERMINATION
(a)
Default Events. Each of the following events shall constitute a Default:
1.
If an event of insolvency of the Contractor should occur, including, but not
limited to, an assignment for the benefit of creditors.
2.
The occurrence of any act which operates to deprive the Contractor of the powers
and privileges necessary for the proper conduct of this Contract.
3.
The abandonment of the Premises and facilities or discontinuance of operation of
the taxicab concession.
4.
If the Contractor's interest in this Contract is assigned by operation of law.
5.
Contractor’s failure to make good faith efforts to achieve the Contract’s 50
percent DBE goal during any Contract Year.
Page 56 of 63
6.
(b)
If the Contractor fails to perform, keep or observe any of the other terms,
covenants and obligations under the Contract.
Consequences of a Default.
1.
If a Default occurs, the Authority may give to the Contractor a notice of Default
and an opportunity to cure. If the Contractor has not cured, or made reasonable
progress to cure the Default within fifteen (15) days from the Contractor’s receipt
of the notice, the Authority may immediately terminate the Contract by written
notice to the Contractor. Upon termination, the Contractor shall immediately quit
the Premises and facilities and return them to the Authority’s control. If the
Authority elects to terminate this Contract, every obligation contained in this
Contract to be performed by the Authority shall cease.
2.
When this Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall immediately vacate the
Premises and facilities and the Authority or its agents or employees may
immediately or at any time thereafter, re-enter the Premises and facilities and
remove the Contractor, its agents, subcontractors, invitees, and property.
Re-entry and removal may be effected by summary dispossess proceedings, by
any suitable action or proceeding at law, by force, or otherwise. The Authority
shall be entitled to the benefits of all provisions of law respecting speedy recovery
of the Premises and facilities held over by the Contractor. Any other notice to
quit or re-enter the Premises and facilities is hereby expressly waived by the
Contractor. The Authority shall not be liable in any way in connection with any
action it takes pursuant to this Section. The Contractor's liability shall survive the
Authority's re-entry, the institution of summary proceedings, and the issuance of
any warrants with respect thereto.
3.
If this Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall remain liable (in addition to
accrued liabilities) to the extent legally permissible for the amounts that the
Contractor would have been required to pay to the Authority had the Contract not
been terminated. The Contractor shall also pay as damages the Authority’s
expenses for reentering or repossessing the Premises and facilities, for putting the
Premises and facilities in proper repair, and for altering the same for a
replacement contractor. In addition, the Contractor shall pay to the Authority
such sums as the court which has jurisdiction there over may adjudge as
reasonable attorney’s fees with respect to any successful lawsuit or action
instituted by the Authority to enforce the provisions of this Contract.
4.
The Authority may enter into a new contract with another contractor that will
occupy the Premises and facilities for all or any part of the unexpired portion of
the Contract Term or for any longer period. The Authority has the sole and
absolute discretion with respect to the selection of a new contractor and its use of
the Premises and facilities.
5.
If the Contractor is in Default under this Contract, the Authority may, after
providing written notice to the Contractor of the Default, cure the Default at any
Page 57 of 63
time through any action deemed appropriate by the Authority for the account and
at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall reimburse the Authority for
any amounts expended by the Authority in connection with the cure. Such cure
shall not constitute a waiver of the Authority's rights with respect to that or any
other Default, unless otherwise expressly stated in writing by the Authority.
6.
The Authority's rights and remedies set forth herein shall be in addition to any
other right or remedy now and hereafter provided by law. All rights and remedies
shall be cumulative and not exclusive of each other. No delay by the Authority in
exercising a right or remedy shall constitute a waiver or acquiescence to the
Default. No waiver of a Default shall be effective unless it is in writing. No
waiver of a Default shall extend or affect any other Default or impair any right or
remedy with respect thereto.
7.
The right to lien on the personal property of the Contractor is expressly granted to
the Authority in any case where the Contractor fails to pay amounts due to the
Authority under this Contract.
8.
The Authority shall not be liable for any damage, including, but not limited to,
loss of profit, and the Contractor shall not make a claim of any kind whatsoever
against the Authority, its agents or representatives, by reason of any action taken
pursuant to this Section.
9.
To the extent that the Authority’s right to terminate this Contract in accordance
with Section A.(2). of this Article 7 is temporarily or otherwise unenforceable
under 11 U.S. C. Section 101 et. seq. as amended from time to time (“Bankruptcy
Code”), or under any other statute, then Contractor as well as any trustee for the
estate of Contractor agree to: (1) perform promptly every obligation of Contractor
under this Contract (other than non-monetary obligations of the Contractor that
are not capable of being performed due to the filing of a bankruptcy case by the
Contractor under the Bankruptcy Code) until this Contract is either rejected,
assumed or deemed rejected under the Bankruptcy Code; (2) pay the post-petition
monthly payments of rent and other fees and expenses as and when such
payments become due under the Contract; (3) assume or reject this Contract
within the minimum period of time provided for so doing under the Bankruptcy
Code and in connection therewith, Contractor hereby waives any right to request
extensions of such time period unless Authority agrees in writing to permit an
extended time period; (4) provide the Authority at least thirty (30) days prior
written notice of any intended filing relating to its assumption of this Contract and
in such notice, provide detail regarding any proposed assignee of the Contract,
including financial information regarding such intended assignee; (5) upon the
assumption of the Contract, cure any pre-petition default of Contractor under the
Contract and provide Authority with adequate assurance regarding the ability of
Contractor to continue to comply with the Contract; (6) provide the Authority
adequate assurance of future performance under the Contract by the Contractor or
Contractor’s assignee. Nothing herein shall be deemed a consent by Authority
regarding Contractor’s ability to assign this Contract to any third party without
Page 58 of 63
Authority’s written consent. For purposes of this paragraph, “adequate assurance
of future performance” shall be determined by the Authority in its sole discretion,
provided however that Authority shall be reasonable in such determination. If
there exists any post-petition default under the Contract, Contractor agrees to
consent in writing to relief from the automatic stay under the Bankruptcy Code in
favor of the Authority to enable Authority to terminate the Contract as
expeditiously as possible.
ARTICLE 12. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
The occurrence of any one or more of the failures to perform under the provisions of this
Contract as listed below may result in the imposition of liquidated damages set out below
(Liquidated Damages). The Contractor agrees that imposition of these Liquidated Damages is
fair and reasonable for its failure to perform and further agrees that they do not constitute a
penalty. The Authority will provide thirty (30) days advanced written notice that it intends to
assess Liquidated Damages. Failure to impose Liquidated Damages for a particular violation
shall not bar the Authority from imposing Liquidated Damages for subsequent violations of the
same nature. The Authority will invoice the Contractor for Liquidated Damages. If the
Contractor fails to pay the invoice within thirty (30) days from the invoice date, the Authority
may withhold the amount due from moneys owed by the Authority to the Contractor. Liquidated
Damages are not Reimbursable Expenses. The Liquidated Damages remedy is in addition to all
other rights and remedies of the Authority.
(a)
Non-Staffing at Exit Booths. The Contractor shall maintain the staffing as specified by
the Manual. Should the Contractor fail to maintain adequate staffing or fail to obtain the
Authority’s permission not to staff a particular exit lane(s) booth, Liquidated Damages of
$250 may be assessed for each hour or fraction thereof that an exit booth is not operated
due to a lack of staffing.
(b)
Failure to Submit Accounting and Operating Reports in a Timely Manner. Should
the Contractor fail to submit any of the Accounting and Operating Report(s) required
under Section 6.07 when due (or meet required deadlines for follow-up) or fail to obtain
the Authority’s authorization to delay or omit an Operating Report(s), Liquidated
Damages of $250 per day, per Operating Report, may be assessed for each day the
Operating Report(s) is late.
(c)
Penalty for Late Deposits. Under Section 6.06 of this Contract, the Contractor shall
deposit Operating Receipts in the Authority’s account as defined in Section 6.06(b). If
the Contractor fails to deposit Operating Receipts in the Authority’s account in
accordance with this Contract, the Authority may require the Contractor to pay as
Liquidated Damages $1,000 per day.
(d)
Penalty for Failure to Provide Requested Records. The Contractor shall provide all
records and retrievals when requested. If such records are not received within fourteen
(14) calendar days, the Contractor shall pay the Authority as Liquidated Damages the
sum of one hundred dollars ($100) per day from the Contractor’s own funds for each item
requested but not provided. The Liquidated Damages shall be owed beginning on the
Page 59 of 63
fifteenth (15th) day following the date the request was made. If the Contractor fails to
pay the Liquidated Damages, the Authority may deduct the Liquidated Damages from
amounts to be paid to the Contractor by the Authority. The Authority may, in its sole
discretion, extend the deadline for production of requested records for good cause shown
by the Contractor.
Continued failure to provide requested records may result in the Authority making a
determination to issue a default letter as noted in Article 11 should the Contractor fail to
provide the accounts, books, records and related operational data as the Authority
determines are necessary in connection with its review or audit.
(e)
Receipts/Deposits Verification. Unexplained differences between what the Contractor
reports collected as Operating Receipts under the Operating Reports and the actual
received in the Authority’s account may result in Liquidated Damages of $200 for two
(2) or more unexplained differences.
(f)
Miscellaneous Damage Amounts. The Contractor's Management Fee may, at the option
of the Authority, may be reduced by the following amounts:
(2)
Returned Checks/Credit Cards. By the value of a returned check or canceled
credit card or $100, whichever is greater, per check/credit card, when the patron
presenting a returned check/credit has done so previously and the Contractor
should reasonably have been aware of the previous returned check.
(3)
The Contractor shall respond in writing to customer complaints. Liquidated
damages of $75 per occurrence may be assessed for each failure to respond in
writing to a customer complaint within five (5) business days. An additional $100
per 24 hours may be assessed thereafter until the Contractor responds in writing to
the customer complaint.
(4)
If the number of written, valid customer complaints (including social media)
exceeds three (3) in any one calendar month, excluding complaints originating
from the same incident and/or customer, then the Airports Authority may assess
$100 in Liquidated Damages for the fourth (4th) customer complaint in calendar
month and $250 for each additional complaint per calendar month.
(5)
Ticket Overcharges. By the amount overcharged a patron or $50, whichever is
greater, if the Contractor charges any patron a price more than the established
schedule of parking rates.
(6)
Unaccounted Tickets. By $20 for each ticket, in excess of 2% of total tickets
issued per month that the Contractor cannot account for by a transaction."
(7)
Shopping Service. By $100 for each recurring failure per month reported by the
Authority's shopping service contractor.
(8)
Towing and Impound Accountability. By $100 per towing/impound transaction
that is not properly accounted for as detailed in the Contractor's approved Manual.
(9)
Passenger wait times. If the Authority receives excessive reports of passengers
waiting longer than the approved schedules without a reasonable explanation,
Liquidated Damages of $250 per occurrence may be assessed.
Page 60 of 63
(10)
Inoperative Buses. The Authority may assess Liquidated Damages in the amount
of $500 per day that a shuttle bus remains inoperative from failure by the
contractor to perform routine or emergency maintenance or required, safetyrelated modifications and improvements; provided the Contracting Officer
directed, in writing, the Contractor to perform said maintenance, modifications or
improvements, the failure to perform is within the control of the Contractor, and
the assessment of Liquidated Damages begins only after the Contractor has been
afforded a reasonable period in which to perform said maintenance, modifications
or improvements.
(11)
Failure to Maintain Vehicles or Demonstrate Adequate Documentation. The
Authority may assess Liquidated Damages in the amount of $500 for each vehicle
in which the Authority has determined that the Contractor has failed to maintain
the vehicle (or adequately demonstrate proof of the maintenance) in accordance
with the requirements set forth herein.
ARTICLE 13. GENERAL PROVISIONS
(a)
Changes to the Scope of Operations: The Authority may, at any time by written notice
after contract award, make changes within the general scope of the Contract, including,
but not limited to, changes in: (1) Premises assigned; (2) the minimum and maximum
limits on the level of staffing; (3) the fees to be charged for access to the system; (4)
additional AVI accounts to manage; (5) the number of passengers assigned to each cab;
and (6) the hours of operation. The Contractor shall institute such changes without delay.
(b)
Incorporation of Standard Provisions: The Standard Provisions for Concession
Contracts, dated July 6, 2006, with the exception of Sections 3.03 and 8.04, attached
hereto as Exhibit F, are hereby incorporated into and made a part of this Contract. The
Contractor shall be obligated to meet all requirements described in the Standard
Provisions, PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that where an express provision of this Contract is
in conflict with any provision of the Standard provision, this Contract shall control.
(c)
Inconveniences During Construction: The Contractor recognizes that from time to time
during the Contract Term, it will be necessary for the Authority to initiate and carry
forward extensive programs of construction, reconstruction, expansion, relocation,
maintenance and repair in order that the Airport and its facilities may be suitable for the
volume and character of air traffic and flight activity which will require accommodation,
and that such construction, reconstruction, expansion, relocation, maintenance and repair
may inconvenience the Contractor in its operation at said Airport. The Contractor agrees
that no liability shall attach to the Authority, its officers, agents, employees, contractors,
subcontractors and representatives by way of such inconveniences and the Contractor
waives any right to claim damages or other consideration therefore.
(d)
All notices to be given to the Parties hereto shall be in writing unless otherwise stated and
shall be properly given when personally delivered to the specific address and left with a
responsible person, or delivered by overnight service such as Federal Express and, in
both instances, an appropriate receipt is obtained, or when sent by facsimile to the
Page 61 of 63
facsimile numbers listed below and an appropriate receipt is obtained, or when sent by
registered or certified mail addressed to the Parties at their respective addresses herein
below given. The Parties may change the information below upon ten (10) days written
notice given as herein specified. The date of notice shall be deemed, when notice is
mailed, to be the date of mailing so long as the Postal Service certified actual delivery. A
refusal of an overnight service or registered or certified mail notice shall constitute actual
delivery hereunder.
(1)
To the Authority for Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport:
Vice President and Airport Manager
Facsimile (703) 417-8002
(2)
To the Contractor:
Name
Company
Address
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have executed this Contract as of the
dates shown below.
WITNESS:
___________________________
By:
___________________________
Airport Administration Department
Date: ___________________________
Page 62 of 63
CONTRACTOR
A Joint Venture between ________________ and __________________
ATTEST:
Contractor
By:
___________________________
Title:
___________________________
Date:
___________________________
SECRETARY’S CERTIFICATE
I, _________________________, certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation
named as Contractor herein; that _________________________, who signed this Contract on
behalf of the Contractor was then _______________________ of said Corporation; that said
Contract was duly signed in accordance with its Schedule of Authorizations, which Schedule was
approved by its Board of Directors, and is within the scope of its corporate powers.
________________ (Corporate Seal)
Secretary’s Signature
Page 63 of 63
Exhibit A
PREMISES, FACILITIES AND OPERATING EQUIPMENT
(and related operational documents)
Exhibit A-1
PARKING LOTS MAPS
Parking and Shuttle Bus Concession
PUBLIC PARKING LOTS MAP
Public Parking and Shuttle Bus Concession
Exhibit A‐1
Exhibit A-2
FACILITY MAPS
National Airport
Contract MWAA-6-15-C001
Exhibit A-2
Bus Maintenance Facility
Exhibit A-3
OPERATING EQUIPMENT ASSIGNED FOR THE USE OF THE CONTRACTOR
Description
ADAPTER, DATALINK
BARCODE READER
BARCODE READER
BARCODE READER
BARCODE READER
BASE STATION, RADIO
CAMERA, DIGITAL
CAMERA, DIGITAL
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER
COMPUTER, LAPTOP
COMPUTER, LAPTOP
COMPUTER, LAPTOP
COMPUTER, LAPTOP
COMPUTER, LAPTOP
COMPUTER, SERVER
COMPUTER, SERVER
COMPUTER, SERVER
Serial Number
27081015961
MCC65L
1071100191
34221143338
30521143015
16C0200550
2426222855
4322004164
JLZ54V1
3FTMQN1
GCPVLL1
1WRMQN1
7F9STK1
JM164V1
JM174V1
1YNZXV1
1YB0YV1
2G9STK1
2BJ62G1
9CRM3D1
JM5D4V1
1YL2YV1
2JVWD1
JM794V1
GWWV6D1
BDTMQN1
CWWV6D1
JM7C4V1
1CPVLL1
3VZBZV1
2JPVLL1
7HWQGD1
BCRM3D1
JM764V1
7ZG0SD1
JLY64V1
HMNFFC1
JLX64V1
CLTMQN1
CD0ZXC1
JM0F4V1
JLV54V1
1LG8QD1
4JPVLL1
JM844V1
JLXD4V1
3VGBZV1
3VWGZV1
CWMCCZ1
52ETSA91338
DK7D2G1
JCTFF51
FQMQ8W1
J7JDVM1
GCH1TH1
5V3SGS1
H924QS1
Manufacturer
CUMMINS
SYMBOL
JANAM
INTERMEC
INTERMEC
VERTEX
CANON
CANON
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
PANASONIC
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
DELL
Model Number
3165033
LS2208
XP20W
CK71
CK71
VX‐2000
A620
A570
OPTIPLEX 790
OPTIPLEX 780
780
780
760
OPTIPLEX 790
OPTIPLEX 790
7010
7010
760
755
OPTIPLEX 745 MINI
OPTIPLEX 790
7010
OPTIPLEX 745 MINI
OPTIPLEX 790
OPTIPLEX 745 MINI
780
OPTIPLEX 745 MINI
OPTIPLEX 790
OPTIPLEX 780
7010
780
OPTIPLEX 745 MINI
OPTIPLEX 745 MINI
OPTIPLEX 790
OPTIPLEX 745 MINI
OPTIPLEX 790
OPTIPLEX 745 MINI
OPTIPLEX 790
780
OPTIPLEX 745 MINI
OPTIPLEX 790
OPTIPLEX 790
OPTIPLEX 745 MINI
OPTIPLEX 780
OPTIPLEX 790
OPTIPLEX 790
7010
7010
7010
TOUGHBOOK
D630
D600
E6430
E6410
R2200
R510
R410
Cost
$836
$269
$1,478
$1,900
$230
$296
$858
$996
$1,000
$996
$1,077
$858
$858
$825
$825
$1,077
$1,000
$1,000
$858
$825
$1,000
$858
$1,000
$996
$1,000
$858
$996
$826
$1,141
$1,000
$1,000
$858
$1,000
$858
$1,000
$858
$996
$1,000
$858
$858
$1,000
$1,000
$858
$858
$833
$833
$863
$0
$1,217
$2,571
$1,282
$1,338
$3,532
$6,415
$4,185
Date
In Service
8/27/2009
6/26/2008
2/28/2008
12/6/2013
12/6/2013
1/22/2007
7/27/2006
5/8/2008
6/15/2012
3/16/2011
12/8/2010
4/27/2011
11/10/2010
6/15/2012
6/15/2012
11/19/2012
11/19/2012
8/12/2010
11/10/2010
6/19/2007
6/15/2012
11/19/2012
10/15/2007
6/15/2012
7/19/2007
4/5/2011
7/19/2007
6/15/2012
6/24/2010
12/27/2012
11/10/2010
8/15/2007
6/19/2007
6/15/2012
10/2/2007
6/15/2012
1/30/2007
6/15/2012
4/5/2011
5/9/2007
6/15/2012
6/15/2012
6/20/2007
6/24/2010
6/15/2012
6/15/2012
12/12/2012
12/12/2012
12/13/2013
7/19/2012
12/9/2008
4/19/2004
12/12/2012
9/15/2010
5/22/2009
3/6/2012
3/6/2012
Exhibit A‐3
Employee Name
Dept
SBO
SBO
SBO
Parking
Parking
Parking
Matthew, Ms. Candice Parking
SBO
SBO
SBO
MCDAVID, Mr. JOHN
SBO
SBO
SBO
BOGGS, Mr. JOSEPH
SBO
DIJAMCO, Mr. RAMON SBO
SBO
HACKETT, Ms. MARCIA SBO
BOND, Mr. RANDY
SBO
Biery, Mr. Jeff
Parking
Biery, Mr. Jeff
Parking
Parking
Bryce, Ms. Nancy
Fesshaye, Ms. Yordanos Parking
Fesshaye, Ms. Yordanos Parking
Mohammad, Mr. Rafi
Parking
Mohammad, Mr. Rafi
Parking
Saeed, Mr. Mirza
Parking
Saeed, Mr. Mirza
Parking
Tewolde, Ms. Maaza
Parking
Tewolde, Ms. Maaza
Parking
Thoedkiert, Ms. Parking
Thoedkiert, Ms. Parking
Tsehaye, Mr. Henok
Parking
Williams, Mr. Leroy
Parking
Zhu, Ms. Shiyi
Parking
Zhu, Ms. Shiyi
Parking
Andrus, Ms. Juanita
Parking
Andrus, Ms. Juanita
Parking
Parking
Parking
Tisdale, Mr. Dwayne
Parking
Parking
Tisdale, Mr. Dwayne
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Tisdale, Mr. Dwayne
Parking
SBO
SBO
SBO
Tsehaye, Mr. Henok
Parking
Tisdale, Mr. Dwayne
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Description
Serial Number
COPIER
SLQ25551
COPIER
XKP554894
COPIER
SLH29604
FIREWALL
JMX1601X08R
LIFT, VEHICLE
TH53965
Mobile lifting system
810241
PLAYER, VCR
J8MA12285
POWER SUPPLY
JS1108006729
PRINTER
3JQSQ71
PRINTER
CNDY920967
PRINTER
VND3B63851
PRINTER
CNBGB31009
PRINTER
CNHC61J2QH
PRINTER
VNB3N10671
PRINTER
VNB3M43009
PRINTER
CNHC61J2QJ
PRINTER
VNB3M34505
PRINTER
VNB3N10685
PRINTER
CNHC61J2QP
PRINTER
VNB3M34504
PRINTER
CNDY875608
PRINTER
CNBCCD82R6
PRINTER
CNDY875611
PRINTER
CNDY876637
PRINTER
CNDY920965
PRINTER
CNDY876698
PRINTER
VNB3N10686
PRINTER, BARCODE
41A074801453
PRINTER, ID
A0280103
PRINTER, MULTIFUNCTIONCNF9CCJXKN
PRINTER, CNC9D4H53Z
PRINTER, CND8F4K8N1
PRINTER, CNB8D2PS1Q
PROJECTOR
PRVK2200430
RADIO, HANDHELD
5L040330
RADIO, HANDHELD
5K030183
RADIO, HANDHELD
5K030182
RADIO, HANDHELD
5L040333
RADIO, HANDHELD
5L040327
RADIO, HANDHELD
5L040328
RADIO, HANDHELD
5N050189
RADIO, HANDHELD
5N050194
RADIO, HANDHELD
5L040329
RADIO, HANDHELD
5N050274
RADIO, HANDHELD
5K030184
RADIO, HANDHELD
5K030188
RADIO, HANDHELD
5K030187
RADIO, HANDHELD
5L040323
RADIO, HANDHELD
5L040322
RADIO, HANDHELD
5L040326
RADIO, HANDHELD
5N050196
RADIO, HANDHELD
5N050195
RADIO, HANDHELD
5N05097
RADIO, MOBILE
6K050141
RADIO, MOBILE
6K050145
RADIO, MOBILE
6K050146
SCANNER
CN7B2TR10R
Manufacturer
Model Number
CANON
5570
XEROX
X7545
CANON
2270
CISCO
ASA‐5510
KONI
ST1072
MAHA
MCL 18‐4
PANASONIC
PA/PV‐8450
APC
SMX2000RMLV2U
DELL
M5200N
HEWLETT PACKARDP4015N
HEWLETT PACKARDP1505
HEWLETT PACKARDCP1025NW
HEWLETT 1320
HEWLETT P1606DN
HEWLETT P1606DN
HEWLETT 1320
HEWLETT P1606DN
HEWLETT P1606DN
HEWLETT 1320
HEWLETT P1606DN
HEWLETT 4015TN
HEWLETT M601DN
HEWLETT 4015TN
HEWLETT P4015TN
HEWLETT P4015N
HEWLETT 4015TN
HEWLETT P1606DN
ZEBRA
TLP2844
FARGO
4250
HEWLETT PACKARDCM2320NF
HEWLETT M175NW
HEWLETT M475DN
HEWLETT M475DN
EPSON
EX7210
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX‐824‐G75
VERTEX
VX‐824‐G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX824G75
VERTEX
VX‐824‐G75
VERTEX
VX‐824‐G75
VERTEX
VX‐824‐G75
VERTEX
VX‐2100U
VERTEX
VX‐2100U
VERTEX
VX‐2100U
HEWLETT 5590
Cost
$13,747
$9,555
$6,466
$2,745
$29,156
$28,683
$167
$1,123
$499
$1,328
$183
$199
$275
$188
$188
$275
$188
$188
$275
$188
$1,328
$834
$1,328
$1,328
$1,328
$1,328
$188
$699
$600
$783
$328
$648
$838
$650
$526
$577
$577
$526
$526
$526
$465
$465
$526
$526
$577
$577
$577
$526
$526
$526
$465
$465
$465
$395
$395
$395
$247
Date
In Service Employee Name
9/5/2006
12/19/2012
9/6/2006
5/11/2012
4/1/1998
1/14/2014
11/19/1998
3/6/2012
10/10/2006
12/9/2010
11/10/2010 BOND, Mr. RANDY
10/28/2011 HACKETT, Ms. MARCIA
5/2/2006 Biery, Mr. Jeff
7/12/2012 Biery, Mr. Jeff
7/17/2012 Bryce, Ms. Nancy
5/2/2006 Fesshaye, Ms. Yordanos
7/12/2012 Mohammad, Mr. Rafi
7/12/2012 Saeed, Mr. Mirza
5/2/2006 Tsehaye, Mr. Henok
12/7/2010 Zhu, Ms. Shiyi
6/18/2012
12/7/2010 Andrus, Ms. Juanita
5/31/2011 Andrus, Ms. Juanita
12/9/2010 Minni, Mr. Ahmed
12/7/2010
7/12/2012 Tisdale, Mr. Dwayne
6/26/2008
2/10/2004
1/30/2012
7/17/2012 Mohammad, Mr. Rafi
6/7/2013
7/17/2012 Tisdale, Mr. Dwayne
5/10/2012
7/18/2006
1/4/2006
1/4/2006
7/18/2006
7/18/2006
7/18/2006
1/22/2007
1/22/2007
7/18/2006
1/4/2006
1/4/2006
1/4/2006
7/18/2006
7/18/2006
8/8/2006
1/22/2007
1/22/2007
1/22/2007
1/22/2007
1/22/2007
1/22/2007
6/4/2010 Thoedkiert, Ms. Exhibit A‐3
Dept
SBO
Parking
Parking
Parking
SBO
SBO
Parking
Parking
SBO
SBO
SBO
SBO
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
SBO
Parking
SBO
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
SBO
SBO
SBO
SBO
SBO
SBO
SBO
SBO
SBO
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
SBO
Parking
Parking
Parking
Description
SNOWPLOW
SNOWPLOW
SOFTWARE
SWEEPER, RIDING
SWEEPER, RIDING
SWITCH, KVM
SWITCH, NETWORK
SWITCH, NETWORK
SYS., BULK OIL/FLUID
WASHER, PRESSURE
WASHER, PRESSURE
Serial Number
1.21002E+16
1.21002E+16
PLVPQS
8004198
8001578
223M6S1
SPE154400J5
SPE154400HQ
622315001
0212 2953
0212 2956
Manufacturer
WESTERN
WESTERN
TRANSMAN
TENNANT
TENNANT
DELL
CISCO
CISCO
SCOTT AUTO EQUI
NORTH STAR
NORTH STAR
Model Number
8'
8'
PRO BASE
800
800G
1082DS
WS‐C4506‐E‐V03
WS‐C4506‐E‐V03
240 GAL.
157595
157595
Cost
$6,687
$6,687
$5,608
$38,336
$38,793
$1,916
$3,050
$35,693
$14,600
$6,700
$6,700
Date
In Service Employee Name
1/3/2013
1/3/2013
2/22/1999
9/23/1998
10/25/1995
3/6/2012
1/4/2012
2/22/2012
4/7/2003
3/27/2012
3/27/2012
Exhibit A‐3
Dept
Parking
Parking
SBO
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
Parking
SBO
Parking
Parking
Exhibit A-4
SHUTTLE BUSES LEASED TO THE CONTRACTOR
SHUTTLE BUSES ASSIGNED TO CONTRACTOR
Exhibit A‐4
Description
Serial Number
BUS, SHUTTLE B6X2022235
Manufacturer
Van Hool
Model Number
A508
Cost
$218,500.00
Date Mileage@ In Service 12/31/14 Vehicle #
6/28/1999 556,260 31
Dept
SBO
BUS, SHUTTLE B112022245
Van Hool
A508
$227,200.00
2/16/2001 530,449 SBO
38
Van Hool
A508
$227,200.00
2/16/2001 561,716 39
SBO
Van Hool
A508
$227,200.00
2/16/2001 553,094 41
SBO
Van Hool
A508
$227,200.00
8/1/2002 540,300 42
SBO
BUS, SHUTTLE G47C084282
ELDORADO NAT'L
AXESS 40
$371,903.00
7/27/2007 204,204 101
SBO
ELDORADO NAT'L
AXESS 40
$371,903.00
7/27/2007 230,921 102
SBO
ELDORADO NAT'L
AXESS 40
$371,903.00
7/27/2007 220,127 103
SBO
BUS, SHUTTLE GX7C084285
ELDORADO NAT'L
AXESS 40
$371,903.00
7/25/2007 269,054 104
SBO
ELDORADO NAT'L
AXESS 40
$371,903.00
7/25/2007 244,763 105
SBO
ELDORAGO NAT'L
AXESS 40
$371,903.00
7/25/2007 239,804 106
SBO
BUS, SHUTTLE 5FYD8FV13CB040712
New Flyer
XD40
$433,356.54
9/30/2012 92,670 201
SBO
New Flyer
XD40
$433,356.54
9/30/2012 81,686 202
SBO
New Flyer
XD40
$433,356.54
9/30/2012 83,241 203
SBO
New Flyer
XD40
$433,356.54
9/30/2012 93,438 204
SBO
New Flyer
XD40
$433,356.54
9/30/2012 88,264 205
SBO
New Flyer
XD40
$433,356.54
9/30/2012 88,429 206
SBO
New Flyer
XD40
$433,356.54
9/30/2012 88,852 207
SBO
BUS, SHUTTLE 5FYD8FV14DB043426
New Flyer
XD40 XCELSIOR
$443,711.68
2/24/2014 32,390 208
SBO
New Flyer
XD40 XCELSIOR
$443,711.72
2/24/2014 44,490 209
SBO
New Flyer
XD40 XCELSIOR
$443,711.68
2/24/2014 43,824 210
SBO
BUS, SHUTTLE 5FYD8FV1XDB043429
New Flyer
XD40 XCELSIOR
$443,711.68
2/25/2014 43,149 211
SBO
BUS, SHUTTLE 5FYD8FV12EC045851
New Flyer
XD40 XCELSIOR
$453,831.00
12/1/2014 1,478 212
SBO
BUS, SHUTTLE 5FTD8FV14EC045852
New Flyer
XD40 XCELSIOR
$453,831.00
12/1/2014 1,514 213
SBO
New Flyer
XD40 XCELSIOR
$453,831.00
12/1/2014 1,551 214
SBO
New Flyer
XD40 XCELSIOR
$453,831.00
12/1/2014 1,478 215
SBO
Exhibit A-5
SERVICE VEHICLES ASSIGNED FOR THE USE OF THE CONTRACTOR
SERVICE VEHICLES ASSIGNED TO CONTRACTOR
Description
LOADER, MULTI‐PURPOSE
LOADER, MULTI‐PURPOSE
TRUCK, PICKUP
TRUCK, PICKUP
TRUCK, PICKUP
TRUCK, PICKUP
TRUCK, PICKUP
TRUCK, TOW
TRUCK, TOW
VEHICLE, SPORTS UTILITY
VEHICLE, VAN
VEHICLE, VAN
VEHICLE, VAN
Serial Number
A3NV14975
A3NV15301
6268192429
1FT8X3BT9CEC32465
1FT7X2BTXCEA45418
1FT7W2BT0DEA26641
1FT7W2BT9DEA26640
1FDUF4GT8CEA99094
1FDUF4TXCEA99095
IFMHK8B80BGA84325
4865917185
1FMNEBL0CDA78520
R47B103826
Manufacturer
BOBCAT
BOBCAT
CHEVROLET
FORD
FORD
FORD
FORD
FORD
FORD
FORD
DODGE
FORD
CHRYSLER
Model Number
S650
S650
CS15403
F350
F‐250
F250
F250
F450
F450
EXPLORER
3500
E150
CARAVAN
Date
In Service Vehicle #
12/22/2011
BC1
12/22/2011
BC2
11/28/2005
CS11
8/15/2012
GM5
11/23/2011
PO2
1/18/2013
PO3
1/18/2013
PO4
3/15/2012
TT1
3/15/2012
TT2
10/13/2011
PO1
4/23/2009
V‐2
4/30/2012
7/13/2010
VP1
Exhibit A‐5
Mileage@ 12/31/14 Dept
600 Parking
600 Parking
139,982 SBO
7,633 SBO
19,353 Parking
27,646 Parking
8,682 Parking
8,367 Parking
8,405 Parking
6,513 Parking
116,062 SBO
82,364 SBO
83,717 Parking
Exhibit A-6
SHUTTLE BUS ROUTES
SHUTTLE BUS ROUTES
Exhibit A‐6
Economy Route
Buses travel through Economy Parking to the General Aviation Terminal, along Thomas Avenue to the road in from of Terminal A via Abingdon Drive, to the three (3) drop‐off locations in front of Terminals B and C on the upper‐level (departures) roadway. From there, buses travel the fly‐over bridge above the Metro to the West Entrance Road, stopping at the shelter near the East‐West building, then returning to Terminal A, where passengers will board for Economy Parking. Busses will then travel down the "Commercial Vehicle Only" ramp to the lower‐level (arrivals) roadway for Terminals B and C. Then they will travel up the ram at the north end of Terminal C to the fly over bridge above the Metro to the West Entrance Road. Buses will pass between the East‐
West Buildings and the Shops Buildings to the Route 233 traffic light. Then continue south along Thomas Avenue and into Economy Parking to complete the route.
The Economy Route starts and ends at Shelter #15
4.5 miles or 19 minutes without dwell time
Rental Car/Garage Route
From Parking Garages A, B and C, buses travel via the West Entrance Road to Terminal A. From Terminal A, buses travel to the three (3) drop‐off locations in front of Terminals B and C on the upper‐level (departures) roadway. From there, buses travel across the fly‐over bridge above Metro to the West Entrace Road, stopping at Shelter #25 near the East‐West Building, and then returning to Terminal A, where passengers will board for Garage parking, rental cars and Metro. Buses will continue down the "Commercial Vehicles Only" ramp to the lower‐level (arrivals) roadway for Terminals B and C. Buses will then travel up the ram at the north end of Terminal C to the fly‐over bridge above Metro to the West Entrance Road. Buses will pass the East‐West Building bus shelter #25 (but do not stop) and then to Parking Garage A, and then B and C, picking up patrons going to the terminals, and finally returning to Terminal A to complete the route.
3.8 miles of 13 minutes without dwell time.
Employee Route
Buses travel from Shelter #33 in the Crew Lot, through Employee Lot U to the General Aviation Terminal along Thomas Avenue to Hangers 7 and 3, and Terminal A via the lower‐level roadway. Buses travel from Terminal A down the "Commerical Vehicle Only" ramp to the lower‐level (arrivals) roadway for Terminals B and C. Buses stop at Doorways #1, #6, #12 and 1 Aviation Circle, and then proceed to the West Entrance Road. Buses pass between the East‐West buildings and the shops building, making one stop before the Route 233 traffic light. Buses will proceed across Route 233 to Abingdon Drive, stop at the Thomas Avenue traffic light, then continue south along Thomas Avenue, stopping at Hanger 7, then to the General Aviation Terminal and into Employee Lot U and the Crew Lot to complete the route.
4 miles or 14 minutes without dwell time.
Exhibit A-7
SHUTTLE BUS LEASE
SUPPLEMENTAL LEASE AGREEMENT
NO. LD-XX-XX
TO
CONTRACT NO. MWAA-6-15-C001
This Supplemental Lease Agreement (hereinafter referred to as "Lease") is made as of the
_____ day of ____________________, 2015 by and between the Metropolitan Washington
Airports Authority (hereinafter referred to as "Lessor"), located at 1 Aviation Circle,
Washington, D.C. 20001 and CONTRACTOR, located at ADDRESS, (hereinafter referred to
as Lessee);
WITNESSETH:
WHEREAS, the Lessor operates Ronald Reagan Washington National (Reagan
Airport) and Washington Dulles International Airport (Dulles Airport) and the Dulles
International Airport Access Highway (DIAAH);
WHEREAS, Lessee has entered into Contract No. 6-15-C001 (Contract), with the
Lessor to provide for the operation and management of the public and employee parking and
shuttle bus services at Dulles Airport;
WHEREAS, the provisions of that Contract require that Lessee use a fleet of Lessorowned buses, support vehicles, and equipment to provide the service required by the
Contract; and
WHEREAS, the Lessor and the Lessee desire to enter into a lease arrangement
regarding the use of Lessor-owned buses, support vehicles, and equipment.
NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and obligations
contained herein, and other good and valuable consideration, the Lessor and the Lessee
hereby mutually covenant and agree as follows:
ARTICLE I
RECITALS
The premises set forth above are hereby incorporated and made a part of this Lease.
ARTICLE II
LEASE
The Lessor hereby permits Lessee to operate and maintain NUMBER (X) low floor
diesel buses, support vehicles, and equipment (hereinafter referred to collectively as the
“Vehicles”) as identified in Exhibit A of this Lease in furtherance of the services required to
be performed by the Contractor under the Contract.
Supplemental Lease Agreement
No. LD 15 XX
Page 1 of 17
ARTICLE III
OWNERSHIP
It is expressly understood that the Lessee acquires no ownership, title, property rights
or interests in the Vehicles, other than the right to use the Vehicles, as described in this
Lease. Lessee shall not remove or otherwise alter any logos, or information placed on the
Vehicles by the Lessor without the prior written approval of the Lessor or unless otherwise
expressly provided herein. Lessee shall make no alterations of any kind to any of the
Vehicles without the express written prior approval of the Lessor. Alterations shall be
defined as the installation or replacement of any major components of the Vehicles that are
not "in kind" components.
ARTICLE IV
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES
At the commencement date of this Lease, the Lessee shall receive the Vehicles in “as
is” condition. Some of the Vehicles may be provided with the remaining original
manufacturer’s warranty. The terms and conditions of the manufacturer’s warranty are
provided in Exhibit B of this Lease. The Lessor has made no other representation or
warranty of any kind, nature or description, express or implied, with respect to the Vehicles.
Lessee accepts the Vehicles from the Lessor "AS IS/WHERE IS." In no event shall any
defect in, or unfitness of the Vehicles, relieve the Lessee of any obligations of this Lease or
the Contract.
ARTICLE V
TERM
The Term of this Lease shall coincide with the term of the Contract upon acceptance
of all or any portion of the Vehicles by the Lessee. An acceptance sheet is attached hereto as
Exhibit C, to be signed by the Lessee.
The Term of this Lease shall coincide directly with the Term of the Contract and shall
automatically be extended commensurate with any Option Period(s) granted under the
Contract. At no time shall the Term of this Lease exceed the expiration date of the Contract.
In the event that the Contract is terminated, this Lease shall also terminate on the termination
date of the Contract. This Lease may also be terminated for any reason by the Lessor upon
ninety (90) days advance written notice to the Lessee.
ARTICLE VI
PERMITTED USE
A.
The Lessee shall utilize the Vehicles solely in connection with the services to be
provided by Lessee under the Contract.
B.
Lessee agrees to use the Vehicles in a careful and proper manner and in compliance
with all applicable federal, State, and local laws and Airports Authority Regulations
No. LD 15 XX
Page 2 of 17
relating to the possession, operation, use, or maintenance of the Vehicles. Lessee
shall obtain all necessary insurance, licenses, and permits for the use of the Vehicles
and shall permit the Vehicles to be operated only by properly trained employees with
a good driving history (a point value of negative three (-3) or greater with no
convictions of reckless driving or similar infractions within five (5) years.
C.
The Lessee shall not place or cause to be placed any advertising on the Vehicles
without the Lessor’s prior written approval or unless otherwise directed to do so by
the Lessor.
ARTICLE VII
ASSIGNMENT; SUBLEASE
The Lessee shall not assign, transfer or encumber this Lease or enter into any
sublease, management contract or other agreement relating to the Vehicles, or any portion
thereof, except on such terms and conditions approved in writing in advance by the Lessor
and only under the terms and conditions for operation and maintenance of the Vehicles as set
forth herein.
ARTICLE VIII
LEASE FEE
A.
Amount. The Lessee shall pay the Lessor a Lease Fee of One Dollar ($1.00) per
Vehicle, every twelve (12) months (or portion thereof if less than 12 months), for the
Term of this Lease.
B.
Payment. The Lease Fee of One Dollar ($1.00) per Vehicle, per year shall be paid on
or before the first day of each Contract Year as defined in the Contract.
ARTICLE IX
MONTHLY REPORTS
The Lessee shall comply with the reporting requirements set forth in Article 6,
Section 6.07 of the Contract.
ARTICLE X
LESSEE OWNED EQUIPMENT
With the express prior written approval of the Lessor, not to be unreasonably
withheld, the Lessee shall have the right to install and, upon termination of this Lease,
remove all of Lessee's owned equipment.
No. LD 15 XX
Page 3 of 17
ARTICLE XI
FUELING
The Lessor shall provide fuel and fuel dispensing facilities for the Contractor's use in
fueling the Vehicles as provided in Article 4, Section 4.04 of the Contract.
ARTICLE XII
VEHICLES AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
The Lessee shall ensure that all Vehicles are maintained and operated with a clean
appearance and proper mechanical operating condition throughout the term of the Lease, and
repair and replace all parts and equipment, as necessary. Lessee shall comply with all of the
maintenance requirements set forth Article 4, Section 4.05 of the Contract and the following
maintenance requirements for all Vehicles and associated equipment:
A.
Perform all manufacturers' recommended preventive maintenance as identified in
Exhibit D of this Lease. A record of each preventive maintenance activity performed
on each Vehicle shall be prepared in a timely manner and made available to the
Lessor during regular business hours upon request. The Lessor's review may be made
without advance notice.
B.
Inspect each Vehicle daily for mechanical, safety and appearance items. A checklist,
the format of which shall be subject to the advance written approval of the Lessor, will be
prepared for each Vehicle for each inspection. These records shall be kept in an
organized manner and made available to the Lessor during regular business hours
upon request. The Lessor’s review may be made without advance notice.
C.
Perform a quarterly safety inspection of all Vehicles and associated equipment by a
qualified service mechanic. A record of these inspections shall be maintained by the
Lessee and made available for the Lessor's inspection during normal business hours
upon request without advance notice.
D.
Make repairs and replace parts, equipment, etc., needed due to normal wear and tear.
The Lessor shall have the right to inspect Vehicles and associated equipment and order
repairs.
E.
Make repairs and replace parts, equipment, etc., needed due to accidents or abuse by the
Lessee within thirty (30) days from the date of the accident or damage. The Lessee shall
be solely responsible for all associated expenses of repairing any damage to the Vehicles.
These expenses are Non-Allowed Expenses for Reimbursable Expenses as defined in the
Contract.
F.
Use only Lessor-approved outside vendors to perform work on Vehicles and associated
equipment in which the Lessee is unable to perform. The Lessee shall provide a
list of recommended vendors at the start of the Lease for the Lessor's approval.
No. LD 15 XX
Page 4 of 17
The Lessee may also recommend other vendors for approval during the term of the
Lease.
G.
The Lessor shall not perform any maintenance on the Vehicles on the Lessee’s behalf
during the Term of the Lease.
ARTICLE XIII
MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES
The manufacturer’s warranties for the Vehicles are attached hereto as Exhibit B. The
Lessee shall not infringe or impair the warranty on the Vehicles, and shall make the Vehicles
available to the Lessor and the sales or service representatives of the manufacturer upon
request for warranty service or warranty inspection. The Lessee shall ensure that all
maintenance required under the manufacturer’s warranty is performed thoroughly within the
warranty’s required intervals. After consultation with the Lessor, the Lessee shall submit (in
a timely manner) all warranty claims directly to the manufacturer for processing. The Lessee
shall send the Lessor a copy and inform the Lessor of the status of each warranty claim
made. All credits, proceeds, parts, or adjustments obtained by the Lessee to the extent of the
warranty claim shall accrue to the Lessor.
ARTICLE XIV
REGISTRATION, LICENSING, AND INSPECTIONS FEES
The Lessee shall be reimbursed by the Lessor for any and all permit, inspection and
registration fees, titles, and tags as may be required by any local, State, or federal
government for the assignment and operation of the Vehicles. The Vehicles shall be titled in
the name of the Lessor. The Vehicles shall be registered in the name of the Lessee so that
Lessee can obtain plates and renew the Vehicle registration. The Vehicles shall not be
tagged as Virginia Local Government vehicles. The Lessor permits the Virginia
Department of Motor Vehicles to also include the Lessee’s name and address in the
registration address field on the title record so that Lessee has the ability to handle all
vehicle registration transactions for the leased vehicles.
ARTICLE XV
INSPECTIONS
The Lessor shall arrange for an inspection of the Vehicles prior to the Vehicles being
turned over to the Lessee, for the purpose of determining that the Vehicles are fully
operational, and in excellent mechanical and physical condition, to the Lessor’s and Lessee’s
reasonable satisfaction. The Lessee shall make available each Vehicle to the Lessor for
periodic inspection, upon the Lessor’s request. The Lessor reserves the right to inspect the
Vehicles from time to time. Within sixty (60) days prior to the termination of the Lease, the
Lessor may arrange for an inspection of the Vehicles.
No. LD 15 XX
Page 5 of 17
ARTICLE XVII
INDEMNIFICATION AND INSURANCE
A.
Indemnification. Lessee shall defend, indemnify, and hold the Lessor and its agents,
officers, directors, and employees harmless from and against any and all claims, suits,
demands, actions, liabilities, loses, damages, judgments, fines, or expenses, including
all costs for investigation and defense including but not limited to attorney fees,
adjuster expenses, expert costs, court costs, and any other costs to investigate, mitigate
and defend arising out of the Lessee’s activities under this Lease and Lessee’s
activities under the Contract, including but not limited to, Lessee’s use, maintenance
and occupancy of the Vehicles, or Lessee’s use or occupancy of any of the Lessor’s
facilities, regardless of where the injury, death, or damage may occur. Upon receipt
of any claim from the Lessor for damages arising out of any matter for which the
Lessee herein agrees to hold the Lessor harmless, then and in that event the Lessor
shall notify the Lessee of such claim and the Lessee shall have the right to settle,
compromise, or defend the same. The Lessee shall further use legal counsel
reasonably acceptable to the Lessor in carrying out the Lessee’s obligations hereunder.
The provisions of this Article XVII.A shall survive the expiration, termination, or
early cancellation of this Lease and the Contract.
B.
Insurance.
1.
The Lessee shall procure and maintain at its expense during the Lease period
the following insurance coverage from an insurance company or companies
possessing a rating of A- VII or higher from the A.M. Best Company or an
equivalent rating service. THE METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON
AIRPORTS AUTHORITY SHALL BE NAMED AS AN ADDITIONAL
INSURED on Commercial General Liability, Commercial Auto Liability, and
Umbrella/Excess Liability policies. All of the policies required of the Lessee
shall contain a Waiver of Subrogation provision waving all rights of recovery
under subrogation or otherwise against the Lessor. The Lessee shall advise the
Lessor of any cancellation, non-renewal, or material change in any policy
within five business days of notification of such action. All of the policies
required of the Lessee shall be primary and the Lessee agrees that any
insurance maintained by the Lessor shall be non-contributing with respect to
the Lessee’s insurance.
2.
Commercial General Liability. Commercial General Liability shall be a limit of
not less than $1,000,000 for each occurrence. The commercial general liability
insurance shall cover, but not be limited to, liability arising from premises
operations, independent contractors and subcontractors, products-completed
operations, personal injury and advertising injury, and liability assumed under an
insured contractor.
No. LD 15 XX
Page 6 of 17
3.
Commercial Automobile Liability. The Lessee shall maintain automobile liability
insurance including physical damage coverage. The commercial automobile
liability obtained by the Lessee shall be direct primary insurance to cover the
Vehicles for the Lessor.
a. The commercial automobile liability shall be a limit of not less than
$12,000,000 for each accident.
b. Physical damage coverage is required and shall include collision and
comprehensive coverage. The Lessor-Additional Insured and Loss Payee
Endorsement (CA 20 01), or a substitute form providing equivalent coverage,
shall be obtained to identify the Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority
as additional insured and loss payee.
c. Coverage shall include bus operations, towing operations, and operations of
other vehicles and equipment.
d. Coverage shall include loading and unloading of passengers and property.
e. Coverage shall also include uninsured and underinsured motorist clauses in
accordance with Virginia statutory minimums.
4.
Property Insurance with “All Risk” coverage to include the full replacement cost
under an “All Risk” policy for the Vehicles provided under this Lease that are not
covered by the Commercial Automobile Liability policy.
5.
By requiring insurance herein, the Lessor does not represent that coverage and
limits will necessarily be adequate to protect Lessee and such coverage and limits
shall not be deemed as a limitation on Lessee’s liability under the indemnities
granted to the Lessor in this Lease.
6.
The Lessor reserves the right at any time throughout the term of the Lease to
adjust the aforementioned insurance requirements, if, in Lessor’s reasonable
judgment, the insurance required by the Lease is deemed inadequate to properly
protect the Lessor’s interest.
7.
The failure of the Lessor at any time to enforce the insurance provisions, to
demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with the insurance
requirements, or to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not
constitute a waiver of those provisions nor in any respect reduce the obligations of
the Lessee to maintain such insurance or to defend and hold the Lessor harmless
with respect to any items of injury or damage covered by this Lease.
8.
The Lessee is responsible to ensure that all subcontractors independently carry
insurance appropriate to cover the subcontractor's exposures or are covered under
the Lessee’s policies.
No. LD 15 XX
Page 7 of 17
9.
The Lessee shall provide the Contracting Officer with a valid Certificate of
Insurance, in advance of the performance of any service and as soon as possible
after insurance policy renewal, exhibiting coverage as required by this Lease and
the Contract. If commercial umbrella or excess policies are obtained to meet the
required limits of insurance, then the Certificate of Insurance must indicate the
policies covered by the umbrella or excess policies. The Certificate of Insurance
shall contain any applicable additional insured statement as referred to herein.
The Certificate of Insurance shall be provided on the industry standard form
(ACORD 25) or other form acceptable to the Lessor and the Contract number
shall be listed on the Certificate of Insurance and issued to:
Airport Administration Department, MA-230
P.O. Box 17045
Washington Dulles International Airport
ARTICLE XVII
NOTICE OF ACCIDENT
The Lessee shall notify Lessor of any accident or collision involving the use or
operation of any Vehicle in accordance with Article 4, Section 4.10 of the Contract. Lessee
agrees to cooperate with Lessor in the investigation, defense, or prosecution of any claim or
suit arising from any such accident or collision.
ARTICLE XVIII
RECORDS AND REPORTS
The Lessee shall advise the Lessor of the status of the Vehicles upon reasonable prior
notice from the Lessor. The Lessee shall collect and submit to the Lessor such financial
statements, data, records, contracts and other documents relating to each Vehicle or the use
thereof, in accordance with Article 6, Section 6.07 of the Contract.
ARTICLE XVIX
AUDIT
The Lessee shall permit the authorized representatives of the Lessor to inspect and audit
on a periodic basis upon reasonable prior notice from the Lessor all data and records of the
Lessee's performance under this Lease.
ARTICLE XX
DEFAULT, AND RIGHTS AND REMEDIES UPON DEFAULT
A.
The occurrence of any of the following events shall be considered an Event of
Default by the Lessee:
No. LD 15 XX
Page 8 of 17
1.
The Lessee shall become insolvent, or shall take the benefit of any present or
future insolvency statute, or shall make a general assignment for the benefit of
creditors, or shall file a voluntary petition in bankruptcy or a petition or answer
seeking an arrangement of its reorganization or the readjustment of its
indebtedness under the federal bankruptcy laws or under any other law or statute
of the United States or of any state thereof, or shall consent to the appointment of
a receiver, trustee, or liquidator of all or substantially all of its property; or
2.
By order or decree of a court, the Lessee shall be adjudged bankrupt or an order
shall be made approving a petition filed by any of the creditors or, if the Lessee is
a corporation, by any of the stockholders of the Lessee seeking its reorganization
or the readjustment of its indebtedness under the federal bankruptcy laws or
under any law or statute of the United States or of any state thereof; or
3.
A petition under any part of the federal bankruptcy laws or an action under any
present or future insolvency law or statute shall be filed against the Lessee and
petition against the Lessee shall not be dismissed within sixty (60) days after the
filing thereof; or
4.
The Lease or the rights and interests of the Lessee hereunder be transferred to,
pass to, or devolve upon, by operation of law or otherwise any other person,
firm, or corporation without the Lessor’s prior written approval, which shall not
be unreasonably withheld; or
5.
There is any substantial change in the ownership or proprietorship of the Lessee,
as described herein which, in the sole reasonable opinion of the Lessor
substantially diminishes or indicated the substantial diminution of, the Lessee’s
ability to perform its obligations under this Contract; or
6.
The Lessee, if a corporation, shall, without the prior written consent of the
Lessor, become a non-surviving merged corporation in a merger, a constituent
corporation in a consolidation, or a corporation in dissolution; or
7.
By or pursuant to, or under authority of any legislative act, resolution or rule, or
any order or decree of any court or governmental board, agency or officer having
jurisdiction, a receiver, trustee, or liquidator shall take possession or control of
all or substantially all of the property of the Lessee, and such possession or
control shall continue in effect for a period of sixty (60) days; or
8.
The Lessee completely abandons, deserts, vacates, or discontinues performance
of its operations and services required by this Lease, except as a result of a force
majeure event; or
No. LD 15 XX
Page 9 of 17
B.
9.
Except as otherwise permitted herein, the Lessee shall assign, transfer, encumber
or sublicense the Lease or any interest therein without the prior written approval
of the Lessor; or
10.
The Lessee shall fail duly and punctually to make any payment required
hereunder when due to the Lessor and shall fail to cure within ten (10) days of
receiving written notification from the Lessor of such failure; or
11.
The Lessee fails to make repairs to the Vehicles as required herein within thirty
(30) days after prior written notice is received from the Lessor, or, if such work
cannot be completed within thirty (30) days, the Lessee fails to commence said
repairs within such thirty (30) day period and continue with due diligence until
completion; or
12.
The Lessee shall fail to keep, perform and observe each and every other
promise, covenant, condition, and agreement set forth in this Lease on its part to
be kept, performed or observed and the Lessee does not cure such failure within
ten (10) days after receipt of written notice of non-compliance there under from
the Lessor, or, where fulfillment of its obligation requires activity over a period
of time, the Lessee fails to commence performance to the satisfaction of the
Lessor, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice, and to continue such
performance without interruption.
13.
Upon the occurrence of any Default of the Contract related to the use,
operation, or maintenance of the Vehicles.
Upon the occurrence of any Event of Default referenced above or at any time thereafter
during the continuance thereof, and after all cure periods have expired, if applicable, the
Lessor may at its option, exercise concurrently or successively any one or more of the
following rights and remedies:
1.
Upon fifteen (15) days prior written notice, terminate the Lessee's right to
possession of the Vehicles and/or terminate this Lease, with or without legal
process, take possession of the Vehicles and remove the Lessee, and any property
therefrom, using such force as may be necessary, without relinquishing any rights
of the Lessor against the Lessee. The Lessor shall be entitled to recover reasonable
damages from the Lessee together with all reasonable expenses of any proceedings
(including, but not limited to, legal expenses and attorney's fees) which may be
necessary in order for the Lessor to recover possession of the leased Vehicles
(including, but not limited to, any commissions paid to any recovery agent,
advertising expense and the cost of such alterations, repairs, and replacements as
the Lessor in its sole judgment considers advisable and necessary for the purpose
of re-leasing the Vehicles.
2.
Without waiving any default, pay any sum required to be paid by the Lessee to
parties other than the Lessor and which Lessee has failed to pay, and perform any
No. LD 15 XX
Page 10 of 17
obligations required to be performed by the Lessee under the Lease, and any
amounts so paid or expended by the Lessor in fulfilling the obligations of the
Lessee there under shall be repaid by the Lessee to the Lessor on demand with late
fees thereon at the rate of fifteen percent (15%) per annum from the date of such
payment or expenditure, without terminating the Lease;
3..
Bring suit for the collection of amounts due for which Lessee may be in default or
for the performance of any other covenant, promise, or agreement of the Lessee for
performance or damage therefore, all without terminating the Lease;
C.
The rights and remedies of the Lessor provided under this Article shall not be exclusive
and are in addition to any other rights and remedies which the Lessor may have at law or
in equity or under the Lease.
D.
No waiver by the Lessor at any time of any of the terms, conditions, covenants or
agreements herein shall be deemed or taken as a waiver at any time thereafter of the same
or any other term, condition, covenant or agreement herein contained, nor of the strict
and prompt performance thereof. No delay, failure or omission of the Lessor to take or to
exercise any right, power, privilege or option arising from any default, or subsequent
acceptance of fee, then or thereafter accrued, shall impair any such right, power, privilege
or option, or be construed to be a waiver of any such default or relinquishment thereof, or
acquiescence therein; and no notice by the Lessor shall be required to restore or revive
any option, right, power, remedy or privilege after waiver by the Lessor of default in one
or more instances.
ARTICLE XXI
TERMINATION-COMPLETION OF LEASE
Upon expiration or early termination of this Lease, the Lessee shall assemble the
Vehicles and deliver same at a place and time designated by the Lessor for inspection of the
Vehicles by the Lessor. The Vehicles shall be delivered to the Lessor in a physical condition that
is free of any damage to the interior or exterior of the Vehicles (except normal wear and tear) and
an operating condition whereby all systems and components of the Vehicles are operating as
designed by the manufacturer. In the event that the Lessee fails to deliver the Vehicles in the
condition above, the Lessor, at its sole discretion, shall have the right to require the Lessee to
make repairs to the Vehicles at the Lessee’s own expense or compensate the Lessor for the fair
market value of restoring the Vehicles to a physical and operating condition acceptable to the
Lessor. If the Lessee fails to deliver any Vehicle(s), Lessee shall pay Lessor the fair market
value of such Vehicle(s).
ARTICLE XXII
WAIVER
The Lessor’s failure to insist upon the strict performance of any condition of this Lease
shall not be deemed a waiver on the part of the Lessor of the future performance by the Lessee of
the terms and conditions of the Lease.
No. LD 15 XX
Page 11 of 17
ARTICLE XXIV
GOVERNING LAW; CAPTIONS; TIME
This Lease shall in all respects be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of
the Commonwealth of Virginia. The captions of the sections of this Lease are for convenience
only and shall not define or limit any of the terms or provisions hereof. Time is of the essence of
this Lease and all of its provisions.
ARTICLE XXV
SEVERABILITY
If any provision of this Lease is contrary to, prohibited by, or deemed invalid under
applicable laws and regulations, then such provision shall be deemed omitted but shall not
invalidate the remaining provisions of this Lease.
ARTICLE XXVI
TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE
This Lease may also be terminated for any reason by the Lessor upon ninety (90) days
advance written notice to the other party. However, the Lessee shall not be reimbursed for any
anticipatory profits that have not been earned up to the date of termination.
No. LD 15 XX
Page 12 of 17
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Lease to be executed
as of the date first above written.
BY: ___________________________________________
NAME: ________________________________________
TITLE: ________________________________________
LESSEE
BY:_____________________________________________
NAME:__________________________________________
TITLE:__________________________________________
No. LD 15 XX
Page 13 of 17
EXHIBIT A
LIST OF VEHICLES
No. LD 15 XX
Page 14 of 17
EXHIBIT B
ACCEPTANCE OF VEHICLES
No. LD 15 XX
Page 15 of 17
EXHIBIT C
MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY
No. LD 15 XX
Page 16 of 17
EXHIBIT D
MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDED PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
No. LD 15 XX
Page 17 of 17
Exhibit B
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE RESPONSIBILITIES (MATRIX)
Exhibit B-1
MAINTENANCE MATRIX FOR THE FACILITIES
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE PARKING STRUCTURES
P= Parking and Shuttle Bus Contractor
R = Rental Car Agencies
MW= AIRPORTS AUTHORITY
N/A= NOT APPLICABLE
Exhibit B‐1
#= SEE NOTES
Towers Lobbies / Stairways
Storage, Machine, Electrical Rooms #5
Street Side of Facility
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW
P, MW
N/A
MW
P
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
R
MW
P
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
P
R
MW
MW
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
P
R
MW
N/A
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
Rental Car Public Parking Parking Areas Areas #3
#4
Parking Offices/ Restrooms #1 Rental Car Offices / Counters #2
Rental Car Lobby / Restrooms
1. Painting
3
R
MW
P
2. Locking Systems P
R
MW
3. Interior Lighting P
R
4. Glass
P
Interior Facilities M i t
5. Structural
#6
6. Floors, Floor Covering & Trim
7. Doors and Hardware
#6
P
R
MW
P
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
8. Plumbing Sys & Components
#7
P
R
MW
P
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
9. Electrical Sys & Components
#8
P
R
MW
P
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
P
R
R
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
P
R
MW
MW
R, MW
MW
P, MW
MW
1. Hazardous Waste Storage
P
R
MW
P
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
2. Hazardous Waste Disposal
P
R
MW
P
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
3. Spill Prev. Planning/cleanup
P
R
MW
P
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
P
R
N/A
N/A
MW
P
MW
MW
P
R
MW
MW
N/A
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
N/A
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
N/A
4. Glazing & Glass Replacement
P
R
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
N/A
5. Ramps/Loading Docks
P
MW
N/A
P
MW
MW
MW
MW
6. Locks
P
R
MW
P
MW
MW
MW
N/A
7. Doors
P
R
MW
P
MW
MW
MW
N/A
8. Exterior Lights
P
N/A
MW
P
R
MW
MW
MW
#9
MW
MW
MW
MW
R, MW
MW
MW
MW
1. Transformers #11
P
R
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
2. Emerg. Generator System
#12
MW
N/A
N/A
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
P
R
N/A
P
R
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
10. Furniture
11. Signage
#9
Environmental
4. Oil/Water Separator
Exterior Facilities M i t
1. Painting
2. Roofing #10
3. Structural
9. Signage
Electrical Distribution S t
3. Uninterruptible Power Source
4. Electric Meters
1 of 4
N/A= NOT APPLICABLE
Exhibit B‐1
#= SEE NOTES
#4
Fire Detection/Suppression Systems #6
1. Fire Detection Systems
#13
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
N/A
2. Sprinkler System
#14
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW
MW
MW
MW
N/A
P
R
MW
MW
MW
MW
P, MW
N/A
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
3. Smoke Exhaust
4. Extinguishers
5. Standpipes
Mechanical Systems
1. HVAC Systems
#15
P
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
MW
MW
N/A
2. Ventilation/Exhaust System
#15
P
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
3. Unit Heaters
P
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
MW
P, MW
N/A
4. Water Coolers/Fountain
P
R
MW
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5. Water Heater
P
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
P
N/A
MW
MW
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
2. Elevators
N/A
N/A
MW
N/A
N/A
MW
N/A
N/A
3. Escalators
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4. Moving Walks
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW
N/A
N/A
P
R
R
P
R
P
N/A
N/A
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
P
N/A
N/A
P
P
P
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
5. Intrusion Alarms
P
R
N/A
P
R
N/A
N/A
N/A
6. Access Control
P
R
MW
P
R
N/A
P, MW
N/A
7. Lighting Controller
P
R
MW
P
R
MW
P, MW
N/A
8. Energy Mngt Control System
P
MW
MW
P
N/A
MW
MW
N/A
Electromechanical Systems
1. Motorized Doors Electronic Systems
1. Paging Systems
#16
2. CCTV (Authority Security Systems) 3. Intercom‐Information Pylons
4. Intercom‐Emergency Call Pylons
9. MUFIDS/Visual Paging
#17
N/A
MW
MW
P
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
10. Telecommunications
#18
P
R
R
P
R
MW
P, MW
MW
P
R
R
P
R
P
P
P
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
N/A
P
R
MW
P
R
MW
P. MW
MW
11. Revenue Control System
12. CO Detection System
Sanitation
1. Custodial
2 of 4
N/A= NOT APPLICABLE
#= SEE NOTES
R
MW
P. MW
MW
P
R
MW
P. MW
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
MW
N/A
MW
R
MW
N/A
N/A
MW
N/A
MW
P
R
MW
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
#4
2. Trash Removal & Recycling
P
R
MW
P
4. Pest Control
P
R
MW
P
MW
P
5. Exterior Glass Surfaces Curtainwall Washing 6. Interior Glass Surfaces Curtainwall Washing
7. Drinking water faucets and/or water cooler sanitation
Exhibit B‐1
Pavement Maintenance/Grounds
1. Snow Plowing
#19
N/A
N/A
N/A
P
P
N/A
N/A
MW
2. Sweeping
#20
N/A
N/A
N/A
P
R
N/A
N/A
MW
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
MW
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
MW
5. Sidewalks/Curbs
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
MW
6. Grounds Policing
N/A
N/A
N/A
P
R
N/A
N/A
MW
7. Pavement Striping
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW
R
N/A
N/A
MW
8. Fencing/Railings/Gates
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW MW
N/A
N/A
MW
N/A
N/A
N/A
MW
MW
N/A
N/A
MW
3. Sealing
4. Pavement/Maintenance
9. Trench Drains
#20
#21
GENERAL NOTES
1. The Parking assigned area shall be maintained by the Parking and Shuttle Bus Concessionaire.
2. The Rental Car Agency assigned areas shall be maintained by the Rental Car Agencies or as indicated.
3. "Public Parking Areas" include all exit/entrance ramps, internal ramps, all stairways (except tower stairs), and designated public parking areas in the structures.
4. "Rental Car Areas" include the designated areas on the third and fourth floors of Garage A, the rental car counters on the first floor of Garage A, the stairs (except tower stairs) within the assigned areas, and all west ramps entering and exiting the third and
fourth floors of Garage A to the Quick‐Turn‐Around Area (QTA).
5. The "Responsible Party" will be responsible for the areas assigned.
6. The Tenant shall be responsible for repairing all areas and items damaged by the Tenant.
7. The Tenant is responsible for the water lines from the MWAA water meter/backflow preventer to the Tenant assigned space, and for
the sanitary sewer system from the connected plumbing fixtures out to the sewer clean out outside of the assigned area. The
Authority will inspect and repair the backflow preventers. The Tenants will be provided with copies of the inspection reports.
8. The Tenant shall be responsible for the electrical distribution system from the breaker on the secondary side of the power
system serving the assigned areas. This work also includes changing light bulbs, replacing ballasts, and/or replacing fixtures.
9. The Authority will be responsible for “Way Finding” Signage throughout the Parking Garages. The Rental Car Agencies shall be responsible for all corporate logos, canopy signs, counter signs, and corporate directional Signage. 10. The Tenant shall be responsible for roofing and flashing located within five feet surrounding any Tenant installed roof‐mounted equipment and fixtures.
11. Electrical equipment installed by and/or for the sole use of the Tenant is responsibility of the Tenant.
12. The Authority shall limit all electrical connections on to the Emergency Generator System. Any additional loads connected require
prior written approval from the Authority.
13. The Authority maintains system except components/equipment installed by Tenants.
3 of 4
N/A= NOT APPLICABLE
Parking Offices/ Restrooms #1 Exhibit B‐1
#= SEE NOTES
Rental Car Offices / Counters #2
#4
14. The Tenant shall be responsible for repairing sprinkler heads and branch lines damaged by the Tenant . The Authority will provide the Tenant with copies of the sprinkler inspections.
15. HVAC equipment (including VAV’s, FCU’s, etc) and/or controls installed by and/or for the sole use of the Tenant, is the responsibility of the Tenant.
16. Tenants are responsible for all paging equipment within/serving Tenant assigned areas.
17. The Authority maintains the MUFIDS system except components/equipment installed by Tenants.
18. Each Party will be responsible for its own telephone system including telephone instruments, conduit, and telephone wire back to the central telephone closet.
19. The Parking Concessionaire shall be responsible for the snow and ice removal for the bus shelters, bus lanes, entrance and exit ramps out to the Main Roadway, the service drive between Garage A & B, the pedestrian walkway between Garage A & B, and
for all areas of the parking structures. The Rental Car Agencies shall be responsible to move all rental car vehicles and equipment within their assigned areas, as necessary, to expedite the removal of and stockpiling of snow on the fourth floor of Garage A.
20. Initial cleanup and the flushing of deck areas for spills and after snow/ice storms shall be the responsibility of the Tenant.
21. The Tenant shall be responsible for trash and debris removal to prevent the storm drains from being blocked.
4 of 4
Exhibit B-2
MAINTENANCE MATRIX OF SURFACE LOTS
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE RESPOINSIBILITIES FOR THE SURFACE AREA PARKINGExhibit B-2
P= Parking Contractor
N/A= NOT APPLICABLE
#= SEE NOTES
Public Parking Areas
Bus Shelters
Sweeping
p
p
Scrubbing
p
p
Sealing
p
p
Patching & Structural Maint.
MW
MW
Cracks
MW
MW
Snow & Ice Removal
P
P
Policing Service
P
P
Trash Removal
P
P
Pest Control
P
P
Paint Striping
MW
P
Guard Rails & Cables
MW
P
Fences & Gates
P
P
Cleaning Maintenance
P
MW
MW
MW
Revenue Control Signs
P
P
Illuminated Signs
P
P
MW
MW
MW
N/A
Internal Distribution
P
P
Light Poles & Fixtures
P
P
PAVEMENT MAINTENANCE
SIGNAGE
Directional Signs
Identification Signs
ELECTRICAL
Main Supply Line to Each Point of Connection #12
1 of 3
N/A= NOT APPLICABLE
#= SEE NOTES
Bus Shelters
Lighting
P
P
Replace Ballasts
P
P
Revenue Control System
P
P
Public Address System
P
P
Directional Control System
P
P
MW
N/A
Internal Distribution
P
P
Fixtures & Water Coolers
P
P
MW
N/A
Clean Storm Drain Grating
P
N/A
Storm Drain Line Clean‐Out
MW
N/A
P
P
Lawn/Grass/Weeds
MW
MW
Planting/Trees/Shrubs
MW
MW
WATER AND STORM SEWAGE
Main Supply Sanitary Line to Each Point of Connection
#12
Fire Hydrants
SITE MAINTENANCE
Exterior Cleanup
GENERAL NOTES:
1.
This matrix must be read in conjunction with the Contract.
2.
Responsibilities for each and every party include preventative maintenance, repair and replacement unless specifically noted otherwise.
3.
4.
5.
6.
"Pavement maintenance" includes removal of snow, ice, vegetation, stones, fuel, oil, grease, debris, and all other foreign matter embedded in the pavement, including the maintenance of pavement markings.
"Site maintenance" includes maintenance, rehabilitation, and keeping the specified items in good repair.
"Structural maintenance" includes maintenance, rehabilitation, and the keeping in good repair of any building founddations, structures, ramps, floor slabs (including sealants), load‐bearing walls, and all maintance and repairs required to correct defects.
"Pavement structural maintenance and repair" include maintenance, rehabilitation, and the keeping in
good repair of asphalt, concrete, and other improved surfaces.
2 of 3
N/A= NOT APPLICABLE
#= SEE NOTES
7.
8.
9.
Bus Shelters
"Main supply line" for utilities means the utility production and mainline transportation components for electrical, water, sewage, heating and air conditioning or natural gas service up to the main distribution panel, reduction station, shut‐off or other p
"Internal distribution system" for utilities includes the individual service lines and associated equipment‐carrying utilities within a parking area, including the associated mechanical and electrical components.
Each party is responsible for its own telephone system.
10. The Authority will be responsible for all connecting roadways outside the assigned area.
11. The parking concessionaire is responsible for all parking areas assigned, to and including an area of three feet outside the fence at each parking area.
12. Any point‐of‐connection of electrical and utility services outside the assigned areas, for which the parking concessionaire is responsible, will be shown on drawings.
3 of 3
Exhibit B-3
MAINTENANCE MATRIX OF THE PARKING ACCESS REVENUE CONTROL SYSTEM
PARCS ASSIGNED FOR THE USE OF THE CONTRACTOR
Hardware:
Software:
Vendor:
Installed:
Exhibit B‐3
Zeag
WebPARCS
Hub Parking Technology
2012
Contractor is responsible for minor maintenance duties, such as replacing gates, fixing ticket jams, resetting equipment, etc.
Exhibit B-4
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE OF VEHICLES
Exhibit B-4 Van Hool Buses
Exhibit B-4 ElDorado Buses
Exhibit
B-4B-4
Exhibit
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C004
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C003
Table of Contents
F\t
Ë 1ñ/ F
LYË
Ëå
...... PM-23
Lubrication................
Damper.......
PM-24
2.9.7.1 . Cylinder Damping lnspection......
................... PM-25
..... PM-26
2.9.8. Engine Oil & Filter Change
.................. PM-27
2.9.8.1. Engine Oil Change lntervals........
... PM-27
2.9.9. Primary (Suction) Fuel Filter Replacement ..................
PM-29
2.9.10. Secondary (Pressure) Fuel Filter Rep|acement...................
..... PM-29
2.9.10.1.Fue1 System Priming..........
.. PM-30
2.9.11. Exhaust System
........ PM-30
2.9.12. DEF Tank....
................. PM-30
2.9.12.1.Fi11er Cap Cleaning
..... PM-31
2.9.13. Shock Absorber lnspection
......... PM-31
2.9.14. Ride Height
.......... PM-31
2.9.15. Air Springs
PM-31
2.9.16. Front & Rear Axles & Suspension..................
PM-32
2.9.17. Radius Rods ...........
PM-32
2.9.18. Air System Functional Tests ..........
.. PM-32
2.9.19. Driver's Window
......... PM-32
2.9.20. Window Emergency Release System
....... PM-33
2.9.21. lnterior & ExteriorAccess Doors..........
....... PM-33
2.9.22. Roof VenUHatch...............
.... PM-34
2.9.23. Splash Guards
... PM-34
2.9.24. Windshield Wiper & Washer
PM-34
2.9.25. Driver's Seat............
.......... PM-34
2.9.26. Passenger Seats...........
................. PM-34
2.9.26.1.General Cleaning...
.................... PM-34
2.9.26.2.Tou9h Stain & Graffiti Removal
................... PM-34
2.9.26.3.Vacuum Formed Plastic Components.............
................. PM-35
2.9.26.4.Upholstery Care.....
PM-35
2.9.27 . Stanchions & Grab Rai1s............
Restraints....
PM-35
2.9.28. Wheelchair Tie-Down & Occupant
..... PM-35
2.9.29. lnterior Panels
PM-35
2.9.30. Exterior Pane1s.........
........
PM-35
2.9.31. Mirrors.........
Battery
System........
PM-36
2.9.32.
........ PM-37
2,9.33. Wheelchair Ramp lnspection..............
................. PM-37
2.9.33.1.Mechanism ............
.--............... PM-38
2.9.33.2.Lubrication ............
PM-39
2.9.34. Driver's Heater/Defroster.............
......... PM-40
2.9.35. HVAC Return Air Filter...
........ PM-40
2.9.36. HVAC Fresh Air Filter......
PM-41
2.9.37. Rear Axle Breather Tube ...........
.......... PM-41
2.9.37.1.Breather Valve Replacement..............
PM-42
2.9.38. Engine Compartment Line Routing lnspection
.......PM-42
2.9.38.1.Line Condition lnspection
.......... PM-43
2.9.38.2.Line Routing lnspection
2.9.6.3. Telescoping Spline
2.9.7.
Steering
2.10. 7,500 Miles (12,000 km) Preventive
Maintenance.........,...
2.10.1. Air Filter Restriction lndicator lnspection....
2.10.2. Air Filter Rep1acement...................
2.10.2.1.Remova1...............
PM-¡¡
The New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design appl¡cations or registrations in the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Copyright@ 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
..
PM-45
. PM-45
PM46
................... PM-47
Rev. A - Jan 2O 2015
Exhibit
B-4 B-4
Exhibit
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C004
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C003
nlËVt/ ËLYËË¡
Table of Contents
..............
2.10.2.3.1nsta11ation.............
2.10.3. Charge Air Cooler & Piping
2.10.2.2.lnspection
................. PM-47
.................. PM-48
Maintenance........,...
..... PM-48
2.11.1. Electronic Accelerator
2.11.2. Driver's Heater/Defroster.............
Maintenance............
System
2.12.1 .l.Coolant Levet.........
2.12.1 .2.A.n1ifree2e..............
2.12.1 .3.Çooling System Components
2.12.2. Cooling System Pressure Test.............
2.12.3. Coolant Filter Replacement..........
2.12.1. Cooling
2.13. f 8,000 Miles (29,000 km) Preventive
2.13.1. Engine Mounts
2.13.2. Power Steering Fi|ter...........
2.14.24,000 Miles (38,600 km) Preventive
2.14.1. Air
Dryer.....
2.15.1. Fuel Tank
2.15.2. Engine Drive
Belts
2.16.1. Disc Brake Caliper lnspection
2.16.2. Power Steering F1uid............
2.17.1. Front End Alignment
2.17.2. Front & Rear Brake Chambers...
2.18.1. Fuel Tank
2.18.2. Air Compressor Discharge Lines
2.18.3. Crankcase Breather Element......
PM-51
....... PM-54
PM-55
Maintenance.............
PM-56
.... PM-56
... PM-56
.
PM-57
......... PM-57
............. PM-57
.. PM-58
.... PM-58
PM-59
.
PM-60
PM-60
PM-60
PM-60
.
PM-60
... PM-60
.
PM-61
PM-61
PM-61
................
Chambers.................
2.17.2.1.Front Brake Chambers
2.17.2.2.Rear Brake
.
................. PM-51
.................. PM-52
. PM-53
Tests.............
ïes1...............
Operation................
Assembly & Brake Va1ve..........
PM-49
PM-50
... PM-51
2.14.1 .l.Operation & Leakage
2.14.1 .2.Eleclric Power
2.14.1 .3.Thermostat & Heater
2.14.2. Brake Treadle
.PM-49
................. PM-61
................. PM-62
PM-63
PM-63
PM-63
PM-63
2.18.3.1.Remova1...............
................... PM-63
Cleaning........
..... PM-64
2.18.3.3.1nsta11ation.............
.................. PM-64
2.19.72,000Miles(116,000km) PreventiveMaintenance............. PM-65
2.18.3.2.lnspection &
2.19.1. Rear Axle Oil
.1.Drain
2.19.1.2.Fi
Change
2.19.1
PM-65
................. PM-65
..................... pM-65
2.20.75,000 Miles (120,700 km) Preventive
PM-66
Filters.......
......... PM-66
2.21.96,000 Miles(154,500km)PreventiveMaintenance............ PM-66
2.21.1 . Front End Alignment
PM-66
2.20.1. Transmission
Rev, A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flye[ vehicles descr¡bed in this manual may be protected by one or morè
patents and des¡gn applications or registrat¡ons in the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vèhicle Patent lnformation" ¡n this manual.
Copyright O 2015 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
PM -
¡¡¡
Exhibit
B-4 B-4
Exhibit
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C004
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C003
tuËvV ËLYËËÊ
Table of Contents
2.22.108,000Mi|es(174,000km)PreventiveMaintenance.............
2.22.1. Rear Axle Oil
PM-66
Change
PM-66
2.23.150,000Mi|es(241,400km)PreventiveMaintenance.............
2.23.1. Transmission
Fluid
PM-67
2.24.1. Muffler Particulate Fi1ter...........
2.24.2. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fi1ter...........
Removal........
1nspection....................
2.24.2.3.1nsta11ation.............
2.24.3. DEF Tank lnlet Filter
2.24.2.1.
2.24.2.2.Çleaning &
2.25. Six Month Preventive
... PM-69
............... PM-69
...........^...... PM-70
PM-71
........ PM-73
D-2 Governor
PR-2 Pressure Protection
ST-1 Safety
SR-7 Spring Brake Modulating
2.25.12.Êngine Compartment Access Door lnspection
2.25.13.Fire Suppression System
2.25.14.Power Steering Miter Box
2.26.Yearly Preventive
........
.......
.........
........
PM-74
PM-74
PM-74
.........Pl/'-74
..........P¡/'-74
.PM-74
... PM-75
.............
.. PM-75
........ PM-75
....... PM-76
Maintenance
PM-77
PM-77
........Pr/'-77
.........PM-77
..............
lnspection......
2.26.4. lnstrument Panel & Side Conso1e.................
2.26.5. Fire Extinguisher............
2.26.6, Air Dryer.....
2.26.7. QR-1 Quick Release Valve..........
2.26.8. Air Strainer
2.26.9. Coolant Testing
2.26.10.Radiator............
2.26.11.Headlight 4im..............
2.26.12.Primary (Suction) Fuel Filter
2.26.13.Under Body lnspection....
2.26.3.1. Hydraulic Fluid
2.26.3.2.S,creen & Filter
.........P'l/'-77
.
.........
.........
..........
...
PM-81
... PM-8'1
........ PM-81
............
Radiator
2.27.1 .Exlerior Cleaning
2.27.1 .Z.lnterior Cleaning/Flushing..........
.1
The New Flyer vehicles described in th¡s manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applicat¡ons or reg¡strations in the Un¡ted States and Canada,
and ¡n other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in th¡s manual.
Copyright@ 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
PM-78
PM-79
PM-79
PM-79
PM-80
PM-80
PM-80
.. PM-81
PM-82
2.27.1.
PM-iv
PM-73
PM-73
PM-73
PM-73
.................. PM-73
.................. PM-73
2.26.1. Door Sensitive Edge lnspection & Test..........
2.26.2. FuelHoses..
2.26.3. Wheelchair Ramp Pump
2.27. Two Year Preventive Maintenance
PM-68
PM-68
PM-69
..................
Va|ve..........
Va1ve..........
Valve..
2.25.4.1.Operating Test......
2.25.4.2.Leakage Test........
2.25.5. SC-1 Single Check Va1ve...........
2.25.6. DC-4 Double Check Valve..........
2.25.7. Pressure Reducing Valve .........,
2.25.8. R-14 Brake Relay Valve.
2.25.9. Brake Foot Valve ..........
2.25.10.Steering Knuckle
2.25.11.Primary (Suction) Fuel Filter
2.25.1.
2.25.2.
2.25.3.
2.25.4.
PM-67
PM-82
.................... PM-82
................... PM-82
Rev. A
-Jan 20 2015
ExhibitExhibit
B-4
B-4
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C004
t\I Ë VTl Ë
LYË
Table of Contents
ËT
2.27.2. Alternator Bearing Rep1acement...................
2.27.3. Door System lnspection
Bearings........
Hardware......
Bearings
Bearing
Bearings
4ssemb1y....................
Assemb|y.................
2.27.3.8.Door Pane1s...........
2.27.3.9.Door Panel Top & Bottom Seal Assemblies.................
2.27.3.10.Door Operator Limit Switches
2.27.3.11.Solenoid Va1ves...........
2.27.3.12.Driver's Door Controller
2.27.3.1 .Connecting Rods & Rod End
2.27.3.2.Door Shaft Levers & Mounting
2.27.3.3.Upper Door Shaft Pivot
2.27.3.4.Lower Door Shaft Pivot
2.27.3.5.Upper Roller Guide, Brackets, &
2.27.3.6.Enlrance Door Shaft & Arm
2.27.3.7.Exi|Door Shaft & Arm
Maintenance........
2.29. Five Year Prevent¡ve Maintenance............
PM-82
.......... PM-83
. PM-83
..................... PM-84
.................. PM-84
................... PM-84
... PM-84
............ PM-8S
. PM-86
................. PM-87
...... PM-87
..................... PM-87
......... PM-87
........ PM-87
2.28. Three Year Preventive
2.28.1
.
Under Body
lnspection..............
2.29.1. Fire Suppression System
2.29.2. Door Motor Rebuild
2.29.3. Door Component Replacement............
2.30. Six Year Prevent¡ve
Maintenance.......,....
2.30.1. Fire Extinguisher............
2.30.2, Cooling System
2.30.3. Booster Pump..........
2.31. Ten Year Prevent¡ve Maintenance
............
........
2.33. Fluid & Lubrication Points..........,,,.
2.34. Fluid & Lubrication Guide
Extinguisher............
2.34.1. MAN Axle Approved Synthetic Oi1s..............
2.34.2. MAN Axle Approved Greases
-Jan202015
PM-88
........ PM-BB
PM-88
....... PM-88
PM-88
,.. PM-BB
2.32. Twelve Year Preventive Maintenance
Rev. A
PM-BB
......... PM-BB
2.31.2. Door Component Replacement............
2.32.1. Fire
PM-88
The New Flyer vehicles descr¡bed in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and des¡gn applications or registrations in the United States and Canada,
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" in this manual.
Copyr¡ght O 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
PM-88
PM-89
........ PM-B9
....... PM-89
........ PM-89
......... PM-89
...PM-90
. PM-91
PM-9S
. PM-9S
PM-v
Exhibit
B-4 B-4
Exhibit
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C004
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C003
Table of Contents
PM-vi
Thè New Flyer veh¡cles described ìn this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and des¡gn appl¡cations or registrations in the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" in th¡s manual.
Copyr¡ght @ 2015 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
hlË\ftl ËLYËËI
Rev,
A -Jan202015
Exhibit
B-4B-4
Exhibit
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C004
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C003
l\tËVt/ TLYË$T
1.
SAFETY
1.1.
Safety Procedures
Safety Procedures
t
Hydraulic fluid is corrosive and should not
be exposed to skin for extensive periods of
time.
3
tl
This section of the service manual contains procedures which require the
mechanics to strictly observe safety proce-
dures in order to ensure personal and
Wear eye protection at all times.
Pressurized lines should not be disconnected until the pressure is safely and controllably released.
equipment safety.
Always ensure that the vehicle is appropriately hoisted and blocked for procedures
Follow all proper safety precautions
regarding spray painting. Use a filtering
mask with the proper filter cartridges
for this type of paint. Wear eye protection and proper protective clothing. The
paint booth or work area must be properly ventilated, with filtered exhaust
which require elevating the vehicle. Be
aware of the limitations of the blocking
equipment, and always ensure that the jarring and shaking created by component
removal and installation procedures does
not overload the blocks, or cause the vehicle to become unstable.
fans removing fumes and over spray.
Air make-up induction fans should also
be used to supply fresh air to the work
area. The painting area should be a safe
distance from any source of flame,
spark or other means of combustion.
Atomized paint, thinner, cleaner and
solvent fumes are highly volatile with
an extremely low flashpoint that can
cause explosive combustion. DO NOT
smoke or permit anyone else to smoke
Certain procedures may require the vehicle be operated in an elevated position in
order to accurately troubleshoot and diagnose a problem. lf the vehicle must be run-
ning while elevated, become familiar with
the repair area prior to starting the engine.
Take special care in noting areas which will
become hot, electrically energized, and
areas where moving and rotating components are located. Limit the work in these
areas as personal and equipment safety is
in or near the painting area.
at risk.
For procedures which involve air lines,
ensure the line is safely depressurized
1.2.
lnsulation Foam Safety
prior to disconnecting. Disconnecting pres-
surized lines will cause solid particles
deposited in the line to be uncontrollably
propelled, and will also cause the hose
end to whip randomly as the air escapes.
During electrical diagnosis procedures an
understanding of the vehicle's electric circuits is important to anticipate the results
of connecting test equipment. During component removal or installation, ensure the
Battery Disconnect switch is in the OFF
position.
Failure to follow this procedure may result
in personal injury or component failure.
Observe the following procedures involving
hydraulic line removal.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
lnsulation foam is installed in the
spaces of the frame tubing, between the
vehicle inner and outer wall panels. The
lnsulation Foam is extremely combustible. KEEP OPEN FLAMES AND FLAME
SOURCES AWAY FROM THE INSULATION FOAM!
Before performing any work or repairs
requiring use of an open flame such as:
welding, brazing, acetylene torch cutting or
grinding, ensure that the lnsulation Foam
is either removed from the area being
repaired, or is properly shielded from the
open flame.
patents and design applications or registrations in the United States and Canada,
and ¡n other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" ¡n th¡s manual.
Copyr¡ght O 2015 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
PM
.I
Exhibit
B-4 B-4
Exhibit
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C004
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C003
ruËll,l/ trLYËËË
lntroduction
2.
Consumable maintenance items such as
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
2.1,
(but not limited to) lights, light bulbs, lamps,
belts, bushings, and items with progressive
wear characteristics, lubricants, fluids, filters, hoses, wiper blades and tires are not
lntroduction
covered by warranty.
The transit authority is responsible for the
performance of all scheduled maintenance
as outlined in this preventive maintenance
manual to maintain the New Flyer vehicle
warranty. New Flyer reserves the right to
deny warranty coverage on claims due to
Refer to the illustrations included with this
section as a guide to location of servicing
points.
For compliance to warranties covering the
following equipment, refer to complete preventive maintenance intervals and procedures contained in the applicable vendor
supplied information:
lack of maintenance, misuse, abuse or
neglect.
The maintenance intervals indicated in this
manual are based upon average vehicle
use and typical operating conditions.
Unusual vehicle operating conditions, such
as geographic environmental conditions,
will require service at more frequent intervals. is the customer's responsibility
based upon experience with localized environmental conditions and local regulations
to determine if more frequent intervals are
required. lf you are unsure, please contact
your New Flyer Customer Service Technical Support representative.
Í
D Transmission
J
lt
All the described maintenance operations
must be performed by qualified personnel
using standard shop practices. All replacement parts used for maintenance services
or repairs must be OEM parts or parts with
equivalent quality and performance. Use of
inferior parts will void the warranty. Warranty claims in question must be supported
by preventive maintenance records.
Engine
2.2.
HVAC Unit
Rear Axle Operating Conditions
The rear axle oil change interval is determined by operating conditions that affect
the temperature of the oil in the axle. The
following criteria have been established to
assess the severity of the conditions under
which the axle will be operated:
Moderate Region - this description will
apply to all regions where the average
monthly temperature does not exceed
25"C (77"F) for more than two months of
the year.
Hot Region - this description will apply to
regions where the average monthly
temperature exceeds 25'C (77'F) for more
all
than two months of the year.
PM
.2
patents and des¡gn applications or registrat¡ons in the United States and Canada,
and ¡n other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Copyright O 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
Rev. A
-Jan202015
Exhibit
B-4 B-4
Exhibit
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C004
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C003
ht Ë \'t1 tr
LYË
Run-ln Maintenance
FI
Run-ln Maintenance
2.3.
Gonditional Maintenance
Certain procedures described in this section are designed to ensure a smooth vehicle run-in process. Perform the following
The following items are subject to maintenance on a conditional basis and do not
have a specific interval assigned against
the maintenance requirement:
for regularly scheduled maintenance intervals on this equipment.
oil filter
Wheels - Check wheel torque upon receipt
of vehicle. Refer to Section 1 and 2 of this
procedure.
procedures as part of vehicle run-in.
ïhereafter, Refer to 2.5. "Preventive Maintenance Guide" on page 4 in this section
manual
for torque specifications and
sequence.
Driveshaft - Lubricate upon receipt of vehicle. Refer to 2.9.4. "Driveshaft" on page 16
in this section for lubrication procedure.
J
2.4.
Rear Axle - Change oil upon receipt of
vehicle, Check oil level after first 3,000
Rear Axle Oil Filter - Replace the rear axle
whenever
the differential
is
removed from the axle housing. Refer to
Section 2 of this manual for replacement
Rear Axle Wheel Bearings - Repack wheel
bearings and hub cavity with grease whenever the wheel bearings or grease seals
are being serviced. Refer to 2.34. "Fluid &
Lubrication Guide" on page 91 in this section for grease specification. Refer to Section 2 of this manual for grease repacking
procedure.
miles (4,800 km). Refer to Section 2 of this
oil drain and fill procedure.
Refer to 2.34. "Fluid & Lubrication Guide"
on page 91 in this section for fluid specification.
manual for
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
patents and design applications or reg¡strat¡ons in the United States and Canada,
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in th¡s manual.
Copyr¡ght O 201 5 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
PM
.3
Exhibit
B-4B-4
Exhibit
I\IËVT/ FLYËFI
Preventive Maintenance Guide
2.5.
WEEKLY
DAILY
Radiator
Exterior Check
6,000 mi,
(9,600 km)
MONTHLY
Disc Brake Pad
Air Tanks
lnspection
Operational Check
Wheelchair Ramp
Primary (Suction) Fuel
Fire Extinguisher
Wheels & Tires
Filter
lnspection
Fire Suppression
System
Transmission lnspection
Driveshaft
WheelchairTie-Down &
Occupant Restraints
Steering System
Floor Covering
lnspection
Steering Driveshafts
Crankcase Breather
Tube
Steering Damper
Aftertreatment Exhaust
Piping
Air lntake Piping
Engine Oil& Filter
Change
Fire Suppression
System
Filter Replacement
Secondary (Pressure)
Fuel Filter Replacement
Exhaust System
DEF Tank
Shock Absorber
lnspection
Ride Height
Air Springs
Front & Rear Axles &
Suspension
Radius Rods
Air System Functional
Tests
Driver's Window
-
PM - 4
patents and'design applications or registrat¡ons ¡n th'e Uriited Statês'and
Canada,
ReV, A - Jan 20 2015
Exhibit
B-4B-4
Exhibit
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C004
Contract
MWAA-6-15-C003
I\I Ë VT/ F
LYË
DAILY
FT
WEEKLY
6,000 mi.
(9,600 km)
MONTHLY
Window Emergency
Release System
lnterior & Exterior
Access Doors
Roof VenVHatch
Splash Guards
Windshield Wiper &
Washer
Driver's Seat
Passenger Seats
Stanchions & Grab
Rails
Wheelchair Tie-Down &
Occupant Restraints
lnterior Panels
Exterior Panels
Mirrors
Battery System
Wheelchair Ramp
lnspection
Driver's Heater/
Defroster
HVAC Return Air Filter
HVAC Fresh Air Filter
Rear Axle Breather
Tube
Engine Compartment
Line Routing lnspection
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flyervehicles descr¡bed in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrat¡ons in the United States and Canada,
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Vêhiclê Patent lnformation" in thìs manual.
Copyright @ 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
PM-5
Exhibit
B-4 B-4
Exhibit
nl Ë \'Å/ tr LYË FI
7,500 mi.
(12,000 km)
12,000 mi.
(19,300 km)
15,000 mi.
(24,000 km)
18,000 mi.
(29,000 km)
Air Filter Restriction
lndicator lnspection
Air Filter Replacement
24,000 mi.
(38,600 km)
Brake Treadle Assembly
Cooling System
Pressure Test
30,000 mi.
(48,000 km)
Engine Drive Belts
36,000 mi.
(58,000 km)
Power Steering Filter
48,000 mi.
(77,200 km)
Power Steering Fluid
& Brake Valve
60,000 mi.
(96,000 km)
72,000 mi.
(116,000 km)
75,000 mi.
(120,700 km)
Rear Axle Oil Change (Hot
Region Only - see NOTE
at the end of this chart)
PM
.6
patents and design applicat¡ons or registrations in the United States and Canada,
96,000 mi.
(154,500 km)
Front End Alignment
Exhibit
B-4 B-4
Exhibit
t\l Ë \'T' P LYË
SlE
108,000 mi.
(174,000 km)
150,000 mi.
(241,400 kml
RearAxle Oil Change (Moderate
Region Only - see NOTE at the
end of this chart)
200,000 mi.
(321,000 km)
Muffler Particulate Filter
Transmission Fluid
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filter
DEF Tank lnlet Filter
6 MONTHS
YEARLY
2 YEARS
D-2 Governor
Door Sensitive Edge
lnspection & Test
Cooling System
PR-2 Pressure
Protection Valve
Fuel Hoses
Alternator Bearing
ST-1 Safety Valve
Wheelchair Ramp
3 YEARS
Under Body lnspection
Replacement
Pump Hydraulic Fluid
SR-7 Spring Brake
Modulating Valve
lnstrument Panel &
Side Console
SC-'l Single Check
Fire Extinguisher
Door System
lnspection
Valve
DC-4 Double Check
Valve
Air Dryer
Pressure Reducing
Valve
QR-1 Quick Release
Valve
R-14 Brake Relay Valve
Air Strainer
Brake Foot Valve
Cooling System
Steering Knuckle
Radiator
Headlight Aim
Filter
Engine Compartment
Access Door lnspection
Fire Suppression
System
Fire Extinguisher
Power Steering Miter
Under Body lnspection
Filter
Box
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flyer vehlcìes descr¡bed in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrâtions in the Unlted States and Canada,
Copyright @ 2015 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
PM
.7
Exhibit
B-4 B-4
Exhibit
]\tËvt/ pLYËFt
NgNOTE:
Moderate regions are defined as geographic locations where the average monthly temperature
does not exceed 25'C (77'F) for more than two months of the year.
Hot regions are defined as geographic locations where the average monthly temperature
exceeds 25"C (77'F) for more than two months of the year.
PM
.8
patents and des¡gn appl¡cat¡ons or registrations in the Un¡ted States and Canada,
and ¡n other countr¡es. Refer lo "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Copyright O 201 5 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
Rev.A'Jan202015
Exhibit B-4
Exhibit B-4
l\I Ë I,I/ F.LYË
2.6.
Daily Preventive
2'6'1'
Exterior
ú
Daily Preventive Maintenance
Ë[
Maintenance
check
Wheels are undamaged and studs
and
secure.
3 Tires correctly inflated.
ú Vehicle is level.
Í Exterior panels are undamaged.
ñ No fluid leaks exist under vehicle.
D No fluid leaks exist at axles.
o surge tank coolant level is correct.
D power steering reservoir level is correct.
D Engine and transmission fluid levels are
correct.
ú Fueltanks are full.
D Diesel exhaust fluid tank is full.
nuts are
2.6.2. Operational
Check
following
for correct condition and operation.
start the vehicle and check the
3
o
Low air warning indicator and buzzer.
lnstrument panel
indicators'
signals.
ú Door control.
0 Mirror condition and adjustment.
O
Turn
Rev, A - Jan 20
2015
t
Window and windshield visibility.
D
Windshield wipers and washer.
Í
tã
fl
ú
Í
tr
3
Destination signs.
Wheelchair ramp.
D
Headlights'
fl
Door manual air release valve'
fJ
Passenger signals'
õ
lnstrument panel gauges.
D
Brake pedal.
ú
Í
parking brake.
--_.L and rear doors'
Front
Exit door sensitive edge'
lnterior and exterior lights'
steering column'
Door master switch'
Accelerator'
D Transmission shift selector'
O Air system charges to 125 psi within 5 minutes if system is fully depleted.
¡SNOTE:
ff any of these sysfems do not operate correctly, or if a fault indicator illuminates, DO
NOT drive the vehicle. Refer to Section 19
of this manual for details on the correct
operation of all vehicle controls.
lå,?Ì,::,îàrySåIËi*;,'.""',iJf,"3J?Jll&låî3H3',il3"',,'f,í3åiEi"3t".i""9i;:3::
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in th¡s manual.
Copyright @ 201 5 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
pM - e
Exhibit B-4
Exhibit B-4
Daily Preventive
Maintenance
2.6.3. Wheelchair Ramp
lnspect the wheelchair ramp area
I\l
sand, or slush during the winter months
may require inspection on a daily basis.
Likewise, operating in gritty, dusty condi-
ishes, oils, or chemicals.
J Operate buckles and any locking
or
mechanisms operate smoothly and release com-
release mechanisms. Ensure
pletely.
tions during the summer months
will
require more frequent inspections. Clean
Ensure all floor anchors are secure and
free of obstructions, debris and
any dirt or foreign matter from the ramp,
hinge, and operating shaft areas. lnspect
the recessed area between the floor and
dirt.
Tighten mounting hardware as required.
¡gNOTE:
ramp for any accumulation of debris. Manually deploy and stow the ramp to check for
smooth operation. lnspect hinge for binding or distortion. Repair or replace hinge
as necessary.
Ël
lnspect belts to ensure webbing is not cut,
frayed, damaged, or contaminated by pol-
for
cleanliness on a regular basis depending
on operating conditions. Exposure to salt,
ËVl/ SLYË
lf any mounting hardware requires tighten-
ing or adjustment, the fastener must be
removed to have the threads cleaned and
Loctite 243 reapplied/
-t Ensure all wall anchors for belts are properly secured and allow proper freedom of
Restraints
movement.
Ensure floor surface in wheelchair restraint
area is undamaged and free of any condi-
tion which would impede use of equip-
lf the vehicle was involved in an impact
situation, significant enough to have
the vehicle towed, then the wheelchair
tie-downs, occupant restraints, and
anchorages that were in use at the time
should be replaced.
The following items should be inspected on
a daily basis:
O
PM-IO
ment.
3
Ensure the belts are kept clean and
recoiled within the retractor when not in
use.
D
Ensure all labels detailing use of restraint
equipment are undamaged and clearly legible.
Check belt retractor mechanism by extending and releasing belt. Ensure belt retractor operates as designed and functions
smoothly.
The New Flyervehicles described in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or rsgistrations in the Unìted States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in thls manual.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
Exhibit B-4
Exhibit B-4
f\l Ë VI/ F LVË
Fl
Daily Preventive Maintenance
2.6.6. Crankcase Breather Tube
2.6.5. Floor Covering
Check breather tube for kinks, dents, or
other damage. Also check inside of tube
for sludge, debris, or ice formation (in
freezing conditions). Clean or replace tube
as required
DO NOT clean the vehicle interior with
pressure washing equipment. This type
of cleaning causes excessive soaking
of the floor covering and can result in
separation of the rubber floor covering
from the floor substrate, warping or
deterioration of the floor substrate, and
possible damage to floor mounted
equipment such as floor heaters.
lnspect the interior flooring for cleanliness
on a regular basis depending on operating
conditions. Exposure to salt, sand, or slush
during the winter months may require
inspection on a daily basis.
ü
Vacuum or sweep the floor area daily to
remove surface soil before
it
becomes
2.6.7. Aftertreatment Exhaust Piping
lnspect exhaust aftertreatment system for
leaks cracks, and loose connections.
lnspect for leaks at V-band connections
and tighten clamps as necessary.
2.6.8. Air Intake Piping
lnspect air intake tubes and hoses, for evi-
dence of wear, punctures, or other damage. lnspect for loose connections and
tighten clamps as necessary.
2,6.9.
embedded in the rubber floor covering.
û
D
Confirm proper operation of the Fire Suppression Control Panel on a daily basis as
Wash the floor using a mild detergent and
a minimum amount of water to avoid soaking seams and edge areas.
Fire Suppression System
follows:
D
Ensure that the FIRE red LED indicator is
Visually inspect rubber flooring for gouges,
not illuminated and that no alarms
cracks, seam separation, lifting,
active.
or
any
other damage. Refer to Section 12 of this
manual for floor covering repair procedures.
t
are
Ensure that the SERVICE REQUIRED
orange LED is not illuminated.
D
Ensure that the SYSTEM OK green LED is
illuminated.
Damaged rubber flooring covering must
be repaired immediately to
prevent
water intrusion and subsequent damage to the wood flooring,
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
PM-I1
Exhibit
B-4B-4
Exhibit
l\IEI'V FLYEFI
Weekly Preventive Maintenance
2.7.
Weekly Preventive Maintenance
Test the function of the fan reverse switch
and LED indicator on a weekly basis or
any time service work is being performed
in the engine compartment. Operating the
fan reverse switch will not only clear debris
from the radiator core, but will also confirm
operation of the LED indicator which is
used to display diagnostic fault codes. lf
any active fault codes are indicated, refer
to Section 6 of this manual for troubleshooting and vendor information.
2.7.2. Primary (Suction)
mined by operating conditions that would
allow moisture or condensation to enter
the fuel sysfem. The drain interval may
need to be adjusted dependent on the
of
4. Open the drain valve and allow any water
to drain out of the fuel filter. Close the drain
valve as soon as clean fuel begins to flow
out of the drain. Drain the least amount of
fuel as possible.
5.
6.
2,7.3.
water collected during the
inspection.
OFF position^
Open the vent cap located on top of the
Start the engine and operate at fast idle for
at least one minute to purge any air from
the system.
Fire Suppression System
ponents located within the engine compartment on a weekly basis as follows:
ú
lnspect all components for any evidence of
damage.
û
Ensure that all distribution lines, nozzles,
detection tubes, and electrical connectors
are intact and securely mounted.
O Confirm that the piston
accumulator is
charged. The pressure indicator should be
in the green swept area of the pressure
gauge.
Drain any accumulated water from the fuel
filter on a weekly basis as follows:
1. Set the Battery Disconnect switch to the
Hand{ighten the vent cap.
Visually inspect the fire suppression com-
Fuel Filter
N€NOTE:
The frequency at which water should be
drained from the fuel filter will be deter-
2.
Place a suitable plastic or metal container
of at least B ounces capacity beneath the
drain valve at the base of the fuel filter.
2.7.1. Radiator
amount
3.
û
Confirm that the detection cylinder
is
charged. The pressure indicator should be
in the green swept area of the pressure
gauge.
clear cover.
PM
.12
The New Flyer vehicìes descr¡bed in th¡s manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design appl¡cations or registrations in the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" ¡n this manual.
Rev.A-Jan202015
Exhibit
B-4B-4
Exhibit
]\IË\'II FLYEF!
Monthly Preventive Maintenance
2.8. Monthly Preventive Maintenance
2. Park the vehicle
2.8.1. Air Tanks
It is recommended that all air tanks
3. Place the collection cup at each
be
performance of the compressor (excessive
oil passing) and air dyer (saturated desiccant cartridge).
The following factors can influence that
amount of water collected and should be
4. Allow contents in collection cup to
settle
and assess whether fluid is primarily water,
oil, or an emulsion.
5. Evaluate
a. More
ered cause for further inspection of the
air compressor. Worn pistons or rings
will allow oil bypass and may require
assessment:
Í
An outside air source was used to charge
the system and did not pass through the
if
amount of oil bypassed is
Also inspect compressor
discharge line for excessive carbon
repair
air dryer.
excessive.
Exceptionally high air usage, exceeding
buildup.
25% compressor duty cycle due to either
heavy accessory demand or system leak-
b.
manual for procedure.
Daily temperature range exceeds 30'F
(17'C) resulting in condensation. Under
these conditions the presence of small
c.
A
small amount of oil in the system is not
unusual and should not be considered a
reason to replace the desiccant cartridge.
Oil stained desiccant can function adequately.
cant cartridges.
2.8.2.
Fire Extinguisher
lnspect the fire extinguisher every month
as follows:
D
Ensure the fire extinguisher
is
securely
mounted in its proper location.
Perform the air tank drain and collection
process as follows:
1. Obtain Bendix BASIC test kit P/N 5013711
or equivalent.
More than five units of water in a 30 day
period indicates unsatisfactory air dryer
performance. Replace air dryer desic-
amounts of moisture is normal and should
not be considered as an indication that the
air dryer is not functioning properly.
IgNOTE:
More than one unit of water or emulsion
will be cause to conduct an air system
leakage test. Refer to Section I of this
age
D
volume collected as follows:
than one unit of oil in a 30 day
period will require the desiccant cartridges to be changed and is consid-
taken into consideration before making an
fl
drain
valve and slowly drain the air tank. Repeat
this process for all air tanks and collect
total contents in a single collection cup.
drained monthly and a record of the con-
tents collected be recorded. Performing
these inspections on a regular basis will
establish trend monitoring to assess the
on level ground and chock
the wheels.
fl
3
Check that the safety pin lock is installed.
Ensure that the hose is in good condition
and the nozzle is not obstructed.
D
Confirm that the cylinder pressure indicated on the gauge is within the green
operating range.
Rev. A
-Jan202015
patents and design applicatìons or registrations in the United States and Canada,
and ¡n other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" ¡n this manual.
PM
.13
Exhibit B-4
Exhibit B-4
6,000 Miles (9,600 km) Preventive
2.9.
Maintenance
1\l Ë
Vl/ F LY'Ë Fl
alignment, suspension damage
Maintenance
has
occurred or tires are not properly inflated.
Visually check front wheel rims and out-
2.9.1. Disc Brake
Visually check brake pad wear every 6,000
miles (9.600km)or every 3 months, whichever occurs first. Refer to "Brake Pad Wear
lnspection" in Section 1 and 2 of this manual for inspection procedure.
2.9.2.
t
PM
.,I4
side rear wheel rims are not bent, cracked
or damaged.
Pad Inspection
Wheels & Tires lnspection
Visually inspect front tires for unusual
tread wear indicating wheels are out of
D Check tires are same make, model and
size.
n
ú
Check wheels are balanced,
Check wheel nuts are tightened to the
specified torques. Refer to Section 1 and
Section 2 of this manual for specifications.
patents and design appl¡cations or registrations ¡n the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Veh¡cle Patent lnformation" ¡n this manual.
Copyr¡ght O 201 5 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
h'l'Ë
Vt/
'tr
LYË'tr|
6,000 Miles (9,600 km) Preventive Maintenance
û Clogged or dirty breather. Replace as
2.9.3. Transmission lnspection
Every 6,000 miles (9,600 km) ínspect the
transmission for the following conditions:
O Loose bolts (transmission to
required.
¡
engine
attachment and driveline components).
ll
o
Í
Í
Presence of engine coolant in the trans-
Oil leaks (correct immediately).
Worn
Transmission fluid that is discolored, has a
strong odor, or has exceeded oil analysis
limits.
mission fluid.
or frayed electrical harnesses,
NgNOTE:
improper routing. See "Fig. PM-1: Transmission lnspection" on page 15.
Transmission overhaul is required when
the transmisslon has been contaminated
Damaged or loose oil lines.
with engine coolant.
Worn or out-of-phase driveline yokes and
slip joints.
Í
Presence
of
transmission
fluid in
the
engine cooling system.
s0700237b.sv9
Fig.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
PM-1: Transmission lnspection
The New Flyervehlcles described in thls manual may be protected by one or more
and in óther countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Copyright O 201 5 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
PM
.15
Maintenance l\l Ë Vt/
2.9.4. Driveshaft
J
Check the output shaft of the transmission and the pinion shaft of the drive
axle for excessive radial movement.
fl
ALWAYS replace fasteners with new
OEM parts. DO NOT reuse bolts, bearing strap, or locking plate.
a
bent tube, evidence of
missing balance weights, or other dam-
age. Remove any buildup of foreign
material on the shaft.
D
ú
Check that the lugs (ears) of the yokes
on the slip yoke are aligned in the same
plane (in phase) with the lugs (ears) of
the tube yoke. Disassemble and realign
shafts if not found to be in phase.
Visually inspect the torque witness
marks on the driveshaft fasteners. lf the
marks are illegible
misaligned,
replace the fasteners with new OEM
or
PM. 16
lnspect locking plate tabs to ensure
they are properly bent up and securing
the hex bolts on the bearing cups.
lnspect the driveshaft as follows:
Check for
trË
cedure and specifications.
2.9.4.1.lnspection
O
LYË
fasteners, torque to specification, and
apply torque witness mark. Refer to
Section 2 of this manual for torque pro-
NgNOTE:
For initiat run-in period, lubricate driveshaft
upon receipt of vehicle. Thereafter, lubricate every 6,000 miles (9,600 km).
Íf;
Check for play in the universal joint by
inserting a pry bar against the yoke and
prying against the universal joint. Any
lateral or sideways movement of u-joint
cross within the bearing cap exceeding
0.006 inch is cause for rejection.
ú Check for spline wear by manually
applying a push/pull force to the tube
shaft at the juncture of slip spline.
Excessive movement will necessitate
disassembly and further inspection of
the driveshaft to determine cause.
I
lnspect driveshaft guard to ensure it is
undamaged and securely mounted.
ú lnspect
driveshaft access door from
interior of vehicle to ensure that it is
securely latched.
The New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may be protected by one or mo¡"e
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
lx Ë ut/
fä
LYË'F[
2.9.4.2. Lubrication
on
page 91
specification.
in this section for
2.9.5. Steering System lnspection
I9NOTE:
lubricant
ALWAYS check wheel alignment following
replacement of drag link, center link, or tie-
rod ends or any steering components that
UgNOTE:
were damaged.
For initial run-in period, lubricate driveshaft
upon receipt of vehicle and thereafter
inspect and lubricate every 6,000 miles
ú
for any evidence of damage. See "Fig. PM3: Steering Gear lnspection" on page 18.
(9,600 km).
t
Universal Joint - purge lubricate the
universal joint by pumping grease into
the u-joint grease fitting until grease
emerges from the sealing lip. Do not
exceed 5,000 psi grease pressure, othenryise the bearings will be over-pressurized. Refer to Fig. PM-2: "Driveshaft
Lubrication Points" on page 17
Visually inspect all steering components
D
lnspect the steering gear driveshaft for
worn u-joints or loose clamp nuts.
ú
Visually inspect steering gear pitman arm
and ensure retaining nut
is
properly
locked.
O
lnspect the tie-rod ends on the drag link,
steering idler arm, and center link for
excessive play. Use a pry bar to lever the
component and inspect for excessive
movement. Refer to Section 3 of this manual for specific inspection procedures.
DO NOT apply excessive amounts of
UgNOTE:
grease or use high pressure application
Excesslye movement of the tie rod end
typically indicates a worn ball socket and
the tie-rod end will require replacement.
However if movement is due to a loose fit
of the tie-rod end tapered pin in the steering arm, do not attempt to re-tighten the
castle nut. Remove the tie-rod end and
inspect the bore of the steering arm for
when lubricating the
telescoping
spline. Excessive grease can fill the
lube cavity in the yoke end of the tube
and could restrict length compensating
travel.
ú
Telescoping Spline - apply no more
than one ounce of grease at the grease
fitting located on the spline shaft.
wear.
û
Perform a visual torque inspection of all
steering component fasteners, including
the lock nut on the steering stop adjusting
bolt. Ensure that the torque witness marks
are in alignment. Any fastener that has
illegible or missing witness marks should
be re-torqued to specification. Refer to
Section 3 of this manual for torque specifications.
UgNOTE:
lf the witness rnarks are no longer aligned,
it is an
indication that the fastener has
loosened and it will be necessary to
replace the fastener, torque to specification, and reapply torque witness mark.
O
s0l23l1b.wmf
Fig.
lnspect steering gear, hydraulic pump, and
hoses for evidence of leakage.
PM-2: Driveshaft Lubrication Points
Rev.A-Jan202015
The New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may be protected by ons or more
patents and design applications or reg¡strat¡ons in the United States'and Canada,
and in other countr¡es. Réfer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in th¡s manual.
PM-17
Maintenance l\l Ë Vlf F LYË
Ël
!€NOTE:
lf hydraulic fluid appears frothy it is likely
that air is trapped in the system and needs
to be bled. Refer to Secflon 3 of this manual for power steering bleeding procedure.
ALWAYS wipe clean the area around the
filler cap before removing to prevent
contaminants from entering the system.
ú
lnspect hydraulic reservoir fluid level and
condition. Replace fluid if dirt, sludge, or
water is evident in the system.
ú
Check for smooth operation while turning
the steering system through a full left and
full right turn, Ensure that the power steering gear relief valve activates before contacting steering stops. Refer to Section 3 of
this manual if steering stop adjustment is
required.
RETURN
HOSE
PITMAN ARM
RETAINING NUT
SUPPLY
HOSE
DRIVE
SHAFT
DRAG LINK
MOUNTING BOLT
DRIVE
SHAFT
MIÏER
BOX
s0700214a.wmf
Fig.
PM
,18
PM-3: Steering Gear lnspection
Copyr¡ght O 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULc
Rev.A-Jan202015
l\l Ë VTf t LY.Ë
Ftr
2.9.6. Steering Driveshafts
lnspect and lubricate the upper (vertical)
and lower (horizontal) steering driveshafts
every 6,000 miles (9,600 km). See "Fig.
PM-4: Steering Driveshaft lnspection" on
page 19.
END YOKE
END YOKE
END YOKE
END YOKE
MITER BOX
Fig.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
s0700299a.sv9
PM-4: Steering Driveshaft lnspection
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" in this manual.
Copyr¡ghtO 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
PM
.19
Maintenance Í\l Ë llV F LYË
b. No perceptible
2.9.6.1. lnspection
U-joints are not field replaceable, but may
haul.
6. lnspect
a.
on
3. lnspect
See "Fig. PM-7: Steering Driveshaft
the U-joints to ensure that all snap
rings are installed and fully seated within
the groove on the bearing cup. The bearing cup must not protrude any more than
End Yoke lnspection" on page 21.
b.
0.105' beyond the surface of the yoke
play
7.
and
apply lateral side to side force on each
U-joint. Note the total back and forth
movement of the U-joint cross within
the bearing cups. Maximum allowable
end play is 0.012" (0.30 mm). See "Fig.
PM-6: Steering Driveshaft U-Joint
lnspection" on page 21.
Check for excessive movement or backlash in the telescoping slip-joint:
a.
Grasp the male and female members of
the telescoping slip-joint and apply a
back and forth twisting motion while
observing or feeling for movement. See
"Fig. PM-8: Steering Driveshaft Spline
Backlash lnspection" on page 21.
b.
Repeat the previous step on the same
U-joint except apply pressure 90" from
Spline movement should be minimal. lf
the amount of spline movement
is
questionable, remove the steering
driveshaft for closer inspection of the
previous location.
IgNOTE:
telescoping splines.
lf any of the above readings are suspect,
remove the steering driveshaft from the
vehicle and clamp the yoke in a vise and
measure movement with a dial indicator to
confirm.
needle bear-
ings and/or cross trunnions:
.20
is
the attaching component.
movement within the bearing cups:
PM
Spline movement should be minimal. lf
the amount of spline movement
questionable, remove the steering
driveshaft for closer inspection of the
splines as well as the male splines on
bore. See "Fig. PM-5: Snap Ring lnspection" on page 21.
a.
Apply lateral side to side force on each
end yoke and note the deflection in the
area where the end yoke splines are
clamped to the attaching component.
clamp fasteners.
5. lnspect the U-joint for worn
the steering driveshaft end yokes
for excessive play:
any evidence of damage.
b.
an
be serviced by the manufacturer. Contact
Prop Shaft Supply in Elkhorn, Wisconsin
for further information on driveshaft over-
1. Visually inspect the steering driveshafts for
a. Restrain the end yoke from moving
as
I9NOTE:
able limits specific to each area of the
4. lnspect the U-joint cross for end
allowed.
assembly.
mostly to U-joint movement. The following
inspection provides procedures and allow-
2. Visually check torque witness marks
is
Replace steering driveshaft
The steering driveshaft will exhibit a certain amount of movement when rotated or
forced side to side and can be attributed
steering driveshaft. Do not reject the steering driveshaft for overall play unless one or
more of the following inspection points
exceeds maximum allowable limits.
movement
Fl
Apply back and forth rotational force to
the yokes on the U-joint and note any
relative movement between the U-joint
cross and the bearing cups.
lf
telescoping slip-joint
is
disassembled,
check the nylon coating on the splines for
wear, cuts, gouges, or any other damage.
9.
lf damage is evident, the nylon coating
must be stripped from the splines and
reapplied. Contact Prop Shaft Supply in
Elkhorn, Wisconsin for further information
on driveshaft overhaul.
Thè New Flyer veh¡cles descr¡bed in this manual may be protected by one or more
and ¡n other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manuâ1.
Rev.A-Jan202015
lU
ËVtl Ë'LY'Ë Fl
6,000 Miles (9,600 kml Preventive Maintenance
SNAP RING
s0700309a.sv9
Fig. PM-S: Snap Ring lnspection
s0700303a,sv9
Fig.
PM-7: Steering Driveshaft End Yoke
lnspection
\\
.006.---tl F-=
---¡
þ<--.--'006"
1\
1\
1\
FORCE
(â
Fig.
Þ
s070030la.svg
s0700302a.sv9
PM-6: Steering Driveshaft U-Joint lnspection
Fig. PM-B; Steering Driveshaft Spline Backlash
lnspection
Rev. A
-Jan202015
patents and design applications or regiskations in the United States and Canada,
and ¡n other countries. Refer to "Veh¡cle Pâtent lnformation" in this manual.
PM-21
2.9.6.2. Universal Joint Lubrication
1. Locate the grease fittings on the universal
joints at both ends of the driveshaft.
2. Purge lubricate through the grease
fittings
until fresh grease flows out of all four bearing cup seals. Refer ta 2.34. "Fluid & Lubrication Guide" on page 91 in this section for
grease specifications. See "Fig. PM-9:
Maintenance hl Ë Utl F LYË
Ët
3. lf all four bearing cups do not purge lubricate successfully, then it will be necessary
to remove the steering driveshaft from the
vehicle and tap the opposite cap or rotate
the adjacent yoke through its full range of
motion while applying grease.
4. Wipe off excess grease from
universal
joint.
Steering Driveshaft Lubrication Points" on
page 22.
GREASE
FITTING
s0700279a.svg
Fig.
PM.22
PM-9: Steering Driveshaft Lubrication Points
The New Flyer veh¡cles described in this manual may be protected by one or more
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Veh¡cle Patent lnformat¡on" in this manual.
Copyr¡ght @ 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
Rev. A
-Jan 20 2015
hl Ë Vt/
If,
LYË
ËË
2.9.6.3. Telescoping Spline Lubrication
1. Remove the clamping bolt on one end
of
the steering driveshaft and compress the
shaft completely.
2.
GREASE MUST FILL
BETWEEN ALL SEALS
Locate the grease fitting on the driveshaft
slip sleeve and apply grease with B to 10
hand pumps.
3. Fully extend and compress shaft a few
times to ensure grease is applied to full
>YLW
length of spline.
4. Completely
remove yoke shaft and check
the seal of the dust cap, Grease must completely fill between both lips of the seal.
See "Fig. PM-10: Steering Driveshaft Seal
5.
lf dust cap seal is not completely greased,
return the yoke shaft to the compressed
position and repeat greasing procedure.
USNOTE:
Ensure the driveshaft is properly reasse/n-
bled with alignment arrows facing each
other. This will ensure the driveshaft
remains in phase.
6. Wipe off excess grease from the
s0700280a.sv9
Fig. PM-10: Steering Driveshaft Seal lnspection
slip
spline,
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
and ln other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in th¡s manual.
Copyrlght O 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
PM
.23
2.9.7. Steering
Maintenance N Ë Ut/ t Llf Ë Ë!
Damper
lnspect the steering damper every 6,000
miles (9,600 km)as follows:
Í
Check for excessive play at ball joints
ends. See "Fig. PM-11: Steering Damper
Í
lnspect for any external damage to cylinder
or piston rod. Replace damper if bent or
damaged.
D
Check for evidence of leakage. Replace
damper if leaking.
ú
lnspect condition of protective sleeve on
cylinder and ensure it can move freely and
extend approximately 2 inches from cylinder.
O
lnspect exterior surfaces for evidence of
corrosion. Clean light surface rust, other-
METAL PROTECTIVE
SLEEVE
wise replace damper if badly corroded.
¡SwOTE:
If
maintenance records indicate that the
vehicle is experiencing front end steering
shimmy, then a cylinder damping inspection should be performed.
PM -24
s1 34901
a.svg
Fig. PM-11: Steering Damper lnspection
The New Flyer vehicles descr¡bed ¡n th¡s manual may be protectêd by one or more
patents and design applications or reg¡strations ¡n the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Veh¡cle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
copyright O 2015 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
Rev.A-Jan202015
hl Ë W Ë LYË
ËË
2.9.7.1, Cylinder Damping Inspection
1. Remove steering damper from vehicle.
Refer to Section 3 of this manual for
removal procedure.
2. Hold the steering
damper in a vertical position with the oil chamber at the bottom.
9. The
piston rod must not travel more than
0.118 in. (3.0 mm) before damping resistance is felt. Replace steering damper if
free travel (slip) exceeds these limits.
on vehicle.
Refer to Section 3 of this manual for installation procedure.
l0.Reinstall steering damper
3. Extend the piston rod fully by hand.
4. Operate the steering damper twice through
its full range of travel in both compression
and extension strokes.
5. Hold the steering damper
fully extended in
the vertical position for at least one minute.
METAL PROTECTIVE
SLEEVE FULLY EXTENDED
U€NOTE:
Ensure that no pressure is applied to the
piston rod while it is in the extended vertical position. The plastic protective s/eeye
should also be in the fully extended position.
SCRIBED LINE
6. Slowly compress the piston rod into the
cylinder while noting both the resistance
and distance travelled. Stop compressing
PLASTIC PROTECTIVE
SLEEVE
the piston once resistance is felt.
7.
Mark the position of resistance by scribing
a line on the plastic protective sleeve that
coincides with the position of the metal
OIL CHAMBER
protective sleeve.
8.
Retract the piston upwards until the plastic
protective sleeve is fully extended. Measure the distance between the edge of the
metal protective sleeve and the mark
scribed on the plastic protective sleeve.
See "Fig. PM-12: Damper Measurement"
on page 25.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
sl 34902a.svg
Fig. PM-12: Damper Measurement
The New FIyer vehicles described in th¡s manual may be protected by one or more
and ¡n other countr¡es. Refer to "Veh¡cle Patent lnformation" ln this manual.
Copyright @ 2015 New Flyer lndusk¡es Canada ULC
PM
.25
2.9.8.
Maintenance f\l Ë,Vtf F LYË
5.
Engine Oil & Filter Change
UgNOTE:
Engine oil and filter change intervals are
based on average vehicle speed. Refer to
2.9.8.1. "Engine Oil Change lntervals" on
page 27 in this section and use whichever
interval is the shortesf. O/ may be blown
out through the crankcase breather if the
crankcase is overfilled.
Ft
Fill the replacement filter with clean engine
oil. Apply a thin film of lubricating oil to the
filter gasket and to the gasket sealing surface.
6. lnstall
the filter on the engine. Follow the
directions on the label for correct installation. Do not over{ighten.
7. Clean the engine oil pan drain
plug
threads, lnstall the drain plug. Torque the
plug on installation 60 ft-lb. (81 Nm).
1.
Run the engine until its operating temperatures reaches 140'F (60"C). Stop the
engine.
2.
Remove the oil drain plug from the bottom
of the oil pan. See "Fig. PM-13: Engine Oil
Filter" on page 26.
3. Allow the oil to drain into a suitable
con-
tainer.
4.
Clean the area around the oil filter head.
Remove the filter and clean the gasket
area.
B. Fill the engine with new oil. Refer lo 2.34.
"Fluid & Lubrication Guide" on page 91 in
this section for oil specification. Engine
capacity is 25.2 quarts U.S. (23.8 liters).
9. Start the engine and
inspect for leaks at
the filter and at the drain plug.
10.Stop the engine. Wait 15 minutes to allow
the oil to settle. Correct any leaks.
11.Check the oil level on the dipstick. Add oil
as required to bring the level to the high
mark on the dipstick.
IgNOTE:
The gasket can stick to the filter head.
Ensure it is removed.
I€NOTE:
Refer to the Cummins Operation & Mainte-
nance Manual for further engine related
preventive mai nte n ance ope ration s.
DRAIN
PLUG
(oPPOSTTE SrDE)
ENGINE
OIL FILTER
s0700220b.wmf
Fig. PM-13: Engine Oil Filter
PM
.26
patents and deslgn applications or reg¡strations in the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" in th¡s manual.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
l\l Ë \t1/
Sf,
LY'Ë
Fl
2.9.8.1, Engine Oil Change lntervals
AVERAGE VEHICLE
SPEED
10
Mileage (km)
- 15 mph (16 -24kmlh)
6,000 (e,600)
- 10 mph (13 - 16 km/h)
5,000 (8,000)
6 - B mph (9.6 - 13 km/h)
4,000 (6,400)
4 - 6 mph (6.4 - 9.6 km/h)
3,000 (4,800)
2 - 4 mph (3.2 - 6.4 km/h)
1,500 (2,400)
B
2.9.9. Primary (Suction)
Fuel Filter
Replacement
Replace the fuel filter element every 6,000
miles (9,600 km) every six months, or 500
operating hours, whichever comes first.
Replace the element earlier if plugging is
indicated by the fuel level rising in the filter
near the top of the element. See "Fig. PM14: Engine Fuel Filters" on page 28.
1. Place a clean container under the filter.
Open the drain valve at the base of the
processor and drain the fuel until it is
below the level of the collar.
2.
3.
Close the drain valve and using the filter
collar wrench, remove the collar by turning
counter-clockwise. Remove the cover and
filter element. Remove and retain the large
sealing grommet at the base of the element. lt will be reused.
Dispose of the filter element in an environmentally responsible manner, according to
applicable government environmental regulations.
4. Check to make sure the fuel level is near
the top of the elliptical port on the processor.
5. After making sure the new O-ring seal is
properly positioned at the base of the
the base of the new element. lnstall the
element on the center stud of the processor and replace the cover and collar.
Tighten the collar by hand until secure.
NgNOTE:
To avoid cover or collar damage, DO NOT
use the collar wrench or any other tool to
tighten the collar.
6. Remove
the vent cap from the top of the
clear cover by turning the vent
cap
counter-clockwise. Fill the clear cover full
of clean fuel. Reinstall the vent cap with a
new O-ring and tighten by hand only.
IgNOTE:
To avoid cover or vent cap damage, DO
NOï use tools to tighten the vent cap.
7. Start the engine. When the lubrication sys-
tem reaches its normal operating pressure,
increase engine speed to high idle for 2to
3 minutes.
NgNOTE:
The clear filter cover will not fill completely
during the engine operation. lt will gradually fill over time and the fuel level will rise
as the filter media become clogged.
cover, insert the filter sealing grommet into
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may bê protectèd by one or more
patents and design applications or regÌstrat¡ons in the United States and Canada,
and in other counkies. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" in th¡s manual.
PM.27
Maintenance l\l E Vll F LYË
Ël
DETAILA
PRIMARY FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLY
SECONDARY
FUEL FILTER
PRIMARY
FUEL FILTER
s0700230a.sv9
Fig. PM-14: Engine Fuel Filters
PM - 28
The New Flyer vehicles described ¡n this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and'design applicat¡ons or registrat¡ons Ìn ttíe uriiteo States'and
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" ¡n this manual.
canada,
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
An'Ë'\Äl F
LYË Ft
2.9.10. Secondary (Pressure) Fuel Filter
2.9.10.'t.Fuel System Priming
Replacement
Replace the secondary fuel filter every
6,000 miles (9,600 km), six months, or 500
operating hours, whichever occurs first.
DO NOT open the high pressure fuel
system with the engine running, High
pressure fuel spray can cause serious
injury or death.
UgNOTE:
The fuel filter is a non-serviceable spin-on
type. DO NOT attempt to clean and reuse
the filter assembly.
DO NOT attempt to pre-fill the secondary filter element prior to starting the
engine. Filling the filter through the
center opening will allow a certain
amount of fuel to bypass the 5 micron
filter media withín the filter, thereby
allowing unfiltered fuel into the fuel
system and possibly leading to engine
Glean the fuel filter head and surround-
ing area to prevent the introduction of
contaminants into the fuel system.
L
Use a filter strap wrench to unscrew the fil-
ter assembly from the filter head. Discard
fuel pump or injector damage.
the filter.
2. lnspect the filter head
Always prime the fuel system prior to starting the engine to avoid excessive cranking
intervals, erratic engine operation, or setting engine fault codes. Proceed as fol-
to see whether the
filter seal ring is stuck to the sealing surface of the filter head. Remove the seal
ring with an O-ring pick, if necessary.
lows:
1.
Locate the engine run switch in the engine
to the
REAR position.
compartment and set the switch
DO NOT pre-fill the secondary fuel filter
prior to installation. ALWAYS use the
engine lift pump to prime the fuel system before starting the engine,
lnspect new filter to ensure the center seal
ring is installed on the filter spud.
4.
lnstall the filter in accordance with the
instructions provided with the filter. Do not
over tighten the filter.
Prime the fuel system. Refer to 2.9.10.1.
"Fuel System Priming" on page 29 in this
section for procedure.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
2.
Allow the engine lift pump to cycle for
approximately 30 seconds before it automatically shuts off.
the run switch from REAR to OFF
and then back to REAR position again.
The lift pump should cycle for another 30
3. Reset
seconds, Repeat this process three or four
times to allow purging all the air from the
fuel filter and lines.
+. Start the engine and operate at fast idle to
purge any remaining air from the system.
The New Flyervehicles described in this manual may be protecled by one or more
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in th¡s manual.
Copyright O 201 5 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
PM
.29
Maintenance l\l Ë \lV F LYË
3. lnspect underside of filler cap for a buildup
2.9.11. Exhaust System
of dirt or DEF crystals. Clean filler cap as
necessary. Refer to 2.9.12.1. "Filler Cap
Cleaning" on page 30 in this section for
cleaning procedure.
lnspect the condition of the exhaust system components every 6,000 miles (9,600
km) as follows:
û
usNore:
lnspect muffler for any damage to body,
sensors, wiring, or mounting brackets.
t
FI
The filler cap may be replaced separately
if
lnspect exhaust blankets for proper instal-
damaged. Refer to your New Flyer Parts
lation, ensuring no cuts, tears, or other
Manual for part number.
damage exists.
O
lnspect exhaust tubes for dents, cracks,
leaks, or restrictions.
D
2.9.1
2,l.Filler Cap Cleaning
1. lnspect the immediate area around
mulations of dirt or crystals from the immediate area so as to prevent contamination
from entering the tank when the filler cap is
removed.
ment procedure.
ü
Ensure all exhaust clamps are properly
tightened.
ú
Ensure
all
exhaust system mounting
brackets and component fasteners are
the
filler cap and adapter. Wipe off any accu-
lnspect exhaust flex connector for proper
alignment and any evidence of damage.
Refer to Section 4 of this manual for align-
2. Remove the lanyard
by sliding the end over
the tap on filler cap.
3. Rotate the cap counter-clockwise until it
comes to a stop. Pull filler cap from DEF
properly tightened.
tank adapter.
2.9.12. DEF Tank
4. Place the cap in a pan of
clean, warm
water filled such that the level of the water
is halfway between the bottom of the blue
base and the surface of the cap imprinted
with the words "DEF ONLY'.
¡gNOTE:
The DEF tank inspection interval will be
dependent on operating and environmental conditions. Adjust to a more frequent
inspection interval if tank exterior is very
dirty or if filler cap has a heavy deposit of
DEF crystals.
UgNOTE:
Ensure that the cap is not completely
immersed in the water as fhls may affect
the venting capabilities of the cap.
lnspect the DEF tank every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km)as follows:
1. lnspect security of DEF tank mounts
tightness of fittings, hoses, clamps,
5. Allow the filler cap to soak in the water for
approximately five minutes.
and
and
6. Remove
the filler cap from the water and
shake to remove excess water, lf any DEF
electrical connector.
crystals remain on the sealing surface of
2. lnspect
exterior of DEF tank for cleanliness
and clean as necessary. Use a low pressure setting and maintain a distance of at
least 18" if using pressure wash equipment. DO NOT direct pressure spray at the
filler cap/adapter interface.
the cap, wipe the sealwith a damp cloth.
7. Wipe the tank adapter with a damp
cloth
and place the filler cap onto the adapter.
8.
Rotate the filler cap clockwise until the stop
is contacted.
9. Reattach the lanyard
by sliding the small
opening of the lanyard over the tap on the
cap. Ensure the lanyard is fully seated in
the groove of the tab.
PM
.30
patents and design applications or reg¡strations in the United States and Canada,
and ¡n other countr¡es. Rofer to "Veh¡cle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Rev.A-Jan2O2015
N Ë \Jt/ Ë LYË
Fl
2.9.13. Shock Absorber lnspection
D
Every 6,000 miles (9,600 km) check for
and replace all shock absorbers damaged
or leaking oil. Check the rubber mounting
bushings and replace them if worn. Ensure
the shock absorber mounting brackets are
tight and the shock absorber is not striking
or rubbing the frame or some other part of
the chassis.
watch for appearance of soap bubbles. No
leakage is permissible. lf leakage is evident, rubber air springs must be replaced.
O
seen when the shock is fully extended and
one lnspecfs as far up the main body of the
shock (underneath the dust cover or tube)
as possrb/e. Misting shocks are often misdiagnosed as failures. A misting shock will
form a film on the entire outside of the
shock body. Misting is perfectly normaland
a necessary function of the shock.
D
2.9,16. Front & Rear Axles & Suspension
Í
The air suspension sysfem requires no
t
Examine air springs assembly for evidence
of cracks, punctures, deterioration, or chafing. Replace with new air springs if any
damage is evident. Any surface on upper
and lower retainers or on piston that
touches air springs should be smooth and
free of sharp edges that might cause
breaks or damage air springs. Check
threads on studs.
Visually inspect all suspension bushings
and rubber components for cracks, tears,
separation or other damage.
t
lnspect center link, drag link, and tie-rod
ends for excessive play. Use a pry bar to
lever the component and inspect for excessive movement. Refer to Section 1 and 2 of
this manual for specific inspection procedures.
2,9.15. Air Springs
Iubrication.
Visually inspect all axle and suspension
components for any evidence of damage.
Refer to Section 3 of this manual for procedures.
U€NOTE:
Check for tightness on all mounting hardware. Retorque to the proper specifications. Refer to "Suspension Torque
Specifications" in Section 1 and 2 of this
manual for correct values. Do not overtighten.
Every 6,000 miles (9,600 km) or after ser-
vice of air suspension components check
the vehicle's ride height. Measure the ride
height for the front and rear suspension.
maximum
diameter. Make sure contact doesn't exist
between any air system component and
the outside diameter of the air spring.
D
2.9.14. Ride Height
Check to see that there is sufficient clearance around the complete circumference
of the air spring while at its
IgNOTE:
A leaking shock will show clear sþns of
fluid leaking in streams from the upper
sea/. ïhese sfreams can most easily be
Check for air leakage at all air springs
upper and lower mountings. Coat mountings with soap and water solution and
D
Perform a visual torque inspection of all
axle and suspension fasteners. Ensure
that the torque witness marks are in alignment. Any fastener that has illegible or
missing witness marks should
be
re-
torqued to specification. Refer to Section 1
and 2 of this manual for torque specifications.
¡gNOTE:
lf the witness marks are no longer aligned,
indication that the fastener has
loosened and it will be necessary to
replace the fastener, torque to specifica-
it is an
tion, and reapply torque witness mark.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
Thê New Flyer veh¡cles descr¡bed ¡n this manual may be protected by one or more
and ¡n other countr¡es. Refer to "Veh¡cle Patent lnformat¡on" in this manual.
PM .31
Maintenance l\l ËVt/ F LYË
D
2.9.17. Radius Rods
N9NOTE:
The radius rods are of similar configuration
except for the upper radius rod on the front
axle which does nof have tubular construction, replaceable bushings, nor snap-rings.
All other inspection criteria apply.
D
Visually inspect torque witness marks on
ú
ment. Replace bushing and inspect condi-
cantly.
D
lf excessive wear, corrosion or other dam-
age is noted in the snap-ring groove or
bore of the radius rod during the course of
bushing replacement, then the radius rod
should be replaced as an assembly.
torque
specifications.
2.9.18. Air System Functional Tests
ú
Visually inspect radius rod tubes for deformation. Replace radius rod as an assembly if tube is deformed.
t
lnspect bushings for wear by using a pry
bar. Apply force both axially and laterally
while observing movement. Any excessive
relative movement between the rubber
component of the bushing and the crosspin and/or the eye of the radius rod is
Refer to Section
dures,
IgNOTE:
lf axial or lateral
movement ls suspecf,
remove radius rod from vehicle and con-
firm excesslve bushing movement by
clamping cross-prn in a vise and moving
radius rod through its operating range.
Visually inspect rubber component of
bushing for cracks or separation. Small
cracks are acceptable. Separation of the
rubber from the metal cover plate or crosspin is acceptable providing the separation
does not exceed 1/3 of the circumference
of the bushing.
I
of this manual for proce-
2.9.19. Driver's Window
lnspect the driver's window every 6,000
tl
Slide the forward sash fully aft and ensure
the sash slides smoothly and makes con-
cause for bushing replacement.
Í
lnspect snap-ring to ensure it is installed
and fully seated. Check for shiny wear
marks as evidence of snap-ring move-
tion of snap-ring groove if snap-ring is
missing, broken, or has rotated signifi-
fasteners. lf witness marks are not legible,
then apply specified torque and paint a witness mark across fastener. Refer to Sec-
tion 1 & 2 of this manual for
lnspect the metal cover plate of the bushing for cracks. Replace bushing if cover
plate is cracked.
lnspect all radius rods every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km) as follows:
Fl
tact with the window stop.
f
lnspect the condition of the weather-stripping in the lower window channel/track.
Clean window channel/track by vacuuming.
0
lnspect the interior and exterior handles to
ensure they are securely mounted.
2.9.20. Window Emergency Release System
Every 6,000 miles (9,600 km) check and
clean the emergency release system of the
side windows. The emergency release
system must be free of excessive build-up
(road salt, dirt and so forth). See "Fig. PM-
15: Window Emergency Release"
on
page 33.
PM
.32
The New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may be protected by ons or more
patents and design applications or registrations in lhe United States and Canada,
and in othe¡'countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Rev.A-Jan202015
hl Ë vv
r uYË Ël
2.9.21. lnterior & Exterior Access Doors
Every 6,000 miles (9,600 km) lubricate the
piano hinges and latch mechanisms. Refer
to Sections 12 or 13 of this manual for
panel repair procedures.
HOLD DOWN WHILE
PUSHING BOTTOM
OF WINDOW OUT
2.9.22. Roof Vent/Hatch
D
At each vehicle cleaning interval use a mild
soap and water solution to clean the venU
hatch surfaces and components. Do not
use solvents or petroleum based cleaners
or coatings. Do not lubricate its
moving
parts.
3
lnspect the venUhatch moving parts every
6,000 miles (9,600 km). Make sure the
latches close and fasten securely. The
latches must fasten securely, with no slack
or looseness. lf the attaching
hardware
cannot be tightened, replace the applicable
latch parts using new hardware and fasteners. See "Fig.PM-16: Roof Hatch
op280la.wmf
Fig. PM-15: Window Emergency Release
Í
ln cold climates, check daily and remove
any accumulated ice and snow that may
restrict movement of the venVhatch.
HINGE & LOCK
MECHANISM
Fig.
Rev.
A -Jan202015
s07002f la.wmf
PM-16: Roof Hatch lnspection
The New Flyer vehicles described in thìs manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrations in the Unlted States and Canada,
PM-33
Maintenance l\l ËMl t LYË
fl
2.9.23. Splash Guards
O
Check splash guards every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km)for loose bolts and damage.
O
Tighten loose bolts and replace any unserwithin
Í
lnspect seats for rips or tears. Repair,
a clean, damp cloth and allow to dry.
grit
from the wiper blade.
tl
as
For dirt and general spot removal, fiberglass, composite resin and stainless steel
may be cleaned with a non-abrasive, mild
household detergent. Test a small, inconspicuous area prior to cleaning. Wipe with
Check wiper operation and condition.
dirt and
replace
2,9.26.1.General Cleaning
2.9.24. Windshield Wiper & Washer
Remove any accumulated
or
patch or replace as required.
specifications.
ú
Í
Check the mounting hardware for tightness
and securíty. Tighten
required.
viceable guards.
O Check that ground clearance is
Fl
I€NOTE:
on fiberglass or
Check that the washer system emits an
Leaving any chemical
adequate flow of washer fluid.
composite resin for extended periods can
result in damage to the surface. ALWAYS
2.9.25. Driver's Seat
rinse with water after cleaning.
lnspect the driver's seat every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km)as follows:
û
D
2.9.26.2.Tou9h Stain & Graffiti Removal
Markings and stains from permanent
marker and other compounds like shoe
polish or nail polish can be removed from
fiberglass, composite resin and stainless
steel materials with the following agents
lnspect seat mounting points and ensure
fasteners are properly tightened.
lnspect seat belt (if equipped) and ensure
webbing
is in good condition and belt
latches and releases properly.
D
fl
lnspect seat track for cleanliness and lubricate if required.
Check operation
of all seat adjustment
controls to ensure they function properly
throughout their full range of adjustment.
fl
Check seat cover for abnormal wear, tears,
or deterioration.
3
Clean seat as required using a mild detergent and warm water, followed by a clean
water rinse. Do not use harsh chemicals.
2.9.26. Passenger Seats
lnspect the passenger seats every 6,000
PM
.34
(or equivalents):
O
Crown Anti-Vandal Spray 5062 (contains
VOC's)
D TSW9 Plasti-Master (does not
contain
VOC's)
IgNOTE:
For Vision Seafs, Scofch-Brite pads can be
used to remove graffiti markings and return
the surface to its original appearance.
2.9.26.3.Vacuum Formed Plastic Components
Use TSW9 Plasti-Master when removing
graffiti markings from vacuum-formed plastic components.
patents and design applicât¡ons or registralions in the United States and Canada,
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Veh¡cle Patent lnformatìon" in this manual.
Copyright O 2015 New Flyer lndustnes Canada ULC
Rev.A -Jan202O15
T\t
Ë
Vtl #r,LVË'Ël
2.9.30. Exterior Panels
2.9.26.4.Upholstery Care
D
Every 6,000 miles (9,600 km) inspect the
sealant and caulking of the exterior panel
seams, and wheel-housings.
where substance has failed.
Regularly remove all dust and loose dirt
from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Always begin with lukewarm water
and a white cloth for stain removal before
mended type. DO NOT use substitutes.
Use only the recommended type of
sealant, caulk or adhesive. Refer to
Section 13 of this manual for recom-
Í
applying any cleaning agent. Use foam
upholstery cleaner or a mild household
detergent and first testing in a small area.
paint failure, or corrosion.
IgNOTE:
lncrease inspection frequency in freezing
weather, due to the effect of road deicing
materials (salt, calcium chloride and so
2.9.27. Stanchions & Grab Rails
lnspect stanchions and grab rails for secu-
rity of attachment and any evidence of
damage. Tighten any loose hardware.
Replace any damaged components.
Restraints
Clean the entire vehicle thoroughly to
inspect for paint condition and for metal
corrosion damage. Pay particular attention
to the lower panels. Repair any areas with
Flush the area with water after cleaning.
forth) on metal.
I
Protect painted surfaces with a coating of
wax immediately after the vehicle
Clean belts as required using mild soap
and water. Do not use solvents, chemical
solutions or strong detergents. lf required,
soak belts for several hours in water to
loosen dirt. Clean, rinse and dry thor-
has
been cleaned.
Perform the following activities every 6,000
miles (9,600 km):
0
Replace
Extreme care should be taken when
selecting a cleaning agent. Solventbased cleaners should be avoided.
Some solutions may leave a residue or
discolor the material. Test an inconspicuous area prior to cleaning and follow the manufacturer's directions.
ffit
When cleaning the painted surfaces of
the vehicle, use a cleaning agent that
will not harm the acrylic finish or fiberglass panels. (for example soap and
water).
oughly before returning to service.
D
Lubricate the tiedown belt buckles at the
hinges being careful not to contaminate
the webbing.
2.9.29. lnterior Panels
lnspect panels for scuffs, cracks and other
forms of damage. Clean panels and repair
any defects. Refer to Section 12 of this
manual for further information on the interior panels.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
2.9.31. Mirrors
Lubricate the pivot arms of all exterior mirrors fitted with grease fittings every 6,000
miles (9,600 km). Lubrications interval may
need to be adjusted to suit operating con-
ditions. Locate the grease fitting at the
pivot arm and use a hand-operated grease
gun to apply approximately
I
pumps of
grease or until grease comes out between
bracket and arm. Use Mobil XHP222 mullipurpose grease or equivalent.
Copyr¡ght O 20'15 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
PM
.35
Maintenance hl Ë lJt/ t LY Ë Fl
Check the battery cable ends on the battery posts. To ensure good contact, these
2.9.32. Battery System
must be tightened firmly.
ALWAYS replace batteries with the
same type and size identified in your
New Flyer Parts Manual and charge the
batteries using the recommended
voltage. Over-charging a lead acid
battery can produce explosive and
hazardous gas. Any change in battery
configuration may require modification
to the charging system voltage levels
and battery service procedures to
prevent over-charging and equipment
damage. Consult the batter
manufacturer's recommendations
before installing replacement
components.
t
Check external condition of battery and
battery cables periodically. lf required,
wash exterior with a dilute solution of
ammonia or soda to neutralize acid, then
flush off with clean water. Keep vent plugs
tight to keep neutralizing solution out of
cells. Tighten hold-down nuts to prevent
batteries from shaking but not so tight as to
strain battery case. See "Fig. PM-17: Battery Tray" on page 36.
for post or cable end corrosion. lf
corrosion exists disconnect cables from
the posts and clean both with soda solution and a wire brush. lnstall ends and
aI Check
tighten firmly, then coat with dielectric
grease.
Check battery for obvious damage such
as, cracked case (shows loss of electrolyte), or damaged, cracked, or loose terminal posts.
lf obvious damage is noted, replace battery.
lf no obvious damage is noted, check electrolyte level.
lf electrolyte level is above top of plates in
all cells, conduct specific gravity test. Refer
to Section 9 of this manual for procedure.
lf electrolyte level is below specified level in
one or more cells, add water to proper levels, then charge for 15 minutes at 15 to 25
amperes, with vent caps removed. Connect a 300 ampere load to battery for 15
to remove electrolyte surface
charge. Conduct specific gravity test. Refer
seconds
CABLE HANGER
BATTERY
HOLDOWN
RETAINER
POSITIVE CABLES
BATTERY COVER
FILLER CAP
s02966la.wmf
Fig. PM-17: Battery Tray
PM-36
patents and des¡gn applications or reg¡strat¡ons in the Un¡ted States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Veh¡cle Patent lnformation" in th¡s manual,
CopyrightO 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
Rev. A
-Jan202015
l\l'Ë VI/ F LYË
Ël
2.9.33. Wheelchair Ramp lnspection
lnspect
&
J
lubricate the wheelchair ramp
lnspect electrical harnesses and hydraulic
hoses for condition and secure attachment.
mechanism every 6,000 miles (9,600 km).
D lnspect fluid level in reservoir. Top up as
required.
2.9.33.1,Mechanism
Í
required. Refer to Section 20 of this manual for inspection and adjustment procedure.
ú
lnspect and tighten mounting hardware as
lnspect and adjust chain tension as
lnspect ramp pump electrical connectors
for condition and security. See "Fig. PM18: Wheelchair Ramp lnspection" on
required.
ú
Ensure stowed proximity switch is functioning and is positioned to activate at 15' from
the STOWED position.
page 37.
RESERVOIR
NLUBRICATE
IDLER SPROCKET
BRONZE BUSHING
s0700252a.sv9
Fig. PM-18: Wheelchair Ramp lnspection
Rev.
A -Jan202015
and in othercountries. Refer to "Vehiclé Patent lnformatìon" ¡n this manual.
PM
.37
2.9.33.2,Lubrication
page 91 in this section for lubricant
specification. Clean existing lubricated surfaces of any dirt, grime, or dried lubricant
and then apply fresh lubricant to the following areas:
on
ú
Í
Drive chain rollers and side plates.
Teflon sleeve bushings located on the ten-
sioner blocks.
PM-38
Maintenance l\l,Ë M/
Ë
LYË
ËË
D Teflon sleeve bushings located on the LH
and RH ramp pivots.
I
Bronze bushing located on idler sprocket.
õ
Hydraulic cylinder pivot,
t
Between the sliding surfaces of the mechanism (slots in the support plates and flats
on the push shaft and clevis shaft).
t
Hydraulic cylinder pivot points.
Operate the wheelchair ramp through several cycles to distribute the lubricant into
the working surfaces.
The New Flyer vehicles describsd in th¡s manual may be protected by one or more
patents and des¡gn applications or registrations in the Unitêd States and Canada,
and ¡n other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" In this manual.
Copyright @ 201 5 New Flyer Industr¡es Canada ULC
Rev.A-Jan202015
hl Ë l,ñ/ F LY-Ë
Ël
J
2.9.34. Driver's Heater/Defroster
lnspect electrical plugs for clean contacts.
Check wiring for proper routing and for any
evidence of rubbing.
u lnspect condition of coolant hoses and
ensure all hoses clamps are properly tightened.
Reposition Battery Disconnect switch
to OFF before servícing
heater/
defroster electrical components to
avoid shorts,
D
Lubricate and adjust the cables and switch
hook-ups. Cable ends and switch hookups can be accessed by opening the
defroster access door and removing the
defroster cover. See "Fig. PM-19:
Defroster lnspection" on page 39.
O lnspect air filter. Clean or replace
required.
as
ú
lnspect defroster outlet louvers on dash for
obstructions or damage. Clean or replace
louvers as necessary.
NgNOTE:
Use a bright light when inspecting louvers
screen is not
blocked or damaged. Remove louver to
to ensure defroster duct
access screen and clean or replace screen
as necessarj4
DRIVER'S HEATER/
DEFROSTER UNIT
(FRONT COVER
REMOVED)
OUTLET DUCT
TO DRIVER'S CLIMATE
CONTROL PANEL
BLOWER
HOUSING
HEATER
cotL
COOLANT TEMP
CONTROL CABLE
DRAIN
PET COCK
DAMPER CONTROL
CABLE
AIR FILTER
DRIVE
MOTOR
HEAT
CONTROL
ACCESS DOOR
VALVE
s070075a.wmf
Fig.
Rev. A
-Jan202015
PM-19: Defroster lnspection
The New Flyer vehicles descr¡bèd in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design appl¡cations or registrat¡ons ¡n the Un¡ted States and Canada,
and ìn other countriès. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
PM-39
2.9.35. HVAC Return Air Filter
Maintenance l\t ËUI/ t LYË
2.9.36, HVAG Fresh Air Filter
IgNOTE:
Clean or replace filter as required every
6,000 miles (9,600 km). See "Fig. PM-20:
The HVAC fresh air filter can be accessed
either from the interior of the vehicle
through the HVAC return air access doo6
or from the rooftop of the vehicle through
the HVAC cover.
HVAC Return Air Filter" on page 40.
1. Locate the HVAC return air grille on the
ceiling of the vehicle.
2.
Unlatch the return air grille and allow the
grille to swing downward.
3.
Clean or replace filter as required every
Reach up and release the shock cord from
the filter frame.
4. Remove the filter from the filter frame.
5. Remove accumulated debris by blowing
compressed air in direction opposite to
normal air flow.
6.
7.
Ët
Wash filter in warm soapy water, rinse, and
allow to dry.
6,000 miles (9,600 km).
1.
Remove the HVAC return air filter. Refer to
2.9.35, "HVAC Return
Air Filter" on
page 40 in this section for removal instructions.
2. Locate the HVAC fresh air filter on the
streetside of the HVAC compartment.
Grasp the center of the filter and bow it
outward to release the filter edges from the
mounting channel.
lnstallation is the reverse of removal.
3. Remove accumulated debris by blowing
compressed air in direction opposite to
normal air flow.
4.
Wash filter in warm soapy water, rinse, and
allow to dry.
5.
lnstallation is the reverse of removal.
s0700231a.svg
Fig.
PM
.40
PM-20: HVAC Return Air Filter
patents and design applicat¡ons or registrations ¡n the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Pâtent lnformation" ln this manual.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
l\t Ë \
r F LYË Ël
ü
2.9.37. Rear Axle Breather Tube
DO NOT attempt to shorten or otherwise relocate the breather tube. The
votume inside the tube acts as an
expansion reservoir and must be at
least 5 ft, (f .5 m) in length.
Í
Check that the breather tube is securely
attached to the elbow located on top of the
differential housing and is attached to the
breather membrane, located on the stree!
side suspension support, See "Fig. PM-21:
Rear Axle Breather lnspection"
page 41,
on
Clean any sludge or debris accumulation
from the breather membrane outlet and
ensure that the tube is clear. Replace the
breather membrane (valve) if clogged,
dirty, or oil soaked. Refer to 2.9.37.1.
"Breather Valve Replacement" on page 41
in this section for procedure.
2.9.37
.l.Breather Valve Replacement
1. Remove the breather tube from the valve
by pushing the collar on the valve towards
the valve body. Maintain pressure on the
collar while pulling out the tube.
2.
lnspect the end ofthe breathertube before
installing new breather valve, Tubing end
must be cut square and free from any burrs
or rough edges.
3. Push tube into breather
valve until seated.
BRACKET
s07002l2a.wmf
Fig. PM-21: Rear Axle Breather lnspection
Rev.A -Jan202015
patents and design appl¡cat¡ons or registrâtions ¡n the United Stales and Canada,
PM .41
2.9.38. Engine Compartment Line Routing
Inspection
Perform a visual inspection on the condition and routing of all engine compartment
Maintenance l\l Ë Vtf fi LYË
d.
e.
f.
ment lines may be defined as all rigid steel
g.
h.
lines and copper tubing, flexible lines,
hoses, and tubing as well as electrical
cables and harnesses. This inspection
applies to all lines used in the fuel, air,
hydraulic, lubricating, cooling, electrical,
and HVAC systems. Open all engine compartment doors and inspection panels to
allow complete inspection of the area. lt
may be necessary to raise the vehicle to
properly inspect all lines.
2,9.38.1 .Line Condition lnspection
1. lnspect all rigid lines for condition.
Repair
or replace the line íf any of the following
conditions are evident:
a. Abraded or fretted surfaces
b. Kinked or deformed tubing
c. Corrosive pitting
d. Loose mounting flanges or connectors
e. Fluid or air leakage
f.
Excessive buildup of oily residue, dirt or
road grime. Clean as required.
2. lnspect all flexible
a.
b. Crushed, kinked, distorted, or twisted
hose.
c,
PM.42
Cracked
or corroded fìttings/connec-
Fluid or air leakage.
Excessive buildup oily of oily residue,
dirt or road grime. Clean as required.
lnspect exhaust bellows for correct alignment with exhaust tubes on either side of
bellows. Examine the tubes and bellows
from above and below, with a 90" angle
between the viewing points. The exhaust
tubes on either side of the bellows must be
aligned parallel with each other and dis-
play no offset. Convolutions of bellows
must be evenly spaced from one end of the
bellows to the other. Replace bellows if it is
torn or otherwise damaged. Refer to Section 4 of this manual for further information
on this equipment.
all power cables and wiring harnesses for condition. Repair or replace the
cabfe, harness, and/or protective covering
if any of the following conditions are evident:
4. lnspect
a. Loose or corroded connections
b. Damaged or missing protective
insula-
tor boots on positive terminals of power
cables.
c.
Lack of dielectric grease on exposed
power cable terminals. Clean terminals
and reapply dielectric grease.
dition. Repair or replace the line if any of
Cut, abraded, or frayed protective cover
(includes textile, polyester, or steel
braid as well as silicone firesleeving).
Loose mounting flanges or fittings/con-
tors.
lines and hoses for con-
the following conditions are evident:
Blistered, soft, or deteriorated hose.
nectors
lines every 6,000 miles (9,600 km) or
whenever line or harness maintenance/
replacement has occurred. For the purpose of this inspection, engine compart-
Fl
d. Crushed, cut, or
heat-damaged wire
covering (corrugated split-loom).
e. Blistered, soft, or
deteriorated wire
insulation.
f.
Excessive buildup of oily residue, dirt or
road grime. Clean as required.
Charred, heat damaged, cracked, hard,
or stiff hose.
and ¡n other countries. Refer to "Vèhicle Patent lnformat¡on" ¡n this manual.
Rev.A-Jan202015
l\l'Ë':{ltl ,$r LYË Fl
2.9,38.2.Line Routing lnspection
1. lnspect all rigid lines for proper routing.
Provide additional or repositioned clamping, if the following conditions exist:
DO NOT use cable ties on textile or
steel braided lines.
b.
across another line, component, or vehicle structure without being
b.
c.
Line is improperly held by clamp. Select
proper clamp size or tighten clamp as
necessary. Clamp must fit snugly on
line without causing restriction.
¡gNOTE:
It is permissible to cable tie synflex air lines
with synflex fuel lines.
c.
Ensure lines meet the minimum bend
radius requirements. Provide a minimum bend radius of six times the diam-
Ensure band clamps (typically used to
attach rubber hose to metal tubing) are
eter of the line. Reposition line
or
replace with a line of the proper length
tight.
if necessary.
2. lnspect all flexible lines and hoses for
proper routing.
d. Ensure flexible lines are
routed and
clamped so as to provide minimal slack
without being taut. Provide additional
a. Ensure lines are not routed in close
slack in lines where there could be relative movement between the joined locations. Do not space clamps less than 12
inches apart.
proximity to hot zones such as the tur-
bocharger, engine exhaust, auxiliary
coolant heater etc. Provide additional
or
reposition the existing
clamps to obtain the required clearance
(minimum 1"). Use brackets or spacers,
necessary, to obtain the required
clearance. Provide protective shielding
in situations where the optimum clearance cannot be achieved.
clamps
line, component, or vehicle structure
without being properly clamped.
a. Line runs
properly clamped.
Ensure lines do not run across another
if
e. Provide cushioned loop clamps
(P-clamps) or plastic split-block style
clamps in locations where vibration or
road shock may be transmitted to the
line. Plastic split-block style clamps are
typically used with large diameter lines
only.
f.
DO NOT clamp or cable tie fuel lines to
electrical cables/harnesses. Maintain a
minimum clearance ol 112" between fuel
lines and electrical cables/harnesses.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
lnspect condition of P-clamps to ensure
they are tight and the rubber cushion is
intact and in full contact with the line.
Replace P-clamp if the rubber cushion
is not of the full enclosure style.
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" in this manual.
PM
.43
3, lnspect all
power cables and wire har-
nesses for proper routing.
Maintenance t\l Ë W t LYË
Ël
the wire insulation over a period of
time. Use an alternative clamping
method that will isolate the vibration or
relocate the wire harness and clamp at
a different location.
DO NOT clamp or cable tie electrical
cables/harnesses to fuel lines. Maintain a minimum clearance of 112"
between fuel lines and electrical cables/
c,
harnesses.
a. Ensure
cables/harnesses
do not
a harness bundle that cannot be
secured within the P-clamps. Maintain
the same relationship between
run
across another line, component, or
vehicle structure without being prop-
clamped and unclamped wire harness
looms throughout the entire run of the
wire bundle. Use cable ties at 12" inter-
erly clamped. Ensure that grommets or
rubber edging are used wherever the
cable/harness passes through a bulk-
vals. Ensure cable ties are not overtightened or supporting too much
head or panel.
NgNOTE:
/f rs permissible to cable tie electrical wire
harnesses to synflex air 4ines but not to
textile or steel braided lines.
weight so as to cut into the wire loom.
d. Ensure that cable ties are not
used
within four inches of the connector. Provide strain relief or otherwise allow
some flexion at the terminal connector.
It is acceptable, however, to cable tie
b. Ensure cables/harnesses are not
clamped to another hose or line.
Cables/harnesses should be clamped
only to stationary structure or brackets.
Damage to the internal wire bundle can
occur if the wire loom is clamped to an
object subject to excessive vibration.
The vibrations can transmit through the
cushioned clamp and create relative
movement between the internal wire
bundle and the corrugated surface of
the wire loom, resultíng in damage to
PM
.44
Ensure cables/harnesses are secured
with P-clamps wherever practical. Harnesses should be clamped no more
than 24 inches apart, where possible.
Use cable ties to secure any portion of
the terminal connector body itself when
it is running parallel with another harness.
e. The excessive length of a harness may
require that it be looped. Ensure that
the harness is looped in an appropriate
area and that the minimum bend radius
is observed. Provide a minimum bend
radius of six times the diameter of the
harness.
f.
lnspect condition of P-clamps to ensure
they are tight and the rubber cushion is
intact and in full contact with the cable/
harness.
The New Flyer veh¡cles descr¡bed in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrat¡ons ¡n the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refêr to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Rev. A
-Jan 20 2015
lU Ë
Vt/ F LYË'Ël
2.10. 7,500 Miles (12,000 km)
Preventive Maintenance
2.10.1. Air Filter Restriction lndicator
lnspection
lnspect the air filter restriction indicator
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km), 250 hours,
or 3 months, whichever occurs first. Locate
the restriction indicator in the engine compartment and refer to the scale on the indicator that is calibrated in inches of water.
Replace the air filter element if the reading
exceeds 1B- H2O.
Air filter element replacement is required
when the filter media has trapped approximately 80% of its load carrying capacity.
This capacity equates to an air filter gauge
reading of 18 to 20 inches of water. The air
filter element
is
considered
to
have
reached its maximum service life at this
point and must be replaced. Refer to
2J0.2. "Air Filter Replacement"
page 46 in
procedure.
on
this section for replacement
The service life of an air filter element is
affected by several factors including operating environment, hours of operation, and
total time in service. The requirement for
air filter element replacement is determined by monitoring the reading on the Filter Minder@ air filter gauge. This gauge
monitors air restriction downstream of the
air cleaner assembly. See "Fig. PM-22: Au
Filter Restriction lndicator" on page 45.
The air filter gauge is calibrated in inches
of water on one side and millimeters of
water on the opposite side. The gauge will
register and retain the highest air restriction reading experienced during operation.
Maximum air restriction readings will be
RESET BUTTON
obtained typically during full throttle, full
load operation.
s0700249a.sv9
Fig. PM-22: Air Filter Restriction lndicator
Rev. A
-Jan202015
patents ând design applications or registrat¡ons in the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Rofer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" ln this manual.
Copyright @ 2015 Nêw Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
PM
-45
Maintenance l\l'Ë Vll F LYË Fl
2.10.2. Air Filter Replacement
The air filter housing assembly includes a
primary and safety element. The primary
element provides engine protection during
operation and the safety element
to
is
prevent contaminates from
entering the induction system during serdesigned
vicing. The safety element is located within
the filter housing, immediately downstream
of the primary element. See "Fig. PM-23:
Air Filter Elements" on page 46.
The replacement interval for the primary
element is determined by the filter restriction indicator reading. Replace the primary
element when the gauge reading
between 18 to 20 inches of water. The
safety element should be replaced every
third primary element change or whenever
the surface of the safety element
has
become contaminated.
¡9NOTE:
There is no need to remove and visually
inspect the air filter element if the indicator
reading is /ess than 18" H2O. Replacing
the air filter element at 18" H2O. will maximize the service life of the filter and mini-
mize any rlsk assoclated with excessive
handling of the air filter.
is
AIR FILTER
HOUSING
SEAL
SAFETY ELEMENT
s094616a.svg
Fig. PM-23: Air Filter Elements
PM
.46
The New Flyer vehicles descr¡bed ¡n this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applicatlons or registrat¡ons in the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to 'Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Rev,A -Jan202015
hl,Ë
\å/ F LYË Fl
2.l0,2.l.Removal
1. Open the air filter access door located
lf
on
NgNOTE:
new elements are not going to
be
installed immediately, temporarily cover
the outlet tube to prevent contaminants
the rear curbside corner of the vehicle.
from entering the air intake system.
hl
6.
The air filter housing is mounted with
the clean air outlet pointing downward
and care must be used when performing an element replacement to avoid
contaminating the induction system
during servicing.
2,10.2,2.lnspection
1.
door if the seal is deteriorated or damaged.
Refer to your New Flyer Parts Manual for
part number of access door.
located on both sides near the center of
pulling
straight out from the housing.
3. Using the plastic handle on the primary
element gently lift up on the element to
loosen the gasket seal, which will tilt the
lnspect the rubber seal on air filter housing
access door (U-shaped cover with four
over-center latches). Replace the access
2. Remove the air filter housing cover by
releasing the four over-center latches
the body. Remove the cover by
Carefully wipe out the safety seal sudace
in the housing with a damp cloth.
2.
lnspect the clamped connections at the
inlet and outlet of the air filter housing.
There should be no evidence of bulged or
deformed hoses.
element to an approximate 5 degree angle.
Carefully remove the primary element from
housing.
4, Carefully
clean out all contaminates from
the housing and sealing surfaces with a
damp cloth before servicing the safety element.
DO NOT exceed 40 in-lbs torque on the
hose clamps. Over-tightening the
clamps will deform the plastic air filter
housing inlet/outlets.
a bright light to inspect the interior of
the air filter housing and check for any evidence of distortion or cracking on the inlet
and outlet clamped connections. Replace
3. Use
The lower elbow located at the base of
the vertical air intake pipe must be disconnected before removing the safety
filter. Removal of the safety filter may
dislodge dirt or other contaminants that
could enter the air lntake system.
5. lf the safety element has to be replaced
use the plastic handle on the face of the
safety element. Pull the element towards
the center of the housing and carefully
remove it from the housing to avoid contaminates from entering the induction sys-
air filter housing if cracked or damaged.
replacement procedure.
4. Shine a bright light into the air intake tube
leading away from the air filter housing and
ensure no evidence of dust trails or other
contaminants exist. Remove air intake piping and clean as necessary.
tem.
Rev. A
-Jan202015
PM-47
2,1
Maintenance hl Ë V{/ tr LYË
Fl
0.2.3.lnstallation
1.
lnstall the safety element using the handle
facing up and outward. lnsert the safety
NEVER use latches to force the element
into place.
element tab into the positioning slot before
pushing the element down into place.
IgNOTE:
The safety element handle must
3.
be
towards the service cover opening and
completely seafed lo allow for proper
installation of the primary element.
4. Clean and reinstall lower elbow to
air
intake pipe. Torque T-Bolt clamps at either
2. Use the handle on the primary
element to
insert it into the housing at the same angle
as it was removed. lnsert the element until
it
makes contact with the inside of the
housing. Pull down on the handle to complete the seal.
end of elbow to 85 in-lbs.
210.9. Charge Air Cooler & Piping
lnspect the charge air cooler
The element must be completely seated to
allow for proper installation of service
piping
or 3 months, whichever occurs first.
Í
lnspect the charge air cooler (CAC) for dirt
and debris blocking the fins. Check for
cracks, holes, or other damage. lf damage
is found, refer to Section 6 of this manual
for replacement proced ures.
cover.
ú
.48
&
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km), 250 hours,
¡gNOTE:
PM
lnstall service cover with the indexed rib at
the top and attach all 4 latches. lf the cover
doesn't seat, remove and re-check the filter position.
lnspect the charge air piping and hoses for
leaks, holes, cracks, or loose connections.
Tighten the hose clamps if necessary.
patents and design appl¡cations or reglstrations ¡n the Un¡ted States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual,
Rev,A-Jan202015
N Ë VII ils'LY.Ë trl 12,000 Miles (19,300 km) Preventive Maintenance
2.11. 12,000 Miles (19,300 km)
D Check the nylon roller on the underside of
the pedal and on the transfer lever for freedom of movement.
Preventive Mai ntenance
t
2.11.1. Electronic Accelerator
Perform the following maintenance every
12,000 miles (19,300 km)or 600 operating
hours, whichever comes first:
O Check the area around the treadle
to
ensure that nothing will interfere with trea-
dle operation (mats, discarded material
and so forth). See "Fig. PM-24: Accelerator
fl
Check the entire treadle assembly for
cleanliness.
Check all pivot points for freedom of movement, excessive wear and corrosion.
Check all fasteners, fittings and retaining
rings to verify that they are all properly
installed.
Actuate the treadle valve by pressing the
pedal by hand. The action should
be
smooth without binding. When the pedal is
released, it should return immediately without sticky or sluggish action.
Excessive wear and corrosion requires the
installation of new bushings.
s030703a.wmf
Fig. PM-24: Accelerator lnspection
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flyer vehlcles described ¡n th¡s manual may bè protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrations in the Un¡ted States and Canada,
ând ln other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" in th¡s manual.
PM
.49
2.1
1.2. Driver's Heater/Defroster
lnspect and test the defroster blower motor
every 12,000 miles (19,300 km) or as
determined by operating conditions. The
inspection interval will need to be more frequent during the winter months when the
heaters are exposed to slush, salt and grit
that have been tracked into the vehicle.
3
Remove defroster access cover to allow
detailed inspection of the blower motor and
electrical connections.
Maintenance l\l Ë Vif
o
t LYË Ë!
lnspect electrical connectors for loose or
corroded connections.
t
J
Test operation of blower motor at all operating speeds to ensure smooth and quiet
operation.
lf blower motor operation is suspect, use a
clamp-on Fluke ammeter, or equivalent, to
test current draw at each speed setting.
defroster motor specifications. Replace
blower motors that do not meet the specified operating limits.
IgNOTE:
DO NOT attempt to clean defroster
assembly using pressure washing
equipment or using shop air in excess
Disassembly, cleaning, and repair of the
blower motor is considered uneconomical
and it is recommended that the blower
motor be replaced if found defective.
of 60 psi
õ
lnspect for buildup of salt or dirt deposits in
and around the blower motor. Clean surfaces as necessary to remove contamination.
PM
.50
The New Flyer veh¡cles descr¡bed ¡n this manual may be protected by one or more
patênts and design applications or registrations in the United States and Canada,
ând in other countr¡es. Refêr to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Rev. A
-Jan202015
ht Ë TÂf F
l-YË F!
2.12. 15,000 Miles (24,000 km)
Preventive
Mai
1.
Once the system has cooled
down,
observe the coolant level through the fluid
level markings on the recovery tank. The
ntenance
coolant should be level with the COLD
2.12.1. Cooling System
FULL line marked on the recovery tank.
¡gNOTE:
lnspect the coolant fluid level, antifreeze
concentration, SCA level, and cooling sys-
lf
tem components every 15,000
(24,000 km), 500 hours, or six
miles
months,
whichever occurs first.
2.12.1.1.Coolant Level
DO NOT attempt to open the pressure
cap on the surge tank until the system
has cooled down and the pressure
relief valve has been operated. Opening
the pressure cap with pressurized hot
coolant can result in scalding injury
and loss of coolant.
necessary, the coolant level can be
checked while system is hot by observing
coolant level through the level markings on
the recovery tank. The coolant level should
be level with the FULL HOT marking
shown on the tank. However, the system
must be allowed to cool down before the
filter cap is removed.
2.
Top off coolant to the correct level as
required using premix antifreeze. Refer to
2.34. "Fluid
&
Lubrication Guide" on
page 91 in this section for antifreeze speci-
fication. See "Fig. PM-25: Surge Tank
lnspection" on page 51,
SCHRADER
FILLER CAP
VALVE
FLUID LEVEL
GAUGE
RADIATOR
CAP
GOOLANT RECOVERY
TANK
HOT FILL LINE
(RED)
\
coLD FrLL LrNE
(BLUE)
s0700304c.sv9
Fig. PM-25: Surge Tank lnspection
Rev.A-Jan202015
and in othercountr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
PM
-5I
15,000 Miles (24,000 km) Preventive Maintenance hl
distilled water and 50% ethylene glycol to
provide year-round protection of -26"F
(-32'F).
2.12.1.2.Antifreeze
Overconcentration of antifreeze or use
of
high-silicate antifreeze can cause
engine damage. DO NOT use antifreeze
concentrations in excess of 60% or less
than
40o/o.
Use only fully formulated coolants meeting
ASTM D6210 specification and Cummins
Engineering Standard 14603. Refer to
2.34. "Fluid
&
Lubrication Guide" on
page 91 in this section for coolant specification.
Antifreeze broadens the operating temperature range by lowering the coolant freezing point and raising the boiling point. The
corrosion inhibitors protect cooling system
components from corrosion and prolong
component life.
Use a Refractometer to provide a reliable
and accurate measurement of freeze point
protection and glycol (antifreeze) concentration. Use pre-mixed anti-freeze of 50%
PM
.52
Ë.Ul/ F LYË trl
NgNOTE:
Fleetguard Refractometef
part
number
CC2B06 can be ordered through Cummins
Filtration.
Antifreeze should also be checked, on a
yearly basis, for contamination such as oil,
fuel, grease, solder bloom, silica gel, rust,
or scaling. Coolant must be replaced and
cooling system cleaned and flushed if contamination is evident. Refer to Section 6 of
this manual for basic cleaning and flushing
procedures. Also refer to Cummins Operation and Maintenance Manual and Cum-
mins Coolant
Requirements
and
Maintenance Bulletin 3666132 for detailed
cleaning and flushing procedures.
NSNOTE:
Fleetguard Coolant lesf Sfrþs can be
used to check Sulfate and Chloride levels
and can be ordered through Cummins Filtration.
The New FlyeÍ vehicles described in th¡s manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrations in the Un¡ted States and Canada,
Rev,A -Jan202015
lrrl Ë
\lV
Ë
LYË,,F1
2.12.1.3.Cooling System Components
4. Clean the exterior of the radiator from the
streetside
1. Check hose connections and
tighten
clamps as necessary. Cracked, swollen or
deteriorated hoses must be replaced.
of the vehicle on an
"as
required" basis. Close the screened radiator door and maintain a minimum distance
of 12 inches between the wand of the pressure washing equipment and the screened
2. Check radiator and charge air
cooling
cores for leaks and for accumulation of dirt
which obstructs air passage. As required,
operate the fan reverse button on the
engine gauges panel to assist in removing
debris from the cores. Repair all cooling
system leaks immediately. See "Fig. PM26: Radiator lnspection" on page 54.
door. Reduce power washing equipment to
not exceed 1200 psi.
lnspect the radiator mountings and tighten
mounting bolts when necessary.
lf
IgNOTE:
the radiator cannot be
satisfactorily
cleaned to provide proper airflow across
the core, then the unit will need to be
removed from the vehicle for soaking and
cleaning. Refer to 2.27. "Iwo Year Preventive Maintenance" on page 82 in fhls sec-
DO NOT use excessive pressure or
place washer wand within close proxim-
tion for cleaning and flushing procedure.
ity to
radiator/CAG core when power
washing otherwise damage to the fins
could result. Use a pressure of less
than 1200 psi to power wash and maintain a minimum distance of 9 inches
from the cores. DO NOT direct power
6. lnspect
for clearance between fan blades
and radiator core and fan shroud.
7.
wash at product or safety labels.
lnspect air recirculation seals at baffles
around radiator assembly. Seals must be
in good condition.
B.
lnspect fan blades for cracks, broken tips,
or other damage.
9. lnspect charge air cooler hoses and piping
The use of steam cleaning or pressure
washing equipment can force moisture
into electrical connectors and
cause
corrosion of the terminals Avoid directing high pressure spray toward any
electrical connectors.
3. Clean
the exterior of the radiator from the
engine compartment side on an "as
required" basis. Use power wash equipment at reduced pressures, not exceeding
1200 psi, and maintain a safe distance, no
closer than
exchanger.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
9
inches from the heat
for leaks, holes, cracks, or loose connections.
l0.lnspect the fan main harness and system
controller electrical connectors to ensure
they are clean and properly connected.
Ensure harness is properly routed and
secured. Open the connectors and inspect
terminals for dirt or corrosion. Clean as
necessary with contact cleaner and a stiff
bristle brush. Reapply a small amount Dow
Corning DC4 dielectric grease on the top
of the female connector and reconnect.
11.Repair or replace any defective part. Refer
The New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may be protected by one or moro
patents and des¡gn applications or registrations in the Un¡ted States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" in this manual.
Copyright @ 201 5 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
PM
.53
15,000 Miles (24,000 km) Preventive Maintenance hl Ë
\tU
t
L'YË
FË
ACCESS DOOR
RADIATOR & CHARGE AIR
COOLER ASSEMBLY
s0700241 a.svg
Fig. PM-26; Radiator lnspection
2.12.2. Cooling System Pressure Test
DO NOT attempt to open the pressure
cap on the surge tank until the system
has cooled down and the pressure
relief valve has been operated, Opening
the pressure cap with pressurized hot
coolant can result in scalding injury
and loss of coolant.
Perform a cooling system pressure test
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) as follows:
PM
.54
1.
Pressure test the cooling system at 15 to
20 psi (103 to 138 kPa) using a commercially available pressure tester. Maintain
pressure for one minute while observing
gauge reading. lf pressure reading drops
check for source of leak and repair as necessary.
2. Pressure test the pressure cap
at 12to 15
psi (83 to'103 kPa) and ensure that it maintains pressure. lncrease pressure until the
pressure relief actuates. Pressure relief
should occur at approximately ',l6 psi. Also
inspect the vacuum relief valve on the
underside of the cap to ensure that it functions.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
l\t
ËVt/ SLYË Fl
2.12.3. Coolant Filter Replacement
5. Tighten filter in accordance with
instruc-
tions provided on filter.
6. Open the coolant filter inlet and
outlet
valves.
DO NOT attempt to change the coolant
filter until the system has cooled down
and the pressure relief valve has been
operated, Servícing the coolant filter
with pressurized hot coolant can result
in scalding injury.
7.
Start engine and check for coolant leaks.
B. Check coolant level and top up if necessary.
ENGINE-MOUNTED
FILTER BRACKET
UgNOTE:
Verify the type of coolant being used in this
vehicle, DO NOT use supplement coolant
additives (SCA) or filter elements containtng SCA's if the coolant is a product based
on organic acid technology (OAT). Final
Charge@ Extended Life antifreeze is an
OAT type antifreeze. Replace the filter as
follows:
1. Close the coolant filter inlet and outlet
valves. See "Fig. PM-27: Coolant Filter" on
page 55.
2.
3.
Remove the spin-on filter element using a
filter wrench.
Lubricate seal on new filter element with
clean engine oil.
4. Ensure filter
base is clean and install filter
s0700168a.wmf
element.
Fig,
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
PM-27: Coolant Filter
The New Flyer vehicles dêscribed in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applicalions or registrations in the United States and Canada,
and ¡n other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Pâtent lnformation" in th¡s manual.
Copyright @ 2015 New Flyer lndustrles Canada ULC
PM-55
2.13, 18,000 Miles (29,000 km)
Preventive
Ft
2.13.2. Power Steering Filter
ntenance
Mai
l\l Ë Vt/ F LYË
Replace the power steering filter, located
in the hydraulic reservoir, every 18,000
miles (29,000 km) or every six months,
2.13.1. Engine Mounts
Every 18,000 miles (29,000 km) inspect
whichever occurs first.
Dispose of used filter, any spilled hydraulic
the front and rear engine rubber mounts for
the following conditions:
fluid and used shop rags in an environ-
O
Cracks
mentally responsible manner. Start engine
and check filter installation for leaks before
3
3
Materialseparation
Loose or damaged fasteners
Replace mounts which show any of these
operating vehicle. Refer to Section 3 of this
manual for further information on the reservoir and filter. See "Fig. PM-28: Hydraulic
Filter Replacement" on page 56.
signs of damage. Replace damaged fasteners. Retorque loose fasteners. Refer to
Section 4 of this manual for correct torque
specifications.
v^
11
Æ
@@
10
1.
5.
6.
7.
L
9.
Reservoir Assembly, Power
Steering (lncl. 2...1 4)
2. Dipstick
3. Bolt
4. Washer
'M
Fig.
PM-56
Body
'10. Basket
O-Ring, Glass
11. Spring, Retaining
Glass, Sight
12. Plug,
Bracket, Mounting
13. Cover Assembly
Element, Filter
'14. Lanvard Assemblv
112" PT
s015232b.wmf
PM-28: Hydraulic Filter Replacement
The New Flyer vehicles described in lhis manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrations ¡n the Un¡ted States and Canada,
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
hl
E\A/ sLYË Ë!
e.
2.14. 24,000 Miles (38,600 km)
2.14.1. Air Dryer
charge line at the supply port of the air
dryer. Ensure there is no air pressure at
the control port by disconnecting the
DO NOT inject alcohol, anti-freeze, or
or
upstream of the air dryer. Use of these
substances may damage the air dryer
and void warranty,
line from the governor unload (UNL)
other de-icing substances into
port.
f.
Apply a soap solution to the air supply
g.
Remove the test gauge before returning the vehicle to service.
Perform the following maintenance every
miles (38,000 km), 900 operating
hours, or every three months, whichever
24,OOO
occurs first:
1. Visually inspect the air dryer for physical
or
for excessive leakage around the
purge valve. With the compressor in
loaded mode (compressing air), apply a
soap solution to the purge valve exhaust
port and observe that leakage does not
missing
parts.
l" bubble in 1 second. lf the leakage exceeds the maximum specified,
exceed a
2. Check all mounting bolts for
tightness.
Torque the 3/8" lock nuts on the upper and
lower mounting brackets to 270 to 385 inlbs. (31 to 43 Nm). Torque the 5/16" nut on
the upper clamp ring to 60 to 100 in-lbs
(7 to 11 Nm)
3.
Perform Operation & Leakage Tests. Refer
to 2.14.1.1. "Operation & Leakage
Tests"
on page 57 in this section for procedure.
2.'l 4.1.1.Operation & Leakage Tests
1. Test the delivery port check valve assembly as follows:
a. lnstall a test gauge in the supply line to
the wet tank.
b.
Build up system air pressure to governor cutout (125 psi).
d.
repair the purge valve assembly.
3.
Close all reservoir drain cocks. Build up
system pressure to governor cutout and
note that each unit purges with an audible
escape of air. Apply the service brakes to
reduce system air pressure to governor
cut-in. Note that the system once again
builds to full pressure and is followed by a
purge cycle from each unit.
4. Check the operation of the safety valve by
pulling the exposed stem while the compressor is loaded (compressing air). There
must be an exhaust of air while the stem is
held and the valve should reseat when the
stem is released.
Ensure all lines and fittings leading to
and from the air dryer are-in good õondition and not leaking.
c.
port on the air dryer. lf a 1" bubble
forms within one second, then the delivery check valve should be repaired.
2. Check
damage such as chaffed or broken air and
electrical lines and broken
Confirm cause of rapid pressure loss by
shutting down the engine and draining
system pressure to a point below governor cut-in (less than 105 psi). Drain
residual air pressure in the compressor
discharge line and remove the dis-
Observe the test gauge to ensure system pressure is maintained. lf a rapid
5' Check
the operation of the end
cover
heater and thermostat assemblies during
cold weather operation. Refer to 2.14.1.2.
"Electric Power Test" on page 58 and Refer
to 2.14.1.3. "Thermostat & Heater Operation" on page 58 in this section for procedure.
loss of pressure is indicated, proceed to
the following steps to confirm source of
leak.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
patents and des¡gn applications or registrations ¡n the United Stâtes and Canada,
and ln other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
PM
.57
24,000 Miles (38,600 km) Preventive Maintenance ]\l Ë
2.1 4.1
.2.Electric Power Test
With the Master Run switch set to the DAYRUN or NIGHT-RUN operating position,
check for voltage to the heater and thermo-
stat assembly using a voltmeter or test
light, Unplug the electrical connector at the
air dryer and place the test leads on each
of the pins of the male connector. lf there is
no voltage, look for a blown fuse, broken
wires, or corrosion in the vehicle wiring
harness. Check to see if a good ground
path exists.
2.1
4.1.3.Thermostat & Heater Operation
U€NOTE:
ïhese fesfs are not required except in cold
weather operation.
Switch off the master run switch and cool
the thermostat and heater assembly to
below 40"F (4"C). Using an ohmmeter,
Vlf F LY Ë l:l
pins in the air dryer connector half. The
resistance should be 1.5 to 3.0 ohms for
the 12 volt heater assembly. Warm the
thermostat and heater assembly to over
90'F (32'C) and again check the resistance. The resistance should exceed 1000
ohms. lf the resistance values obtained are
within the stated limits, the assembly is
operating properly. lf the resistance values
obtained are outside the stated limits,
replace the assembly.
IgNOTE:
If, after completing the routine operation
and leakage fesfs, rï has been determined
that one or more components of the air
dryer requires replacement or maintenance, refer to your New Flyer Parts Manual. The air dryer has been desþned so
that any of the maintenance kits can be
installed without removing the air dryer
from the vehicle.
check the resistance between the electrical
PM
.58
patents and design applicat¡ons or registrat¡ons ¡n the United States and Canada,
and ¡n other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Rev.A-Jan202015
fï Ë UV If, LYË Ët
lnspect the plunger boot for cracks, holes
2.14.2. Brake Treadle Assembly & Brake Valve
or deterioration and replace boot if dam-
Perform maintenance on the brake treadle
aged.
assembly and brake valve every 24,000
Í
miles (38,600 km), 900 operating hours or
three months, whichever occurs first,
3
Remove any accumulated contamination,
such as dirt and gravel, from the heel of
the treadle, the plunger, the plunger boot
and the mounting plate. See "Fig. PM-29:
3 Check that the brake treadle
Brake Valve lnspection" on page 59.
O
Clean and inspect the treadle roller, the
roller pin, and the hinge pin. Replace any
worn, corroded, or damaged parts. Lubricate with Barium grease. Refer to 2.34.
"Fluid & Lubrication Guide" on page 9'1 in
this section for lubrication specifications.
lnspect the plunger for wear or corrosion.
Replace plunger if required.
mounting
plate is securely fastened. lnspect pivot pin
holes and plunger bore in mounting plate
for wear or corrosion. Replace mounting
plate if required.
J Apply a thin layer of
Barium grease
between the plunger and the mounting
plate bore. Do not use excessive amounts
of lubricant.
Perform operation and leakage tests on
the brake valve. Refer to Section B of this
manual for test procedures.
FASTENER
PLUNGER
MOUNTING
PLATE
BRAKE
VALVE
DRIVER'S
ACCELERATOR OMITTED
FOR CLARITY
PLATFORM
s07001 I b.svg
Fig. PM-29: Brake Valve lnspection
Rev.A-Jan202015
patents and design appl¡cat¡ons or registratlons in the United States and Cânada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" ln this manual.
PM
.59
O
2.15. 30,000 Miles (48,000 km)
2.15.1. FuelTank
l\l E M/ F I-Y-E Ël
Guide Pin Covers - check that the protective covers are properly installed on the
caliper guide pins and are in good condition. Replace covers if damaged or missing.
Open the drain at the bottom of the Fuel
Tank every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) to
drain off any water and/or sediment.
t
Adjuster Cap - check that the protective
cap is properly installed on the adjuster
and is in good condition. Replace adjuster
cap if damaged or missing
2.15.2. Engine Drive Belts
O
Brake Disc - refer to "Brake Disc lnspection" in Section I and 2 of this manual for
inspection procedure.
ú
Brake Adjuster - refer to "Automatic Adjustment lnspection" in Section 1and2 of this
manual for inspection procedure
lnspect alternator, water pump, and HVAC
belts every 30,000 miles (48,000 km),
1000 hours, or one year, whichever occurs
first. lnspect belts for wear, cracks, fraying,
glazing, or other damage. Small transverse
cracks running across the ribs are acceptable unless intersected by a longitudinal
crack running along the length of the belt.
Replace the belt if chunks of material are
missing or belt is frayed.
lsNore:
When replacing with
a new belt,
ensure
that the belf is properly aligned and tensioned. Confirm proper operation of the
automatic belt tensioner.
2.16. 36,000 Miles (58,000 km)
2.16.1. Disc Brake Caliper lnspection
quent inspection may be necessary
depending on the operating conditions.
Perform the following inspections
:
Inspect the six brake caliper mounting
bolts that attach the brake caliper to the
axle to ensure the bolts are tight. Refer to
Section 1 and 2 of this manual for mounting bolt torque specifications.
ú
Caliper Running Clearance
The brake adjuster should always
be
inspected and tested whenever brake pads
have been replaced
t
Caliper Guide Pin - refer to "Caliper Guide
Pin lnspection" in Section 1 and 2 of this
manual for inspection procedure.
t
Tappet & Boot Assembly - refer to "Tappet
Rubber Boot lnspection" in Section 1 and 2
of this manual for inspection procedure.
3
Guide Pin lnner Boot
- refer to "Upper
Guide Rubber Boot lnspection" in Section
1 and 2 of this manual for inspection procedure.
Perform a disc brake caliper inspection
every 36,000 miles (58,000 km) or every
year, whichever occurs first. A more fre-
Í
¡€NOTE:
-
2.16.2. Power Steering Fluid
Replace the fluid in the hydraulic reservoir
every 36,000 miles (58,000 km) or yearly,
whichever occurs first. More frequent
change intervals may be required if operat-
ing under less than ideal
conditions.
Severe operating conditions involving
extremes of moisture, dust and temperature fluctuations may require a more frequent hydraulic fluid change interval. Refer
to 2.34. "Fluid & Lubrication Guide"
refer to
"Brake Pad Clearance lnspection" in Section 1 and 2 of this manual for inspection
on
page 91 in this section for fluid specifications.
procedure.
PM
.60
The New Flyer vehlcles described ¡n this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and dos¡gn applications or registrations in the Un¡ted States and Canada,
and in other countr¡es. Refer to 'Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Copyright @ 201 5 New Flyer Industrios Canada ULC
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
l\l Ë tJt/ ili LYË,Ft 48,000 Miles (77,200 km) Preventive Maintenance
2.17. 48,000 Miles (77,200 kml
Preventive
Mai
ntenance
band and air inlet fittings, using soapy
water or leak detection solution.
a.
Perform minor alignment. Refer to Section
3 of this manual for procedure.
2.17.2. Front & Rear Brake Ghambers
2.17 .2.1.F
ront Brake Ghambers
Perform the following inspection every
48,000 miles (77,200 km):
1. Visually inspect the exterior surfaces of the
brake chamber for signs of damage.
Replace the brake chamber if damaged.
2.
lf
bubbles appear at air inlet fittings,
tighten fittings until leaks cease, but do
not exceed 25 to 30 ft-lb. (34 to 41 Nm)
torque for 3/8 - 1B NPTF fittings or 13 to
15 ft-lb. (18 to 20 Nm)for M16 x 1.5 -6H
lf leaks continue, release air
pressure and remove air lines from inlet
ports. Repair or replace hose and fittings as required Reinstall air lines to
the brake chamber and recheck for
leaks.
fittings.
to ensure the mounting stud nuts
are torqued to 133 to 155 ft-lb. (180 lo 210
3. Check
Apply system pressure (minimum 100 psi)
to the brake chamber and check for leaks
around the circumference of the clamp
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
lf bubbles appear around clamp band,
release air pressure and torque clamp
band nuts to 30 to 35 ft-lbs (41 to 47
Nm). Recheck for leaks. lf leaks continue, replace the brake chamber.
Nm).
The New Flyer vehlclês described in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrations ¡n the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to'Vehicle Patent lnformation" ¡n th¡s manual.
Copyright @ 201 5 Now Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
PM .61
the following inspection
clamp band and air inlet fittings, using
every
soapy water or leak detection solution.
48,000 miles (77,200 km):
a. lf bubbles appear
around clamp band,
release air pressure and torque clamp
1. Visually inspect the exterior surfaces of the
spring brake chamber for signs of damage.
Replace the brake chamber if damaged.
Refer
to Section 2 of this
Ël
for leaks around the circumference of the
2.17 .2.Z.Rear Brake Ghambers
Perform
N Ë Vtf Ë LYË
band nuts to 30 to 35 ft-lb. (41 to 47
Nm). Recheck for leaks. lf leaks con-
manual for
tinue, replace the brake chamber.
b. lf bubbles appear at air inlet fittings,
2. Apply system pressure (minimum
100 psi)
to the spring brake chamber and check for
leaks at the head/flange case interface, air
inlet fittings, at vent elbows in non-pressure housing, and center seal using soapy
water or leak detection solution.
torque for 3/B - 1B NPTF fittings or 13 to
15 ft-lb. (18 to 20 Nm)for M16 x 1.5 -6H
fittings. lf leaks continue, exhaust all air
from service side of the chamber.
Remove air lines from inlet ports.
a. lf
bubbles appear at the head/flange
case interface, a leak is present and the
spring brake chamber must
Repair or replace hose and fittings as
required. Reinstall air lines to the brake
be
chamber, and recheck for leaks
replaced.
b. Check for leaks from the vent elbow
located in the non-pressure housing. lf
more than one vent elbow is present,
4.
Check to ensure the mounting stud nuts
are torqued to 133 to 155 ft-lb. (180 to 210
Nm).
plug all but one elbow and check for
leaks at the unplugged elbow. lf leaks
are detected, there is an internal leak
and the spring brake chamber needs to
be replaced.
c,
For center seal leaks, check for continu-
ous discharge from the service side
quick release valve. lf a leak is present,
the brake chamber must be replaced.
d. lf
bubbles appear at air inlet fittings,
torque for 3/8 - 1B NPTF fittings or 13 to
15 ft-lb. (18 to 20 Nm) for M 16 x 1 .5 -6H
fittings. lf leaks continue, exhaust all air
from spring side of the chamber.
Remove air lines from inlet ports.
Repair or replace hose and fittings as
required. Reinstall air lines
to
brake
chamber and check for leaks.
3. With spring brake still fully
pressurized,
apply system pressure (minimum 100 psi)
to the service brake chamber and check
PM
.62
DO NOT use an impact wrench to
tighten the release bolt in the following
step.
5. Check
to ensure that the release bolt is
seated against the head insert and torqued
to 50 to 60 ft-lb. (68 to 81 Nm). Fully seating the release bolt ensures that the parking brake will have full stroke capability and
seals the release bolt threads, preventing
contaminants from entering the brake
chamber,
6. Check the external breather tube to ensure
there is no damage or cracks in the rubber
elbows and ensure the tube is securely
engaged a minimum of /, inch (13 mm)
into the rubber elbows and glued together
with a high quality rubber cement. Replace
with breather tube repair kit if required.
Thè New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrat¡ons in the United Statos and Canada,
and in other countrÍes. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Rev. A
-Jan 20 2015
f\l Ë ltll 'F'LY.Ë
Fl
2.18. 60,000 Miles (96,000 km)
3. Remove the
eleven bolts that attach the
crankcase breather cover to the crankcase
breather base. See "Fig. PM-30: Crankcase Breather" on page 63.
2.18.1. FuelTank
[gNOTE:
Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever comes first, tighten all
fuel tank mountings and brackets. At the
same time, check the seal in the fuel tank
cap, the breather hole in the cap, and the
condition of the flexible fuel lines. Repair or
replace the parts as necessary.
The six bolts that attach the breather base
to the valve cover do not need to
be
removed.
4. Remove the breather cover.
5. Remove the breather element from the
breather base and discard.
2.18.2. Air Gompressor Discharge Lines
lnspect the air compressor discharge lines
miles
(96,000 km), 2,000 operating hours or two
years. lf the total deposit in a cross-section
for carbon buildup every 60,000
of the line exceeds 1/16", clean the line,
and inspect and clean the air compressor
BREATHER
COVER
cylinder head and valve assembly. Refer to
Section B of this manual for procedure.
BREATHER
ELEMENT
2.18.3. Grankcase Breather Element
BREATHER
BASE
Replace the crankcase breather element
every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 2,000
hours, whichever occurs first.
2.18.3.1,Removal
OFF position.
2.
Steam clean the crankcase breather cover
area and dry with compressed air.
s0700247a.svg
Fig. PM-30: Crankcase Breather
Rev, A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flyer veh¡clês described in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and des¡gn applications or registrations ln the United States and Canada,
PM-63
l\l Ë Vt/
t LYË Ftr
2.l8.3,2,lnspection & Cleaning
1. lnspect the breather cover and base
for
cracks or other damage.
2. Clean any debris or sludge buildup
from
inside the breather cover and base. Be
careful not to allow debris or cleaning fluid
to enter the crankcase when cleaning the
breather base.
2.1
8,3.3.lnstallation
1. Lubricate the O-ring on the new breather
element with engine oil.
2. lnstall
the new breather element onto the
breather base.
3. lnstall the breather cover using
eleven
bolts. Torque bolts to 44 in-lb. (5 Nm) in the
sequence shown. See "Fig. PM-31:
Breather Cover Torque Sequence" on
page 64.
s0700248a.wmf
Fig. PM-31: Breather Cover Torque Sequence
PM
.64
Ths New Flyer veh¡cles descr¡bed in this manual may be protected by one or more
and in other countriês. Refor to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Rev.A-Jan2020'15
]\lËVt/ ËLYËË!
2.19. 72,000 Miles (116,000 km)
2.19.1. Rear Axle Oil Change
U9NOTE:
An oilfilter is installed inside the axle housing but does not need to be changed
unless the differential assembly is being
replaced. Refer to Secfion 2 of this manual
for axle housing oil filter replacement procedure.
Use this oil change interval only if operating in a hot temperature region. Refer to
2.2. "Rear Axle Operating Conditions" on
page 2 in this section for a definition of a
hot temperature region. Refer to
2.34,
"Fluid & Lubrication Guide" on page 91 in
this section for fluid specification.
2.l9.1.l.Drain
s0l1711a.svg
Differential fluid can reach operating
temperatures in excess of 2'12"F
(100'C). Allow adequate time for
differential to cool before draining fluid.
1.
Ensure vehicle is parked on a level surface
or raised to a working height that maintains
a level attitude.
2. Place
a suitably sized container
Fig.
PM-32: Rear Axle Drain & Fill Locations
2.19.1.2.Fill
1.
¡gNOTE:
tsttoTE:
cant size or chips of metal will require
further investigation to determine cause.
2.
the fill plug from the front of the
differential housing. See "Fig. PM-32: Rear
Axle Drain & Fill Locations" on page 65.
3. Remove
the differential housing and allow the differential to drain completely.
particles
Fine "fuzz-like" metal particles are considered normal but any so/id s/lvers of signifi-
the differential gear housing.
4. Remove the drain plug from the bottom of
of metal
and wipe clean.
beneath
Differential gear housing oil fill quantity is
approximately 4.0 U.S. gallons (15 liters)
lnspect the magnetic drain plug for any sig-
nificant accumulation
Clean and inspect the threads of the drain
plug before applying Loctite-567 thread
sealant. lnstall and torque the drain plug to
52 ft-lb. (70 Nm).
3. Add slightly less than 4.0 U.S. gallons
(15
liters) and allow fluid level to stabilize.
4.
Continue to add fluid slowly until the fluid is
levelwith the bottom of the fill plug.
5.
lnstall the fill plug and torque to 52 ft-lb. (70
Nm).
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
patents and design appllcations or registrations in the United States and Canada,
PM
.65
75,000 Miles (120,700 km) Preventive Maintenance lU Ë UL/
2.20. 75,000 Miles (120,700 km)
Preventive Mai ntenance
2.20.1. Transmission Filters
Fluid and filter change frequency is
determined by the severity of transmission service. More frequent changes
may be necessary if the operating conditions create high levels of contamina-
tion or overheating. Perform an oil
analysis to determine proper change
interval if there is any question as to the
severity of the transmission duty cycle.
Refer to Allison Service Manual and
Allison Service Tip #1099 for more
information on oil analysis and recommended change intervals.
UgNOTE:
Refer to Allison Service Manual and Allison Servlce Tips #1099 for more information on fluid and filter change intervals and
fluid contamination.
IgNOTE:
The transmission in fhls vehicle is
equipped with AIIison Prognostics. Ihis
feature allows cusfomers to maximize the
life of transmission fluid and filters through
s LYË
Ët
Refer to Section 5 of this manual for more
information on Allison Prognostics.
Change both filters every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km), 3,000 hours, or 36 months
and top up fluid. Refer to 2.23. '150,000
Miles (241,400 km) Preventive Maintenance" on page 67 in this section for procedure.
2.21. 96,000 Miles (154,500 km)
Perform major alignment. Refer to Section
3 of this manual for procedure.
2.22. 108,000 Miles (174,000 km)
2.22.1. Rear Axle Oil Ghange
Use this oil change interval only if operatmoderate temperature region.
Refer to 2.2. "Rear Axle Operating Conditions" on page2 in this section for a definition of a moderate tenrperature region.
Refer to 2.19.1. "Rear Axle Oil Change" on
page 65 in this section for oil change drain
and fill procedure. Refer to 2.34^ "Fluid &
Lubrication Guide" on page g1 in this section for fluid specification.
ing in
a
an interactive display on the Shr¡t Se/ecfor.
PM-66
patents and deslgn âppl¡cations or reg¡strations in the United States and Canada,
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
l\1,Ë
\lV ÍË'LYË Ël 150,000 Miles (241,400 kml Preventive Maintenance
2.23. 150,000 Miles (241,400km1
150,000 miles (240,000 km), 6,000 hrs., or
48 months. See "Fiq. PM-33:Transmission
Oil Filters" on page ô8.
I€NOTE:
2,23,'1, Transmission Fluid
The transmission should be at the operat-
ing temperature of 160 to 200"F (71 to
93"C) when the oil is drained. This will
ensure quicker and better drainage. Check
oilfor contamination. Refer to Section 5 of
this manual if contaminaflon exlsfs.
Fluid and filter change frequency is
determined by the severity of transmission service. More frequent changes
may be necessary if the operating conditions create high levels of contamination or overheating. Perform an oil
1.
analysis to determine proper change
interval if there is any question as to the
severity of the transmission duty cycle.
Remove the drain plug from the control
module and allow the oil to drain. Check
the condition of the oil per Section 5 of this
manual.
Refer to Allison Service Manual and
Allison Service Tip #1099 for more
information on oil analysis and recom-
2. To remove filters, remove twelve bolts, two
mended change intervals.
3. To install filters, prelube and install the two
NgNOTE:
O-rings, two square cut seals followed by
the filters (lube O-ring on cover and in filter
cartridge only) onto the filter covers.
Refer to Allison Servlce Manual and Allison Service Tips #1099 for more information on fluid and filter change intervals and
filter covers, two O-rings, two square cut
seals and two filters.
4.
fluid contamination.
bolts to draw cover to sump: this can damage cover/seal/sump).
¡gNOTE:
The transmission in fhls vehicle is
equipped with Allison Prognostics. This
feature allows customers to maximize the
life of transmission fluid and filters through
an interactive display on the Shift Selector.
Refer to Secfion 5 of this manual for more
information on Allison Prognostics.
(120,000 km), 3,000 hrs., or 36 months
and top up fluid. Change the fluid every
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
lndex each filter/cover assembly to the
holes in the channel plate/sump. Push
cover assembly to seat seals (do not use
lnstall six bolts into each cover and tighten
to 42to 50 ft-lb. (57 to 68 Nm).
b.
lnspect the drain plug(s) O-ring and
replace if necessary. Reinstall the 0.750 16 UNF - 2A drain plug(s) and tighten to 18
to 24 ft-lb. (25 to 32 Nm).
7. Fill transmission with new oil. Refer to Sec-
tion 5 of this manual for required quantities.
The New Flyer vehicles described in th¡s manual may be protected by onê or more
patents and design applications or registrations in the United Stales and Canada,
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformatlon' in thls manual.
PM
-67
Vl/
200,000 Miles (321,000 km) Preventive Maintenance tU Ë
Ë L-YË Ft
FILTER COVER
LUBE
MAIN
aõ)
FTLTER
-=--W
fõ')
W
O
@
O-RING
@
::i:.-=@ I
seuARE
DRAIN PLUG
BoLr
cur
---(Õ)
--"=-&
s0l81O2a,wmf
Fig. PM-33: Transmission Oil Filters
2.24. 200,000 Miles (321,000 km)
2.24.1. Muffler Particulate Filter
Every 200,000 miles or 6,500 operating
hours remove the muffler particulate filter
repair location for cleaning or replacement.
Specialized cleaning equipment is required
to perform this maintenance. Refer to Section 4 of this manual for further information
on this equipment and the removal procedure for the muffler and the particulate filter.
and send it to an authorized Cummins
PM-68
Tho New Flyer veh¡clês describod in this mânual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applicat¡ons or registrations in the Un¡ted States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" ¡n th¡s manual.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
Trl
Ë
\IV F'L-YË'tr|
2.24.2. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filter
5. Remove and discard the equalizing
Replace the diesel exhaust fluid filter every
200,000 miles (321,000 km) or 6,500 operating hours, whichever occurs first.
¡€NOTE:
Examine the filter elements for evidence of
contamination prior to discarding the ele-
2.24.2.1. Removal
ment. Refer
2.24.2.2.C1ean ing & I nspection
IgNOTE:
The purge cycle occurs automatically following vehicle shut down and will pump all
fluid from the lines back into the tank. The
dosing module, located on the Se/ecfive
Catalyst Reduction (SCR) device will emit
an audible pumping sound throughout the
1. lnspect the diesel exhaust filter for
debris
or contamination using visual and aromatic
indicators. lf debris is evident, also check:
O
Diesel exhaust fluid tank pick up screen.
Refer to Cummins Service Manual.
Í
The dosing unit inlet connector Refer to
Cummins Service Manual,
purge cycle.
UgNOTE:
2, Set the Battery Disconnect
switch to the
OFF position once the purge cycle is com-
Refer to "Contamination/lncorrect Fluid' in
Section 4 of this manual for flushing procedures. Also refer to Cummins Servlce
Manual for additional information on contaminated diesel exhaust fluid.
pleted.
4.
2.24.2.2. "Cleaning &
inspection procedure.
ENGINE position and allow at least 5 minutes for the purge cycle to complete before
3.
to
lnspection" on page 69 tn fhls section for
1. Set the Master Run switch to the STOPservicing the filter.
ele-
ment and filter element.
Locate the filter housing on the bottom of
the SCR Supply Module, lnspect the area
around the seal and vent of the filter cap
for signs of leakage. See "Fig. PM-34: Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Filter" on page 70.
2.
NgNOTE:
Diesel exhaust fluid leaks leave a
3. lnspect the filter cap for
Clean the filter cap with warm water and a
clean cloth.
cracks or holes
that could create a diesel exhaust fluid leak
white
deposif. /f deposlfs are found, inspect components for defects. Refer to 2.24.2.2.
"Cleaning & lnspection" on page 69 in this
secfion for inspection requ irements.
4.
Unscrew the diesel exhaust fluid filter cap.
5. lnspect the threads of the filter housing on
NgNOTE:
Path.
Check the condition of the threads on the
filter cap. Replace the filter cap if thread
damage is evident.
the SCR Supply Module. This is especially
There may be residual diesel exhaust fluid
important if the filter cap was damaged.
Replace the entire SCR Supply Module if
in the filter
thread damage is evident.
housing. Place a container
below the diesel exhaust fluid filter cap to
catch any spillage.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" ln this manual.
PM
.69
200,000 Miles (321,000 km) Preventive Maintenance 1\I Ë
2.24.2.3.lnsta
II
M/ t tYË
Ë!
atio n
U€NOTE:
Lubrication of the diesel exhaust fluid filter
NEVER operate the vehicle with the filter cap removed.
o-rings is not required.
1. Slide the diesel exhaust fluid filter equalizing element into the diesel exhaust fluid
ter cartridge.
2.
lnsert the filter assembly into the
of the SCR module.
3. lnstallthe filter cap and torque
(2.0
Nm).
fil-
housing
to 177 in-lb
4'
Start the vehicle and check for leaks.
r€l¡leff
¡
The aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid
dosing sysfem will not prime until the correcf scR temperatures are reached' To
verify that there are no diesel exhaust fluid
leaks, initiate a stationary regeneration to
get the SCR sysfem up to temperature.
m.
O\r
1.
SCR Supply Module
Í']t-
2. SCR Control Module
3. Filter Cap
4. Equalizing Element
5. O-Ring
6. Filter Element
@-o
Ç-t-,
s0700262a.sv9
Fig. PM-34: Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Filter
PM - 70
The New Flver vehicles described in this manual mav be orotected bv one or more
patents anddesign applications or registrations ìn ttíe Uri¡ted States"and
and in other countries. Refer to'Veh¡cle Patent lnformation" in lhis manual.
canada,
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
l\l Ë'Vl/
ilfr
LYË'Fl
5.
2.24.3. DEF Tank lnlet Filter
usruotE:
The DEF tank filter replacement interval
will be dependent on operating and environmental conditions. Manually filling the
tank through the filler cap offers potential
free from the tank,
for entry of contaminants. Adjust to a more
frequent replacement interval if suction filter appears dirty or has an accumulation of
DO NOT pull directly upward on MFHU
when removing it from the tank as this
might damage the head unit and seal
bore, ALWAYS angle the unit out of the
tank to prevent damage.
DEF crystals.
Replace the DEF tank inlet filter every
200,000 miles (321,000 km) or 6,500 operating hours, whichever occurs first, as follows:
5.Use a flat head screwdriver to gently pry
under the head unit while simultaneously
pulling on the top of the unit. Continue prying and pulling until the mounting base is
6. Pullthe MFHU out of the tank untilthe inlet
filter approaches the opening in the tank.
IgNOTE:
Angle the MFHU and fold the filter element
upwards. Continue to carefully remove the
MFHU until completely free of the tank
The multi-function head unit assembly
(MFHU) must be removed from the DEF
bore.
tank in order to replace the inlet filter.
Tox filter retention screw
located near the bottom of the DEF suction
tube. Discard the screw.
7, Remove the T15
OFF position.
2. Disconnect
the electrical connectors, cool-
B.
Pull the filter off the suction tube and dis-
ant lines, and DEF fluid lines from the
multi-function head unit assembly of the
DEF tank. See "Fig. PM-35: DEF Tank
card the filter.
lnlet Filter" on page 72.
Examine the filter and if extremely dirty or
contaminated, it is recommended that the
3.
Mark the position of the MFHU relative to
the DEF tank.
4.
Remove the two T25 Torx screws securing
the retaining ring to the tank and remove
the retaining ring.
DO NOT pull on wiring harnesses or fittings when trying to remove filter head
from tank.
Rev.A -Jan202015
IgNOTE:
tank be cleaned internally.
the suction tube housing of the
new filter onto the bottom of the suction
tube and press the filter flush against the
9. Position
bottom of the heater tube fin. Align the filter
so that the retention screw can be installed
into the housing.
l0.lnstall a new retention screw,
11.Apply a thin layer of O-ring lubricant to the
bore seal O-ring.
The New Flyer veh¡cles described ln this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrations in the United Stâtes and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" ln thls manual.
PM
.7I
l\l Ë'Vtf' tr LYË trl
l3.Position the MFHU as marked during
removal and press the on the top of the
blue mounting base until completely
DO NOT push the MFHU directly into
the tank as this could damage the unit.
seated in the tank bore.
l4.Replace the retaining ring on the head unit
and install the two T25 Tox
12.Fold the filter element upward and position
the bottom of the MFHU inside the tank
bore at an angle. Carefully work the unit
through the bore until the bottom of the unit
and filter are inside the tank.
screws,
Torque the screws 20 to 30 in-lb.
1
5.Reconnect the electrical connectors, coolant lines, and DEF fluid lines to the MFHU.
16.Reset Battery Disconnect switch
to
ON
position.
17.Start engine and check for coolant or DEF
l\[
line leaks.
DO NOT press directly on the fittings
when installing the MFHU into the tank.
MULTI-FUNCTION HEAD UNIT
MOUNTING BASE
RETENTION SCREW
INLET FILTER
FILLER CAP
s0700352a.sv9
Fig.
PM.72
PM-35: DEF Tank lnlet Filter
patents and design applications or registrations in the Un¡tod States and Canada,
and ¡n other countries, Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" in this manual.
Rev. A
-Jan 20 2015
ht Ë'VV tr LY'Ë ËI
Six Month Preventive Maintenance
4.
2.25. Six Month Preventive
Maintenance
5. Place the parking brake control
2.25.1. D-2 Governor
Perform an operating and leakage test
every six months or 1,500 hours, whichever occurs first. Refer to Section B of this
spring brake actuators release fully.
6. With the parking control valve in
sure reading is incorrect, the valve must be
replaced.
an operating test and
7
2.25.3. ST-l Safety Valve
Every six months or 1,500 operating hours
perform operating and leakage test. Refer
to Section B of this manual for test procedure.
the
RELEASE position, note the gauge pressure reading. Spring brake actuator holdoff pressure should be 107 psi. lf the pres-
2.25.2. PR-2 Pressure Protection Valve
leakage
check of the valve at this interval. Refer to
Section B of this manual for procedure.
valve in the
RELEASE position. Observe that the
manual for procedure.
Perform
Remove the plug from the unused delivery
a test pressure gauge
known to be accurate.
port and install
.
Place the parking brake control valve in the
APPLIED position: The gauge reading
should drop to zero promptly. A slow
release of pressure, more than three seconds, would indicate faulty operation.
Replace the valve.
B. Maintain the parking brake control valve in
the APPLIED position and gradually apply
the brake treadle. The reading on the test
pressure gauge, installed in the delivery
2.25.4. SR-7 Spring Brake Modulating Valve
Perform an operating and leakage test
every six months or 1,500 hours, which-
port should increase.
9. Place the parking
brake control valve in the
RELEASE position.
ever occurs first.
10.Drain the rear brake reservoir to zero psi.
1
DO NOT attempt to disassemble and
service the valve. The valve contains
high spring forces that could result in
personal injury if disassembled.
2.25.4.1.Operati ng Test
1. Block vehicle and hold by means
l.Apply the brake treadle several times and
note that the pressure reading on the
gauge decreases each time the brake treadle is applied. After several applications,
pressure on the gauge will drop to the
point where release of the spring brake
actuators will no longer occur.
2.25.4.2.Leakage Test
other
than vehicle brakes.
With the air system fully charged and the
cut-out
parking brake control valve in the
RELEASE position, coat all the ports,
including the exhaust port, with a soap
3. Place parking brake control valve in the
solution. A '1" bubble in three seconds (175
SCCM)is permitted.
2. Charge air system to governor
pressure.
APPLIED position. Observe that the spring
brake actuators apply promptly,
lf the Spring Brake Modulating Valve does
not function as described in the operating
test, or leakage is excessive, it is recommended that the valve be replaced.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
patents and design appl¡cations or registrat¡ons in the Un¡ted States and Canada,
Copyright O 2015 New Flyer lndustf¡es Canada ULC
PM-73
l\I Ë \,V F LYE
ËI
the vehicle is exposed to salt spray or
extremes of temperature. lt is recommended that the bearings be greased
2.25.5. SC-1 Single Gheck Valve
to Section B of this manual for test proce-
before the start of the winter season, and
then again immediately following the winter
season. The lubrication interval may be
extended to once every year or 36,000
miles (58,000 km), whichever occurs first if
operating under less severe conditions.
Lubricate the bearings as follows:
dure.
2.25.6. DC-4 Double Gheck Valve
to Section B of this manual for test procedure.
2.25.7. Pressure Reducing Valve
DO NOT over-pressurize the bearing
cavity when greasing the bearing, as
this could cause the sealíng washe¡
located below the circlip, to bulge outward. Replace sealing washer if dis-
lnspect and test the pressure reducing
valve every six months or 1500 operating
hours, whichever occurs first. Refer to Section B of this manual for procedure.
torted.
2.25.8. R-14 Brake Relay Valve
Perform
an operating and leakage
1.
test
every six months or 1,500 operating hours.
Refer to Section B of this manual for procedure.
2.25.9. Brake Foot Valve
to Section B of this manual for test procedure. Check for physical damage such as
broken air lines and missing parts.
2.25,1
0.Steering Knuckle
Lubricate the upper and lower steering
knuckle bearings every six months if oper-
Remove the protective plastic cap from the
grease fitting and purge-lubricate the bearing. Use only Renolit LX-OTP-2lubricant.
IgNOTE:
To aid purging of old grease, ensure steering knuckle and grease are at room temperature. Rotate the steering knuckle left
and right while applying grease so that the
old grease can escape.
2. Clean any excess grease from the steering
knuckle joint as well as the area above the
sealing washer,
3. lnstall protective plastic cap on grease fit-
ting.
ating under harsh winter conditions where
PM.74
The New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may be protectod by one or more
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patont lnformat¡on" in this manual.
Rev.A-Jan202015
lu Ë \ru Iñ'L .Ë,Ël
2.25.11,Primary (Suction) Fuel Filter
2.25.12.Engine Gompartment Access Door
lnspection
NgNOTE:
The frequency at which the fuel filter collar
threads require lubrication is dependent on
operating conditions. If operating in a
harsh winter or salt corrosion environment,
lubricate the collar threads every six
months.
Lubricate the threads of the fuel collar
every six months, or at the beginning and
end of the winter season, as follows:
lnspect, clean, and lubricate the scissor
hinges on the engine compartment door
every six months as follows:
1. Operate the door through its opening
range while observing the hinge for
smooth operation. Ensure the hinge is not
buckled or distorted. Replace the hinge if
damaged.
2. Use compressed air to blow out any
grit
from the pivot points of the hinge.
1. Set the Battery Disconnect switch to
the
OFF position.
2.
3. Wipe any displaced lubricant or grit with
a
clean cloth.
Remove the vent cap located on top of the
clear cover.
3. Place a suitable container beneath
drain valve and drain the fuel until
the
it
is
4. Use a brush to work
Never-Seez into all
the pivot points of the hinge.
5. Wipe excess
lubricant with a clean cloth.
below the level of the collar.
4.
Use a collar wrench to loosen and remove
the collar.
5. Apply a thin coating of NEVER-SEEZ@
anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the
collar and fuel filter body.
6.
7.
2.25.13.F ire Suppression System
lnspect the fire suppression system every
six months in accordance with Fogmaker
control plan for semi-annual service. Refer
to Fogmaker North America Service Manual 8011-002 for inspection requirements.
Reinstall collar and hand{ighten only.
Prime the unit by filling the clear cover with
clean diesel fuel until it reaches the top of
the filter.
B. Hand-tighten the vent cap.
9.
Start the engine and operate at fast idle for
at least one minute to purge any air from
the system.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flyèr vèhicles descr¡bed in this manual may be protected by one or more
and ln othêr countr¡es. Refer to "Vohicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
PM
.75
l\IËI't' FL,YËËI
2.25.14.Power Steering Miter Box
Locate the grease fitting on the bottom of
the power steering miter box. Use a manual grease gun and apply only two pumps
of grease to lubricate the miter box. Do not
apply excessive pressure or quantity of
grease that could result in damage to
seals. Refer Io 2.34. "Fluid & Lubrication
Guide" on page 91 in this section for lubricant specification. See "Fig. PM-36: Power
Steering Miter Box Lubrication"
on
page 76.
GREASE
FITTING
s0700201a.wmf
Fig. PM-36: Power Steering Miter Box Lubrication
PM
.76
patents and design applications or registrations ln the United States and Canada,
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in thls manual,
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
t\t Ë \tv
sü
LY'Ë
Yearly Preventive Maintenance
Ël
2.26. Yearly Preventive Maintenance
4.
possible from the actuating cylinder and
2.26.1. Door Sensitive Edge lnspection & Test
lnspect and test the door sensitive edge
function every year or 100,000 door operating cycles, whichever occurs first.
fl
fl
-l
lines.
5. lnspect filters and screens. Refer to
2.26.3.2. "Screen & Filter lnspection" on
page 78 in this section for replacement
procedure. See "Fig. PM-37: Hydraulic
Visually inspect door sensitive edge for
cuts, tears, or other damage. Replace sensitive edge if damaged.
lnspect for properly connect tubing from
sensitive edge to pressure wave switch.
Power Pack Assembly" on page 78.
6. Connect and tighten hydraulic lines
7. Fill the
reservoir. Refer to 2.34. "Fluid &
Lubrication Guide" on page 91 in this section for fluid specifications.
lnspect electrical connections on pressure
Perform a functional test on the sensitive
edge system. Refer to Section 16 of this
manual for test procedure.
2.26.2. FuelHoses
Thoroughly inspect all fuel hoses annually
to
ports "1" and "2" on the manifold.
wave switch.
D
Manually operate ramp through several
operating cycles to expel as much fluid as
B. Manually place the ramp in the stowed
position.
9.
Crack open or remove the STOW line at
the aft end of the cylinder.
10.Set the Battery Disconnect switch to the
ON position.
for cover damage, and for damaged, worn,
twisted, crimped, brittle, cracked or leaking
lines. Replace hoses whose outer cover is
worn through or whose metal reinforce-
ments are damaged. Replace all hoses in
or out of machinery every five years or during major overhaul.
2.26.3. Wheelchair Ramp Pump
2.26.3.1. Hydraulic Fluid
IgNOTE:
The yearly fluid change interual rs based
on typical transit operating conditions but
may need to be adjusted to suit actual
operating frequency. Periodic oil samplings
may also be taken to determine fluid clean/rness.
l2,Tighten the STOW pressure line at the aft
end of the cylinder and crack open or
remove the DEPLOY line at the forward
end of the cylinder.
13,Use the ramp STOW switch to 'Jog" the
unit through short stow strokes, Gradually
until a steady stream of fluid flows from the
line without air bubbles.
1. Set Battery Disconnect switch to OFF posi-
l4.Tighten the DEPLOY line at the forward
end of the cylinder.
tion.
3.
11.Use the ramp DEPLOY switch to 'Jog" the
unit through short deploy strokes, Gradually increase the length of the deploy
strokes until a steady stream of fluid flows
from the line without air bubbles.
increase the length of the stow strokes
Change fluid as follows:
2.
DO NOT allow the reservoir to run dry
while priming the pump
Suction fluid from reservoir and dispose of
fluid in accordance with local regulations.
lS.Operate the ramp through several deploy/
Disconnect hydraulic lines from ports "1"
and"2" on manifold.
16.Top up reservoir to within 1" of filler cap.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
stow cycles.
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformatlon" ¡n this manual.
PM
-77
Yearly Preventive
Maintenance
l\l Ë Vl/ F LYË
Ël
SOLENOID
COILS
24VDC MOTOR
N
BREATHER
VENT
MANIFOLD
RESERVOIR
GROMMET
Fig.
s036451 b.svg
PM-37: Hydraulic Power Pack Assembly
2,26.3.2.Screen & Filter lnspection
lnspect the inlet (suction) screen as fol-
2.
3.
lows:
1. Separate the reservoir from the manifold
by removing the four bolts and clamp
plates,
2. Remove
3. Remove
and discard the O-Ring.
inlet filter from pump and clean or
replace as necessary.
4. lnstall new
4.
5.
6.
and
tighten bolts.
Reinstall elbow fittings into manifold ports.
lnstall and tighten hydraulic lines.
the
pump manifold.
Use a hex socket to remove the breather
vent from the manifold.
3. Clean or replace the sintered bronze filter
lnspect the manifold filters as follows:
1. Disconnect hydraulic lines from
Clean or replace filters as necessary.
1. Locate the breather vent on top of
2.
5. lnstall four bolts with clamp plates
Use dental pick or similar tool to remove filter from each port.
lnspect the breather vent as follows:
O-Ring and install reservoir
onto manifold.
Remove elbow fittings from manifold.
manifold
as necessary.
4. Reinstall
breather vent into manifold.
ports,
PM
.78
Tho New Flyer vehicles dèscr¡bed ¡n this manual may be protected by one or more
and in other countries. Rêfer to "Veh¡cle Patont lnformat¡on" ¡n this manual.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
l\l Ë \r1/ F LY.Ë,FË
2.26.4. lnstrument Panel & Side Console
Once yearly, inspect the interior of the
instrument panel for loose wires. Inspect
the interior of the side console for loose
wires and chafìng air lines. Refer to Section 19 of this manual for further information on these components.
DESICCANT
CARTRIDGE
O-RINGS
2.26.5. Fire Extinguisher
Examine every 12 months to ensure extinguisher is operable. Recharge if below the
specified weight or pressure is below operable range. Replace any damaged parts.
CLAMP
Check hose for obstructions.
Record maintenance use and recharge
dates on the fire extinguisher maintenance
tag.
2.26.6. Air Dryer
O-RINGS
I9NOTE:
The desiccant replacement interval is
on operating conditions and
dependent
may need to be adjusted to suit the operating environment. The monthly preventive
maintenance to drain air tanks and record
moisture accumulation will aid in determining the optimum change interval for the
desiccant cartridge.
CARTRIDGE
BOLT
s0700296a.sv9
Fig. PM-38: Air Dryer lnspection
Rebuild the air dryer and replace the des-
iccant cartridge yearly. Refer to Section
of this manual for procedure. See
B
"Fig.
PM-38: Air Dryer lnspection" on page 79.
Rev.A-Jan202015
The New Flyer vehicles descr¡bed in this manual may be protected by one oÍ more
and in other countries, Refer to "Vehiclè Patent lnformation" in thls manual.
PM
.79
t\t,Ë'vtt F LYË
6.
2.26.7. QR-l Quick ReleaseValve
Loctite 567 thread sealant on pipe threads.
age test at every year or 1,500 hours,
1.
7.
Block the vehicle's wheels and fully charge
the air system.
2. Apply the parking
3.
brake.
Locate the QR-1 Quick Release Valve on
the front axle.
4. Apply and
ant on pipe threads.
8.
9.
Maintain full brake application and apply a
soap solution to the body and cover. No
leakage is permitted between the body
Repair or replace valves that do not function properly or have excessive leakage.
2.26.8. Air Strainer
Replace the
air strainer every year
or
36,000 miles, whichever occurs first.
1.
2.
3.
Charge the air system to operating pressure and check for leaks at the air strainer
2.26.9. Coolant Testing
UgNOTE:
This vehicle was filled at the factory with
Make and hold a full brake application and
apply a soap solution to the exhaust port.
Leakage of a 1" bubble in 3 seconds is permissible.
and cover.
7.
Connect and tighten air line.
connections.
promptly respond at both wheels.
6.
lnstall new air strainer assembly on nipple
connector, using Loctite 567 thread seal-
release the service brakes sev-
eral times and observe that the brakes
5.
Remove fittings from air strainer and install
in same position on new air strainer. Use
Perform the following operation and leak-
whichever occurs first:
Ë!
Park the vehicle on level ground and chock
the wheels.
Drain the air tanks.
Locate the air strainer on the front brake &
kneeling valve panel,
4. Disconnect air line from air strainer.
5. Unthread air strainer assembly from nipple
"Final Charge Global Coolant/Antifreeze".
Ihls is an extended life Organic Acid Technology (OAT) coolant. DO NOT use Supplemental Coolant Additives (SCA) or filter
e I e me nts conta i n i n g SCA's.
I
Test the coolant on a yearly basis to
ensure that it meets specification and that
the cooling system is not contaminated.
The coolant may remain in service if test
results are satisfactory. Obtain a sample of
the coolant and submit to a Polaris Laboratories, or equivalent testing laboratory, for
analysis.
IgNOTE:
Contact Polaris Laboratories at 1-877-B0B-
3750 and advise that you are a New Flyer
customer and are requesting a "93 Coolant
Package" test. Refer to "http://polarisI a b s.
co m/a b o uUwo rl dwid e -lo
c
ati
on
s/ no rth -
america/" for c/osesf location to forward
sample.
connector.
PM
.80
The New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may be protectèd by one or more
patents and design applicatÍons or registrations in the United States and Canada,
and ln other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patênt lnformation" in this manual.
Rev. A - Jan 20 201 5
hlËlJIt- FLY.Ë.F!
2.26.11.Headlight Aim
2,26.10.Radiator
a yearly basis.
Refer to Section I of this manual for headlight aiming procedures.
lnspect the radiator on a yearly basis as
Check headlight aim on
follows:
O
lnspect the main positive and negative
power cables for wear or frayed insulation.
Ensure the protective rubber boots are in
2.26.12.P rimary (Suction) Fuel Filter
lnspect the fuel filter every year or 40,000
miles, whichever occurs first, as follows:
place and in good condition.
lll
Check the main power cable connections
for tightness and torque to 20 ft-lb. (27 Nm)
if necessary.
D
ñ
for corrosion. Repair or replace connectors
as required.
lnspect the condition of the inner and outer
nylon bushings on the main power cable
pass-through studs.
D
t
lnspect main wiring harness and connections to TMC controller and all fans.
Í
fl
lnspect fuses and fuse holders.
lnspect support structure for any damage
or loose mounting hardware.
Unplug the electrical connectors from the
WIF sensor and heater. lnspect terminals
lnspect fuel connections for leaks. Check
condition and routing of fuel lines. Repair
as required.
2.26.1 3.Under Body lnspection
Perform under body inspection on a yearly
basis after the twelfth year of operation.
Refer to Section 11 of this manual for procedure.
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flyer vehicles descrlbed in this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and deslgn applications or registrations in the United States and Canada,
and in other countries. Refer to "Veh¡cle Patènt lnformatlon" in thls manual.
PM
.8I
I\IEVT/ FLYEFË
Two Year Preventive Maintenance
2.27. Two Year Preventive
2.27
.1.2.lnteríor Gleaning/Flush
in
g
Maintenance
2.27.1. Radiator
D
ALWAYS follow the fillíng and deaera-
lnspect radiator core for any evidence of
leakage. Repair as required.
D
lnspect exterior of radiator for buildup of
debris or blockage. lf required, clean exte-
rior of radiator by soaking. Refer to
2.27 .1.1. "Exterior Cleaning" on page 82 in
this section for cleaning procedure.
û
Inspect cooling fins for damage and
straighten with a fin comb as required.
Avoid the use of high pressure washing
or steam cleaning equipment that could
bend the cooling fins and result in
restricted airflow.
Use the following procedure to remove any
buildup of mud, salt, sand, road oils, brake
lining dust, or tire rubber/carbon black from
the exterior surface of the radiator:
Soak the radiator for 24 hours in
a
hot
(150'F) non-caustic detergent solution with
all fittings plugged.
2.
Use low pressure spray equipment with
cleaning solvent to clean the fin louvers.
J.
Final rinse with clear water and air dry.
4. lnspect cooling fins and straighten
This maintenance interval is dependent on
the condition of the cooling system and
may be extended if no evidence of contamination, such as silicate gel, oil, grease,
fuel, scale, rust, or solder bloom are found
in the system.
Clean and flush the cooling system on an
"as needed" basis only as determined by
yearly test results. Refer to 2.26.9. "Coo|ant Testing" on page 80 in this section for
testing procedure.
2.27 .1.'l, Exterior Glean ing
1.
tion procedure when flushing the cooling system. Refer to Section 6 of this
manual for procedure,
to the
original geometry using needle nose pliers
or a fin comb.
The cooling system must be cleaned and
flushed if contaminants such as silicate
gel, oil, grease, fuel, scale, rust, or solder
bloom are found in the system. Refer to
Cummins Operation and Maintenance
Manual and Cummins Coolant Requirements and Maintenance Bulletin 3666132-
07 for detailed cleaning and flushing procedures. coolant. Refer to 2,34. "Fluid &
Lubrication Guide" on page 91 in this section for recommended coolant.
2.27.2. Alternator Bearing Replacement
UgNOTE:
The two year maintenance interval is
based on vehicles operating on a 16-18
hour day, sx days a week and may need to
be adjusted depending on actualoperating
conditions and previous maintenance history. A more frequent maintenance interval
may be required for vehicles operating
under a severe duty cycle or operating in
conditions where the alternator ls exposed
to prolonged periods of high engine compartme nt tem perature s.
Replace the front and rear alternator bearing every two years. Refer to Section 9 of
this manual for bearing replacement procedure.
PM
.82
The New Flyer vehiôlos described in th¡s manual may bê protected Þy one or more
patents and des¡gn appl¡cations or registrat¡ons in the United States and Canada,
Rev.A-Jan202015
ru Ë UV ilñ'LYË FI
Check jam nuts on the rod ends for tightness.
2.27.3. Door System lnspection
Perform the following inspection/maintenance on the major door system compo-
iI
Check for excessive play in the rod ends.
Replace worn rod ends.
operating cycles, whichever occurs first:
J
Lubricate rod ends with a few drops of
SAE #20 oí1. See "Fig. PM-39: Entrance
Door Baseplate Lubrication" on page 83.
nents every two years or 250,000 door
2.27.3.1.Connecting Rods & Rod End Bearings
Í
See "Fig. PM-40: Exit Door Baseplate
Visually inspect the fore and aft connecting
Lubrication" on page 84.
rods on the baseplate for evidence of
bending or distortion. Replace damaged
connecting rods.
DOOR
MOTOR
SPHERICAL
BEARING
SPHERICAL
BEARING
CONNECTING
ROD
SPHERICAL
BEARING
s0700145a.wmf
Fig. PM-39: Entrance Door Baseplate Lubrication
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
and ¡n other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" ¡n th¡s manual.
PM -83
nlËVV FL- ËËI
s0700147a.wmf
Fig. PM-40: Exit Door Baseplate Lubrication
pivot bearing and/or bushing if wear
exceeds 0.060". DO NOT lubricate pivot
2.27.3.2.Ðoor Shaft Levers & Mounting
Hardware
t
door shaft for worn splines, cracks or other
damage. Replace damaged parts.
Í
bearing.
Visually inspect the levers on the upper
2.27.3.S.Upper Roller Guíde, Brackets, &
Bearings
Check lever clamp bolt (wedge & screw)
The upper roller bracket assembly is bolted
for tightness.
to the door panel and consists of a roller
mounted on the shaft of the bracket. The
roller tracks within the roller channel (slot
2.27.3.3.Upper Door Shaft Pivot Bearings
The upper door shaft pivot bearings locate
directly on the door baseplate. Check for
smooth rotation
of door shafts
without
binding, noise, or excessive radial or axial
play. Replace worn or damaged bearings.
These are sealed ball bearing assemblies
and do not require lubrication.
ted guide) of the baseplate.
3
Manually open the door panel, ensuring
that the roller operates smoothly within the
roller channel of the baseplate.
D
lnspect the roller for wear or flat spots. DO
NOT lubricate the outer surface of the
roller.
2.27.3.4.Lower Door Shaft Pivot Bearing
PM-84
Í
lnspect the bearing shaft on the bracket for
The lower door shaft pivot bearing assem-
wear or scoring. Lubricate the bearing
blies are bolted to the vehicle floor and
support the door shaft. A spherical bearing
rides inside a plain bushing within the
lower end of the door shaft. Check for
excessive radial play between pivot bearing and the door shaft bushing. Replace
shaft with SAE #20 oil, but DO NOT lubricate the outer surface of the roller.
3
Clean the roller channel in the baseplate
but DO NOT lubricate channel.
patents and desìgn applications or registrations ¡n the United States and Canada,
and in other countÍ¡es. Refer to'Vehicle Patent Information" in this manual.
Copyright O 2015 New Flyor lndustries Canada ULC
Rev.A-Jan202015
l\l
'P':1¡q¡r
t'LY Ë F!
2.27.3.6.Entrance Door Shaft & Arm Assembly
The upper end of the door shaft consists of
a splined shaft with a connecting arm and
rod end. The lower end of the door shaft
consists of a hollow shaft with a connecting
arm and hinged mounting bracket. See
"Fig. PM-41: Entrance Door Shaft & Arm
Assembly" on page 85.
Í
Check door shaft and arm assemblies for
any evidence of bending, twisting, or other
physical damage. Repair or replace damaged door shaft and arm assemblies as
required.
t
lnspect splines on upper end of door shaft
for wear, cracks, or other damage. Replace
damaged door shaft.
t
CONNECTING
SHOULDER
ARM
BOLT
RoD
END
-1r
--'-f-@_ìrirm
È7*
MouNTTNG
BRACKET--_
I
-rl,ôÌ
.ã9.)
7-
Clean the rod end and mounting bracket
areas on the upper and lower ends of the
door shaft using a clean dry cloth. DO NOT
lubricate the sealed spherical bearings on
rod ends.
D
lnspect upper and lower mounting brackets
for any damage and ensure that they are
securely mounted to the door panel.
Í
lnspect rod end and shoulder bolt for wear
or damage. Replace rod end and/or shoulder bolt if worn or damaged,
MOUNTING
BRACKET
s0700270a.svg
Fig. PM-41: Entrance Door Shaft & Arm Assembly
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may bs protected by one or more
patents and des¡gn applications or registrations in the Un¡ted States and Canada,
PM-85
ht Ë vtf F LY-Ë m
2.27.3.7.Éxit Door Shaft & Arm Assembly
fl
The upper and lower hinged mounting
brackets attach the door shaft and arm
PIVOT ROD
assembly to the exterior side of the door
panel. A lubrication fitting is provided on
the hinged mounting bracket to allow lubrication of the flanged bronze bushing from
the exterior of the vehicle^ See "Fig. PM-
42: Exit Door Shaft" on page 86. Check
door shaft and arm assemblies for any evidence of bending, twisting, or other physical damage. Repair or replace damaged
door shaft and arm assemblies
as
required.
Í
lnspect splines on upper end of door shaft
for wear, cracks, or other damage. Replace
damaged door shaft.
Í
lnspect hinged mounting bracket for excessive play.
fl
lnspect flanged bronze bushing and pin for
wear or scoring. Replace flanged bushing
and pivot pin if worn or damaged.
ú
DOOR SHAFT
(TYPtCAL BOTH
srDEs)
Lubricate hinged mounting bracket at
grease fitting, using a high pressure, low
temperature (-40' F) grease.
s07001 98a.svg
Fig. PM-42: Exit Door Shaft
PM
.86
patents and design applications or registrat¡ons ¡n the United States and Canada,
Rev.A-Jan202015
t\l Ë \rlt
t LY Ë,Ft
2.27 .3.1 0.Door Operator Lim it Switches
2.27.3.8.Door Panels
t
Í
lnspect door panels for structural damage.
Repair or replace panel if required.
Check that the limit switches function properly.
o lnspect electrical connections.
lnspect exterior door panel pocket seals for
cuts, tears, excessive wear, or other damage. Replace pocket seals if required.
O
Repair
loose connections.
D Adjust switch actuation point and overtravel for limit switches Refer to Section 16
of this manual for adjustment procedures.
lnspect leading edge and door jamb seals
for cuts, tears, excessive wear, or other
damage. Replace if required.
ú
Apply a light film of silicone lubricant on 2'27.3'11'SolenoidValves
the mating surfaces of the leadinS edS:
Í Check for proper operation.
and door jamb seals and wipe clean with
dry
cloth.
t
fl
a
2.27.3.9.Door PanelTop & Bottom Seal
lnspect for damage
to brush bristles
lnspect air lines to solenoid and ensure
connections are tight.
Assemblies
O
lnspect electrical connections.
or
rubber seal strip. Replace brush if bristles
are damaged.
2.27
.3.I?.Driver's Door Controller
-1
Operate the door controller through all
positions and check for proper function.
O
Adjust height of top brush to provide light
contact only with the top edge of door panels so as to prevent binding.
Í
Adjust height of bottom brush to provide
light contact only with the top surface of
Verify that the door controller moves freely
without binding. Use a spring scale to
measure torque required to rotate controller. Replace door controller torque
if
exceeds 15 in-lbs.
the flooring so as to prevent binding.
Rev,A -Jan202015
The New Flyer vehicles described in this manual may be p[otected by one or more
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on' in this manual.
PM-87
t\t Ë vt/ tr
Three Year Preventive Maintenance
LYË
û
Upper door shaft pivot bearings
Maintenance
D
Door panel top sealassembly
2.28.1. Under Body Inspection
3
Í
Door panel bottom seal assembly
2.28. Three Year Preventive
Perform under body inspection at this interval during the first twelve years of operation. Refer to Section 11 of this manual for
procedure.
NgNOTE:
Under body inspection must be performed
on a yearly basis after the twelfth year of
Fl
Door panel pocket seals
D Solenoid valves
D Sensitive edge system including
door
edge, transfer tube, pressure wave switch,
and mechanical limit switches.
2.30. Six Year Preventive Maintenance
operation.
2.29. Five Year Preventive
Maintenance
Every five years, drain and refill the fire
suppression system extinguisher cylinder.
Refer to Fogmaker Manual No. 8015-002
for drain and refill procedure. This manual
has been supplied with this bus build.
Observe all required cautions and warnings when performing procedure.
2.29.2. Door Motor Rebuild
The door motor (differential engine) should
be disassembled, cleaned, inspected, and
re-lubricated every five years or 500,000
door operating cycles, whichever occurs
first. Refer to Section 16 of this manual for
rebuild procedure.
2.29.3. Door Component Replacement
It is recommended that the following door
components or assemblies be replaced
every five years or 500,000 door operating
cycles. The replacement interval may need
to be adjusted depending on the actual
operating conditions. Operating in a harsh
environment where the door components
are exposed to extremes in temperature,
salt spray, sand, grit, or other contaminants
will shorten the life expectancy of the door
system components.
tr
PM
.88
Connecting rods and rod end bearings
Inspect the fire extinguisher every six
years. Clean all parts to ensure they are
operable and refill with new powder and
repressurize. Refer to National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard No.10
for additional information.
2.30.2. Gooling System
UgNOTE:
This vehicle was filled at the factory with
"Final Charge Global Coolant/Antifreeze".
Ihls rs an extended life Organic Acid Technology (OAT) coolant. DO NOT use Supplemental Coolant Additives (SCA) or filter
elements containing SCA 3.
The coolant change interval is dependent
on the use of an Extended Life Coolant
(ELC) and the condition of the coolant as
determined by yearly testing. Refer to
2.26.9. "Coolant Testing" on page 80 in this
section for testing procedure. The coolant
change interval may continue
to
be
extended if test results are satisfactory.
lf the cooling system is not being tested on
a yearly basis, then it is recommended that
the cooling system be drained, flushed,
and refilled at least every six years.
2.30.3. Booster Pump
Replace the pump motor bearings every
six years. Refer to Section 10 of this manual for procedure.
The New Flyer vehicles described ¡n this manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registrations ln the United States and Canada,
and in olher countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" in this manual.
Copyright @ 2015 New Flyêr lndustr¡es Canada ULC
Rev,
A -Jan202015
htË\rv täLYËËt
Ten Year Preventive Maintenance
2.31. Ten Year Preventive Maintenance
Every ten years, send the fire suppression
system extinguisher cylinder to Fogmaker
North America for cylinder rebuild.
2.31.2. Door Component Replacement
It is recommended that the following door
components or assemblies be replaced
every ten years or 1,000,000 door operating cycles. The replacement interval may
need to be adjusted depending on the
actual operating conditions. Operating in a
harsh environment where the door components are exposed to extremes in tempera-
ture, salt spray, sand, grit, or
other
contaminants will shorten the life expectancy of the door system components.
D
D
fJ
Door operator/differential engine
tl
Upper roller guides, brackets, & bearings
Door shaft levers and mounting hardware
Lower door shaft pivot bearings
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
t
3
Door panel leading edge seals
D
Driver's door controller
t
3
ú
Door panels
Door paneljamb seals
Shaft and arm assemblies
Shaft and arm assembly hinged mounting
brackets.
2.32. Twelve Year Prevent¡ve
Maintenance
Hydrostatically test the fire extinguisher
every twelve years. Refer to label on fire
extinguisher for test pressure. Clean all
parts to ensure they are operable and refill
with new powder and repressurize. Record
maintenance and recharge date on fire
extinguisher inspection tag. Refer to
National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) Standard No.10 for additional information.
and ln olher countries. RefeÍ to "Veh¡cle Patent lnformatlon" ¡n this manuaf.
PM-89
t\lËVt' TLYËËN
Fluid & Lubrication Points
2.33. Fluid & Lubrication Points
ENTRANCE DOOR
BASEPLATE
I
GREASE
FITTING
DETAIL A
FRO-NTÃXIE
LUBRICATION POINTS
STREETSIDE
10
11
10
12
13
14
s00071 91 b.svg
Fig.
PM-90
PM-43: Fluid & Lubrication Points
and in other counk¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformation" ¡n th¡s manual.
Copyright @ 20 1 5 New Flyer lndustr¡es Canada ULC
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
fd,Ë I¡M F
LYË
Fluid & Lubrication Guide
Fl
2.34. Fluid & Lubrication Guide
The following Guide is a convenient reference for the lubrication points on your New
Flyer vehicle. lt provides component locations, lubrication procedures and intervals,
and lubricant types. Further
Item
1
Gomponent
preventive
Procedure
maintenance information on each component in this Guide can be found in this section of the manual under the component's
specific maintenance interval. See "Fig.
PM-43: Fluid & Lubrication Points" on
page 90.
lnterval
Fill bottle as required
Windshield Washer
Bottle
Lube Type
Methylene Alcohol
Windshield Washer
Fluid
2
Entrance Door
Baseplate
Lubricate connecting
rod spherical
bearings (4 bearings)
Every two years
SAE 20
Lubricate upper
Every two years
SAE 20
Lubricate connecting
rod spherical
bearings (4 bearings)
Every two years
SAE 20
Lubricate upper
bracket bearing shaft
Every two years
SAE 20
Lubricate door shaft
hinged mounting
bracket at grease
fitting
Every two years
Refer to 2.25.14.
"Power Steering
Miter Box" on
page 76 in this
section for procedure
Every six months
Calcium sulfonate
complex grease such
as Petro Canada
Peerless LLC or
equivalent
Refer to 2.25.10.
"Steering Knuckle"
on page 74 in this
Every 6 months or
30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Special-Purpose
Grease. Refer to
Lubricate brake valve
plunger, roller & pin
Every 24,000 miles
(38,600 km)
bracket bearing shaft
3
4
Exit Door Baseplate
Power Steering Miter
Box
5
Steering Knuckle
Bearings
o
Brake Treadle & Foot
Valve Assembly
High pressure, low
temperature (-40'F)
grease
2.34.2. "MAN Axle
Approved Greases"
on page 95 in this
section for listing
Barium Grease per
BW-204-M (Bendix
#246671)
7
Wheelchair Ramp
Lubricate chains,
Mechanism
teflon bearings,
Every six months
White Lithium Grease
(Aerosol Spray)
bronze bushings, &
all sliding surfaces
Rev.A-Jan202015
The New Flyer vehicles descr¡bed in thls manual may be protected by one or more
patents and design applications or registratlons ln the United States and Canada,
and in other countr¡es. Refèr to "Vehiclê Patent lnformation' in this manual.
PM
.9I
ht Ë,Vll
Item
B
Component
Wheelchair Ramp
Procedure
Rear Axle Carrier
Lube Type
Check fluid
Every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km)
DEXRON@ - III
Change fluid
Yearly
DEXRON@ - III
Check for leaks
under vehicle
Daily
Check oil levelat
carrier fill plug
Check at first 3,000
miles (4,800 km),
thereafter every 6,000
miles (9,600 km)
Synthetic-Based
Extreme Pressure
Gear Oil. Refer to
2.34.1. "MAN Axle
Approved Synthetic
Oils" on page 95 in
this section for listing
Change Oil
Drain & change upon
receipt of vehicle, &
thereafter change
every 72,000 miles
(116,500 km)for "hot
region" operation.
Refer to 2.2. "Rear
Axle Operating
Conditions" on page 2
in this section for
definition. Change
every 108,000 miles
(174,000 km) for
"moderate region"
operation. Refer to
2.2. "Rear Axle
Operating Conditions"
on page 2 in this
section for definition.
Reservoir
I
lnterval
t LYË Ël
10
Battery Slides
Check & keep clean
Every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km)
Multi-Purpose Grease
11
Battery Terminals
Check & apply
lubricant as required
Every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km)
Dielectric grease
such as Trucklite
NYK-77
12
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Filter
Change filter
Every 200,000 miles
(321,000 km)
APlCertified
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Tank
Check fluid & fill as
required using
pressure fill port
Daily
APlCertified
13
PM
.92
patents and design applications or registrat¡ons in the United States and Canada,
and ¡n other countries. Refer to "Veh¡cle Patent lnformation" in th¡s manual.
Stabilized Urea
Premix meeting ISO
22241-l standard
Stabilized Urea
Premix meeting ISO
22241-l standard
Rev. A
-Jan 20 2015
ht Ë VV lä LY, Ë:ÌT
Item
14
Gomponent
Power Steering
Reservoir
Procedure
16
Engine
Transmission
Lube Type
Check fluid level
through sight glass
Daily
Change filter
Every 18,000 miles
TranSyndrM Synthetic
(29,000 km)
Transmission Fluid
Every 36,000 miles
(58,000 km)
Check dipstick level
Daily
Chevron Delo 400 LE
15W-40 (APr CJ-4)
Drain & refill
Every 6,000 miles
(e,600 km)
Chevron Delo 400 LE
15W-40 (APr CJ-4)
Check dipstick level
Daily
Change fluid
15
lnterval
Transmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid
Drain & refill
(120,000 km), 3,000 hrs., or 36 months & top
up fluid. Change the fluid every 150,000 miles
(240,000 km), 6,000 hrs., or 48 months. Refer
to2.23. "150,000 Miles (241,400 km)
Preventive Maintenance" on page 67 in this
section for procedure.
17
Driveshaft Slip Joint
Refer to 2.9.4.
"Driveshaft" on
page 16 in this
Upon receipt of
vehicle, & thereafter
every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km)
Extreme Pressure
Grease meeting NLGI
Grade 2 specification
with operating
temperature range of
325"F to -10'F
(163"C to -23'C). Use
CITGO Lithoplex RT-2
or equivalent
18
Driveshaft U-Joints
Refer to 2.9.4.
"Driveshaft" on
page 16 in this
Upon receipt of
vehicle, & thereafter
every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km)
Extreme Pressure
Grease meeting NLGI
with operating
325'F to -10"F
(163'C to -23"C). Use
or equivalent
19
Engine Oil Filters
Replace
(full-flow, spin-on)
Every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km)
Chevron Delo 400 LE
15W-40 (APr CJ-4)
Rev. A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flyer vehicles descr¡bed in thls manual may be protected by one or more
PM
.93
*.6 Vl/ F LYË
FI
Lube Type
Drain & fillcooling
Test coolant every
system. Flush only if
year. Change interval
can be extended
dependent on yearly
test results.
required
Steering Driveshafts
Purge lubricate at
grease fittings. Refer
to 2.9.6. "Steering
Driveshafts" on
page 19 in this
Every 6,000 miles
(9,600 km)
Final Charge 50/50@
Extended Life
Antifreeze
Extreme Pressure
Grease meeting NLGI
with operating
325"F to -1 0'F
(163'C to -23'C). Use
or equivalent
Rear Axle Wheel
Bearing
Refer to Sectíon 2 of
this manualfor
lubrication procedure
Whenever rear axle
bearing or seals are
being serviced
Special-Purpose
Grease. Refer to
2.34.2. "MAN Axle
Approved Greases"
on page 95 in this
section for listing
lsNOTe:
Moderate regions are defined as geographic locations where the average monthly temperature
does not exceed 25"C (77"F) for more than two months of the year.
Hot regions are defined as geographic locations where the average monthly temperature
exceeds 25"C (77"F) for more than two months of the year.
PM
.94
The New Flyer veh¡cles described in this manual may be protectod by one or more
patents and design applications or registrâtions ¡n the United States and Canada,
and in other countr¡es. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformatlon" in this manual.
Rev. A
-Jan 20 2015
l\l Ë,uV F l-Y'Ë,Fl
2.34.1. MAN Axle Approved Synthetic Oils
Lubricants used in the rear axle must meet
MAN specifications. Oil composition and
additives are critical
to
maintaining the
designed operating life of the axle components. The use of unapproved oils has
been shown to accelerate the wear rate of
internal components and shorten the over-
all lifespan of the axle. The use of unapproved oils will void the warranty coverage
on the axle. The following table provides a
list of approved oils that are available in
North America.
Product Brand Name (Viscosity)
MAN Specification
Mobil Delvac Synthetic Gear Oil (SAE 75W-90)
Castrol SAF-XO (SAE 75W-90)
Castrol Syntrax Long Life (SAE 75W-90)
MAN 342 51
Shell Spirax ASX (SAE 75W-90)
MAN 342 51
Shell Spirax 56 AXME (SAE 75W-90)
MAN 342 51
2.34.2. MAN Axle Approved Greases
The lubricants used on MAN axles are
special-purpose greases that meet the
requirements of the specific application
and must not be substituted with alternate
grease products. The following table provides a list of approved greases that are
available in North America.
Product Brand Name
Front Axle Steering Knuckle
Fuchs Renolit LX-OTP 2
Rear Axle Wheel Bearing
Fuchs Renolit LX-PEP 2
MAN Specification
Fuchs Renolit LX-NHU 2
Rev, A - Jan 20 2015
The New Flyer vehicles descr¡bed in this manual may be prctectèd by one or more
patents and design appllcations or regiskations in th'e Uriited States'and Canâda,
and in other countries. Refer to "Vehicle Patent lnformat¡on" in thls manual.
Copyrlght @ 2015 New Flyer lndustries Canada ULC
PM-95
Exhibit C
OPERATING BUDGET (Contractor’s Approved Operating Budget)
(Incorporated at time of award)
Exhibit D
ABCDE CONCESSION PROGRAM
Exhibit D-1
MONTHLY REPORT ON PARTICIPATION (Goods and Services Expenditures)
Exhibit D-2
MONTHLY REPORT ON PARTICIPATION (Management Fee and Operations Costs)
Exhibit E
STATEMENT PROVISIONS
Exhibit F
STANDARD PROVISIONS
Exhibit G
AUTHORITY DIRECTIVES
Exhibit G1
PROPERTY ASSETS MANAGEMENT, DIRECTIVE BA-001A
Exhibit G-2
MOTOR FLEET MANAGEMENT, DIRECTIVE BA-002
Exhibit G-3
TRAVEL POLICY, DIRECTIVE F1-004, CHANGE 1
Exhibit H
CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL (to be added following Contract award)
Exhibit I
COLLECTIVE BARGANING AGREEMENT
Exhibit J
DRAFT “MANUAL”
(to be added following Contract award)
Exhibit K
AUTHORITY DESIGNATED BANKING ACCOUNT

Draft Contract - Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority

Transcription

Similar documents

Ah-Nab-Awen Park - City of Grand Rapids

Directions to UCSD Extension K-12 Facility Located at: 6256

Schottenstein Center

CSAH 5 Newletter - Sherburne County

Parking Lot Striping - Parking Control Unit

Pencader Corporate Center

Construction In Brief: Winter 2009 - Cohen Seglias Pallas Greenhall

Managing Contractor Owned Equipment Leased To the Owner`s

Event Parking

just steps away - Arts District Hyattsville